Home

Manual Alvarion BreezeACCESS VL

1. 2 5 5 1 Wall Mount The installation kit includes 2 plastic anchors and 2 8 screws 1 If anchors are needed wall board plaster board etc drill two holes for the anchors using a 5 mm drill bit and insert anchors Use a 9 64 drill bit for screwing directly into a solid surface stud 2 Fasten the antenna to the wall Refer to Figure 2 15 for directions Use the two 8 screws provided with the kit Do not over tighten 3 Connect the antenna cable to the connector located on the bottom side of the antenna Hand tighten do not use a wrench or a similar tightening tool Do not over tighten Installation 53 Chapter 2 Installation d r Dee Fragen y H s Te Seto se Se Vs y Ka V rb ach EEA ET nt E Figure 2 15 Wall Mounting the Antenna 2 5 5 2 Wall Mount with Rotation Capability The installation kit includes 4 L type mounting plates one top one bottom one Wall V and one Wall H 6 M5 screws with washers and spring washers 2 plastic anchors and 2 8 screws 1 Ifanchors are needed wall board plaster board etc drill two holes 361 mm apart for the anchors using a 5 mm drill bit and insert anchors Use a 9 64 drill bit for screwing directly into a solid surface stud 2 Assemble the top L type plate with the Wall V L type plate Note the Wall V plate is the one with the vertical ellipse on the short side Make sure the inscriptions are facing upwards Use two M5 screws to fasten the
2. An SU is only removed from the list of associated SUs under the following conditions A SNAP frame is received from another AU indicating that the SU is now associated with the other AU The SU failed to respond to a certain number of consecutive frames transmitted by the AU and is considered to have aged out Number of Associations Since Last Reset For SUs displays the total number of associations with any AU since the last reset including duplicate associations with the same AU For AUs displays the number of SUs that have associated with the AU since the last reset including duplicate associations with the same SU Unit Status SU only The current status of the SU There are two status options SCANNING The SU is searching for an AU with which to associate If the DFS Option is enabled and the SU is currently looking for its previous AU the AU s MAC Address will be displayed ASSOCIATED The SU is associated with an AU BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters E AU MAC Address SU only The MAC address of the AU with which the unit is currently associated If the unit is not associated with any AU the address defaults to the IEEE broadcast address which is FF FF FF FF FF FF E Unit Hardware Version The version of the outdoor unit hardware E Unit BOOT Version The version of the BOOT SW E Time Since Last Reset E Flash Versions Running from Shows whether the unit is running fr
3. Introducing BreezeACCESS VL page 2 Base Station Equipment page 4 Subscriber Unit page 7 BreezeACCESS VL B amp B 4 9 GHz only page 10 Networking Equipment page 11 Management Systems page 12 Specifications page 14 Chapter 1 System Description ed Introducing BreezeACCESS VL BreezeACCESS VL is a high capacity IP services oriented Broadband Wireless Access system The system employs wireless packet switched data technology to support high speed IP services including fast Internet and Virtual Private Networks BreezeACCESS VL users are provided with a network connection that is always on supporting immediate access to the Internet and other IP services at high data rates The system is designed for cellular like deployment enabling the system architecture to vary in size and structure A system can include any number of cells each containing several Access Units for better coverage of densely populated areas BreezeACCESS VL can support sensitive applications through authentication and or data encryption utilizing WEP or AES algorithm with 128 bit keys FIPS Federal Information Processing Standards 197 certified encryption algorithm is optionally available for Access Units with HW revision C and higher except to AUS units The system supports Virtual LANs based on IEEE 802 1Q enabling secure operation and Virtual Private Network VPN services and enabling tele workers or remote offices to convenientl
4. BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 5 9 2 4 2 6 5 9 3 The default selection is Enable Minimum Interval Between Adaptive Modulation Messages The Minimum Interval Between Adaptive Modulation Messages sets the minimum interval between two consecutive adaptive modulation messages carrying information on the SNR of received signals The messages in the AU include SNR information on all the SUs associated with it The available range is from 1 to 3600 seconds The default is 4 seconds Adaptive Modulation Decision Thresholds Enables selection between Normal and High decision thresholds for the Adaptive Modulation algorithm In links with a low SNR below 13 the Adaptive Modulation algorithm may not stabilize on the correct modulation level when using the standard decision thresholds In this case the algorithm may try to use a modulation level that is too high resulting in a relatively large number of dropped frames The High option solves this limitation and ensures good performance also in links with a low SNR The default is Normal 4 2 6 5 10 Concatenation Parameters The Concatenation mechanism enables bundling several data frames into a single frame for transmission to the wireless link This feature improves throughput and reduces the overhead in the wireless medium by requiring only one CRC for each concatenated frame one RTS CTS cycle if applicable and a single waiting period according
5. Integer 1 10 detections Integer disable 1 enable 2 na 255 DisplayString For 5 8 GHz products with SW version below 2 0 the range is 5740 to 5830 MHz using a 10 MHz resolution For units with SW version 2 0 and up the range is as defined in the selected Sub Band DisplayString For 5 8 GHz products with SW version below 2 0 the range is 5740 to 5830 MHz using a 10 MHz resolution For units with SW version 2 0 and up the range is as defined in the selected Sub Band Integer setAllSelectedFreqsSubset 1 cancel 2 233 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB AutoSubBandFrequencySubsetBandldx AutoSubBandFrequencySubsetEntry 1 AutoSubBandFrequencySubsetFrequen cyldx AutoSubBandFrequencySubsetEntry 2 AutoSubBandFrequencySubsetActive AutoSubBandFrequencySubsetEntry 3 AutoSubBandFrequencySubsetFrequen cy AutoSubBandFrequencySubsetEntry 4 ATPC Airlnterface 13 AtpcOption ATPC 1 DeltaFromMinSNRLevel ATPC 2 MinimumSNR Level ATPC 3 MinimumIntervalBetweenATPC Messages ATPC 4 PowerLevelSteps ATPC 6 CellDistanceParameters Airlnterface 15 Applicable to SU RB with SW version 4 0 and higher Read only The index of the applicable Sub Band This is the Sub Band ID of the relevant entry in the Country Dependent Parameters table Serves also as an index of the entry inthe Auto Sub Babd Frequency Subset Table Applicable to SU
6. MAC Address Integer associated 1 authenticated 2 notAuthenticated 3 AdbSwvVersion Applicable to AU BU Read only The Display String AUAdbEntry 4 SW Version of the relevant SU AdbSNR AUAdbEntry 5 AdbMaxModulationLevel AUAdbEntry 6 AdbTxFrames Total AUAdbEntry 7 AdbDroppedFramesTotal AUAdb_Entry 8 AdbTxSuccessModLevel1 AUAdbEntry 9 AdbTxSuccess ModLevel2 AUAdbEntry 10 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Applicable to AU BU Read only The average Signal to Noise Ratio in dB of frames received by the AU from the relevant SU Applicable to AU BU Read only The value configured in the relevant SU for the Maximum Modulation Level parameter Applicable to AU BU Read only Counts the total number of frames excluding retransmissions that were transmitted by the AU to the relevant SU Applicable to AU BU Read only Counts the total number of intended to the relevant SU that were dropped because they were retransmitted by the AU to the extent of the maximum allowed number of retransmissions without being acknowledged Applicable to AU BU Read only Counts the total number of unicast frames excluding retransmissions that were successfully transmitted to the SU over the wireless link using modulation level 1 Applicable to AU BU Read only Counts the total number of unicast frames excluding retransmissions that were successfully transmitted to the SU over the wirel
7. MIB Parameter Value Range CirDownlink ServiceParameters 4 CirUplink ServiceParameters 5 MaxDelay ServiceParameters 6 MaxBurstDuration ServiceParameters 7 GracefulDegradationLimit ServiceParameters 8 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Applicable to SU only Not applicable to BreezeNET B products The Committed Information Rate CIR from AU to SU CIR must be below brzaccVLMirDownlink value Applicable to SU only Not applicable to BreezeNET B products The Committed Information Rate CIR from SU to AU CIR must be below brzaccVLMirUplink value Applicable to SU only Not applicable to BreezeNET B products The maximal time packets may be delayed by the CIR MIR mechanism Above the configured maximal period the packets are discarded Applicable to AU and SU Not applicable to BreezeNET B products The maximum time during which inactivity bonus time can be accumulated for future burst transmissions Applicable to AU only Not applicable to BreezeNET B products The maximum limit for activating the graceful degradation algorithm Integer Range for Set SU 3 with SW version below 4 0 0 2 048 Kbps SU 3 with SW version 4 0 or higher 0 3 072 Kbps SU 6 with SW version below 4 0 0 3 968 Kbps SU 6 with SW version 4 0 or higher 0 6 016 Kbps SU 54 0 45 056 Kbps SU I 0 6 016 Kbps The actual value Get will be the entered value rounde
8. 4 2 6 6 3 5 4 Number of HW Retries for Low Priority Traffic The Number of HW Retries for Low Priority Traffic defines the maximum number of times that an unacknowledged low priority unicast packet can be retransmitted This is the value that will be used by the AU and by the SUs served with it The range is from 1 to 14 times The default is 10 times 4 2 6 6 3 5 5AU Burst Duration for High Priority Traffic The AU Burst Duration for High Priority Traffic parameter defines the maximum duration of a burst that can be made by the AU for high priority packets The measurement unit is 250 microseconds and the range is from 1 to 40 0 25 to 10 milliseconds or O to disable bursts for high priority packets The default is 16 4 milliseconds 4 2 6 6 3 5 6AU Burst Duration for Low Priority Traffic The AU Burst Duration for Low Priority Traffic parameter defines the maximum duration of a burst that can be made by the AU for low priority packets The measurement unit is 250 microseconds and the range is from 1 to 40 0 25 to 10 milliseconds or O to disable bursts for low priority packets The default is 20 5 milliseconds Operation and Administration 189 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 6 3 5 7SU Burst Duration for High Priority Traffic The SU Burst Duration for Ligh Priority Traffic parameter defines the maximum duration of a burst that can be made by the SUs served by the AU for high priority packets
9. File Download and Upload Using TFTP eeccseeseeeee 199 Appendix C Using the Set Factory Defaults Utility 0 0 eee 203 Appendix D Preparing the Indoor to Outdoor SU Cable 205 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual xix Contents Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB civssccccssccccseeccesecssaccseacrscesedestesenneetns 209 E 1 System Object Identifiers 0 sccccessseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeeeseeeneeseeeeneeeeeeseeeeeenseeees 210 E 2 bteeseikoeessvEhibt egene eier Egt seg Geh cad ens tse sede aenseenneaeediiras eatin aden 212 E 2 1 System Information Parameters AAA 212 E22 Unit Control Parameters genge 215 E 2 3 Network Management Parameters cccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeenes 218 E 2 4 IP E an 220 E 2 5 Bridge Parameters xccssctsstcareivacaecstiereienctmexcertasndanelitnabnterss aAa a a oaii 221 E 2 6 Air Interface Parameters s msikcicsscscescesesoreecesiatnessonetedanscznnerdnuedectiaszentenenedendinexeane 225 E27 Service Parameters e SES 238 LE e Ra 246 E29 Sec rit Parameter guest 247 E 2 10 Performance En 249 E 2 11 Site Survey Parameters geess cascessedineersceensxcudeeeosansdeetecenaneetianenearueaeneieeeee 251 E 3 Supported Traps coco vacancies ese te ee 260 E 3 1 Trap Matleed Eegen 260 E32 Private Ke 0 eee ene eee ee er 261 Appendix F Parameters Summary 265 F 1 Parameters SUMMA sscesecsssesssesseesnesnesesessesssesnseeeseseesnsaesneesaesaesaesenesnenens 266 F 1 1 U
10. Valid values A string of up to 8 printable ASCII characters Refer to section 4 1 for a list of the default passwords for each of the access levels Flash Memory Control The Flash Memory Control submenu enables selecting the active software version for the unit The flash memory can store two software versions One version is called Main and the other is called Shadow New software versions are loaded as the shadow version You can select the shadow version as the new active version by selecting Reset and Boot from Shadow Version However after the next reset the main version is re activated To continue using the currently active version after the next reset select Use Running Version After Reset The previous shadow version will be the new main version and vice versa The parameters configured in the unit are not changed as a result of loading new software versions unless the new version includes additional parameters or additional changes in the list of parameters New parameters are loaded with their default values Select from the following options BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 3 6 Reset and Boot from Shadow Version Activates the shadow backup software version The unit is reset automatically Following the next reset the unit will switch to the main version Use Running Version After Reset Defines the current running version as the new main version This version will also be used fo
11. or Not Set Yet only in factory when upgraded to SW version 2 0 from a lower version it will be set automatically to one of these options Once a value is configured it is not possible to reconfigure the unit to either Don t Care or Not Set Yet The default value depends on unit type In SUs with integral antenna it is set to 21 read only The default value for AUs that are supplied with a detached antenna is in accordance with the antenna s gain In units supplied without an antenna the default is typically Not Set Yet 4 2 6 2 10 Cell Distance Parameters AU only The higher the distance of an SU from the AU that is serving it the higher the time it takes for messages sent by one of them to reach the other To ensure appropriate services to all SUs regardless of their distance from the AU while maintaining a high overall performance level two parameters should be adapted to the distances of SUs from the serving AU E The time that a unit waits for a response message before retransmission ACK timeout should take into account the round trip propagation delay between the AU and the SU The one way propagation delay at 5 GHz is 3 3 Operation and Administration 137 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 2 10 1 138 microseconds per km 5 microseconds per mile The higher the distance from the AU of the SU served by it the higher the ACK timeout should be The ACK timeout in microseco
12. Counter 32 AUAdbEntry 21 the total number of failures to successfully transmit a unicast frame intended to the SU during a HW Retry cycle using modulation level 5 AdbTxFailed ModLevel6 Applicable to AU BU Read only Counts Counter 32 AUAdbEntry 22 the total number of failures to successfully transmit a unicast frame intended to the SU during a HW Retry cycle using modulation level 6 AdbTxFailed ModLevel7 Applicable to AU BU Read only Counts Counter 32 AUAdbEntry 23 the total number of failures to successfully transmit a unicast frame intended to the SU during a HW Retry cycle using modulation level 7 AdbTxFailed ModLevel8 Applicable to AU BU Not applicable to Counter 32 AUAdbEntry 24 units with HW revision A Read only Counts the total number of failures to successfully transmit a unicast frame intended to the SU during a HW Retry cycle using modulation level 8 AdbCirTx Applicable to AU Only Not applicable to Integer AUAdbEntry 25 BreezeNET B products Read only The value configured in the relevant SU for the CIR Uplink parameter AdbMirTx Applicable to AU BU Read only The Integer AUAdbEntry 26 value configured in the relevant SU for the MIR Uplink parameter AdbCirRx Applicable to AU Not applicable to Integer AUAdbEntry 27 BreezeNET B products Read only The value configured in the relevant SU for the CIR Downlink parameter AdbMirRx Applicable to AU BU Read only The I
13. FramesDelayedDueT oSwRetry TxEvents 2 Underrun Events TxEvents 3 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Applicable to all units Read only The Counter 32 number of data frames submitted to the internal bridge via the low priority queue for transmission to the wireless medium Applicable to all units Read only The total number of data frames submitted to the internal bridge for transmission to the wireless medium Applicable to all units Read only The total number of data frames received from the wireless medium including duplicate frames Applicable to all units Read only The number of frames received from the wireless medium with errors CRC errors Applicable to all units Read only The Counter 32 number of frames discarded due to receiving multiple copies Applicable to all units Read only The number of data frames received from the Ethernet port that were discarded by the MIR CIR mechanism to avoid exceeding the maximum allowed information rate Applicable to all units Read only The total number of double concatenated frames that were received from the wireless medium including duplicate frames Applicable to all units Read only The total number of single concatenated frames that were received from the wireless medium including duplicate frames Applicable to all units Read only The total number of concatenated frames with more than two data frames that were received from the wireless medium i
14. broadcast packets when the Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter Option is enabled Applicable to all units The minimum time in minutes between two successive traps that are sent indicating the number of packets that were dropped by the Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter since the last trap was sent Applicable to all units Not applicable to units with SW version 3 1 and higher Priority threshold based on the ToS for frames received from Ethernet port Integer disable 1 enable 2 na 255 Integer disable 1 enable 2 na 255 Integer disable 1 onEthernetOnly 2 onwirelessOnly 3 onBothWirelessAndEthe rnet 4 na 255 Integer disable 1 enable 2 na 255 Integer disable 1 enable 2 na 255 Integer disable 1 enable 2 na 255 Integer disable 1 limitOnlyBroadcasts 2 limitMulticastsExceptBro adcasts 3 limitAllMulticasts 4 Integer 0 204800 Integer 1 60 Integer 0 7 223 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB RoamingOption BridgeParameters 9 Applicable to SU RB only Disable enable the roaming feature When enabled the SU will start scanning for an AU RB after one second of not receiving beacons from current AU BU Once it found a new AU BU it will also send through the wireless network a roaming SNAP on behalf of its clients informing other devices in the network of their new location When disabled it will wait for seven seconds before
15. na 255 Integer disable 1 enable 2 na 255 Integer disable 1 enable 2 na 255 Integer disable 1 enable 2 na 255 Integer disable 1 enable 2 na 255 Integer wep 1 aesOCB 2 fips197 3 na 255 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual breezeAccessVLMib NeighborAuAuthOption NeighborAuEntry 19 Applicable to SU RB Read only The current Authentication algorithm of the AU BU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU BU Table Applicable to SU RB Read only The current Data Encryption option of the AU BU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU BU Table Applicable to SU Read only The current Per SU Distance Learning option of the AU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU Table NeighborAuDataEncyptOption NeighborAuEntry 20 NeighborAuPerSuDistanceLearning NeighborAuEntry 21 Integer openSysteme 1 sharedKey 2 na 255 Integer disable 1 enable 2 na 255 Integer disable 1 enable 2 na 255 FrequencyDefinition Airlnterface 12 SubBandLowerFrequency FrequencyDefinition 1 SubBandUpperFrequency FrequencyDefinition 2 ScanningStep FrequencyDefinition 3 FrequencySubsetTable FrequencyDefinition 4 FrequencySubsetEntry FrequencySubsetTable 1 FrequencySubsetTableldx FrequencySubsetEntry 1 Frequency Definition parameters ae Applicable to SU RB Not applicab
16. 1 Level6 2 Level7 3 Level8 4 DisplayString Range 10 to the maximum allowed for the applicable modulation level DisplayString Range In SU RB The range is 10 dBm to the power value defined by MaximumTxPower for the applicable modulation level In AU BU The range is 10 dBm to the power value defined by MaximumTxPowerRange for the applicable modulation level DisplayString Range 17 to the maximum value defined by MaximumTxPowerRange for the applicable modulation level Integer 1 4 Levelito5 1 Level6 2 Level7 3 Level8 4 DisplayString Range 10 to the maximum allowed for the applicable modulation level BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 226 breezeAccessVLMib MaxTxPower MaximumTransmitPowerEntry 4 Applicable to SU RB Read only for units with SW version 4 0 and higher The maximum transmit power level that can be either configured for the TxPower parameter or reached by the ATPC algorithm Applicable to AU Not applicable to BreezeNET B products The upper limit for the number of Subscriber Units that can be associated with the AU MaxNumOfAssociations Airlnterface 10 BestAu Airlnterface 11 BestAuSupport BestAu 1 Applicable to SU RB Disable enable the Best AU BU selection mechanism BestAuNoOfScanningAttempts BestAu 2 Applicable to SU RB The number of scanning attempts to collect information for the Best AU BU decision A
17. 1 Parameters UnitHwVersion Sysinfo 1 RunningSoftwareVersion Sysinfo 2 RunningFrom SysInfo 3 MainVersionNumber Sysinfo 4 MainVersionFileName SysInfo 5 ShadowVersionNumber SysInfo 6 ShadowVersionFileName SysInfo 7 UnitMacAddress SysInfo 8 212 platform version Applicable to all units Read only Running software version Applicable to all units Read only The memory main or shadow from which the current version is running from Applicable to all units Read only Main software version number Applicable to all units Read only Main software version file name Applicable to all units Read only Shadow software version number Applicable to all units Read only Shadow software version file name Applicable to all units Read only Unit hardware MAC address DisplayString SIZE 0 32 Integer mainVersion 1 shadowVersion 2 DisplayString SIZE 0 32 DisplayString SIZE 0 32 DisplayString SIZE 0 32 DisplayString SIZE 0 32 MAC address BreezeACCESS VL System Manual breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Value Range UnitType Applicable to all units Integer SysInfo 9 Read only Unit type auBS 1 auSA 2 su 6 BD 3 su 24 BD 4 su 6 1D 5 ausBS 1 ausSA 15 auBS4900 16 auSA4900 17 suBD4900 18 bu B100 19 rb B100 20 AssociatedAU Applicable to SU RB MAC address Sysinfo 10 Read only Associated AU BU MAC
18. 1 1 2 3 5 pole mountable 53 x 26 x 1 1 AU Ant 5 4G 8 Omni 2 5 4 5 pole mountable 70 cm high 6 cm base diameter i AU Ant 4 9G 15 120 2 4 pole mountable 55 x 25 x 1 7 AU Ant 4 9G 9 Omni 1 5 3 pole mountable 46 cm high 5 5 cm base diameter AU Ant 5 8G 14 120 UK 1 4 pole mountable 55x 7 5x5 AU Ant 5 8G 8 Omni Surface or pole mountable 40 cm high 3 2cm 0 23 base diameter ba BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Specifications 1 7 5 4 2 Connectors Table 1 19 Connectors Stand Alone Access Unit ETHERNET 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 Cable connection to a PC crossed Cable connection to a hub straight RADIO 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 AC IN 3 PIN AC power plug AU D SA ODU INDOOR 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 protected by a waterproof sealing assembly ANT N Type jack 50 ohm lightning protected REO N Type jack on a 1 5m cable in the Omni 8 5 8 Antenna 1 7 5 4 3 Electrical Table 1 20 Electrical Specifications Stand Alone Access Unit General Power consumption 25W DU AC power input 85 265 VAC 50 60 Hz AU D SA ODU 54 VDC from the IDU over the indoor outdoor Ethernet cable System Description Chapter 1 System Description 1 7 5 5 25dBi Antenna for B amp B point to point link Table 1 21 25dBi Antenna Specifications Ee ETSI EN 302 085 V1 1 2 2001 02 Range r Elevation Beamwidth 6 1 7 5 6 SU I D Wall Window Detached Antenna Table 1 22 SU I D Wal
19. 2 11 Arbitration Inter Frame Spacing AIFS The time interval between two consecutive transmissions of frames is called Inter Frame Spacing IFS This is the time during which the unit determines whether the medium is idle using the carrier sense mechanism The IFS depends on the type of the next frame to be transmitted as follows Operation and Administration 139 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration z A E SIFS Short Inter Frame Spacing is used for certain frames that should be transmitted immediately such as ACK and CTS frames The value of SIFS is 16 microseconds E DIFS Distributed coordination function Inter Frame Spacing is typically used for other frame types when the medium is free If the unit decides that the medium is not free it will defer transmission by DIFS plus a number of time slots as determined by the Contention Window back off algorithm see section 4 2 6 5 2 after reaching a decision that the medium has become free DIFS equal SIFS plus AIFS where AIFS can be configured to one or two time slots Typically AIFS should be configured to two time slots A value of 1 should only be used in one of the two units in a point to point link where in the other unit the AIFS remains configured to two time slots This ensures that the unit with AIFS configured to one has an advantage over the other unit provided that the Minimum Contention Window section 4 2 6 5 2 parameter in both units is configured
20. 4 Operation and Administration 171 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 5 6 172 The default is the highest supported Modulation Level Table 4 11 Recommended Maximum Modulation Level SNR gt 23 dB 21 dB lt SNR lt 23 dB 16 dB lt SNR lt 21 dB 13 dB lt SNR lt 16 dB 10 dB lt SNR lt 13 dB 8 dB lt SNR lt 10 dB 7 dB lt SNR lt 8 dB 6 dB lt SNR lt 7 dB Maximum Modulation Level Bo ee The maximum supported value depends on the units HW revision and on the Max Modulation Level according to the Sub Band Average SNR Memory Factor The Average SNR Memory Factor defines the weight of history value of last calculated average SNR in the formula used for calculating the current average SNR for received data frames This average SNR is used by the ATPC algorithm in the AU and is also included in the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm information messages transmitted by the AU and the SU The higher the value of this parameter the higher is the weight of history in the formula Available values 1 to 32 1 is for no weight for history meaning that average SNR equals the last measured SNR Default value 5 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 5 7 z 4 2 6 5 8 4 2 6 5 8 1 Number of HW Retries The Number of HW Retries parameter defines the maximum number of times that an unacknowledged packet is retransmitted When the Adaptiv
21. 4 0 July 2006 SW Version 4 0 July 2006 SW Version 4 0 July 2006 SW Version 4 0 July 2006 SW Version 4 0 July 2006 SW Version 4 0 July 2006 SW Version 4 0 July 2006 SW Version 4 0 July 2006 SW Version 4 0 July 2006 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Document History Topic Lost Beacons Transmission Watchdog Threshold Section 4 2 6 2 16 Service Provider Link VLAN QinQ Section 4 2 6 4 1 MAC Address List Section 4 2 6 4 7 Concatenation Section 4 2 6 5 10 MIR Table 4 12 IP Precedence Threshold Section 4 2 6 6 3 2 2 DSCP Threshold Section 4 2 6 6 3 2 3 Percent Section 4 2 6 6 3 4 DRAP support Section 4 2 6 6 4 Gateways Table Section 4 2 5 4 1 Wireless Link Prioritization Section 4 2 6 6 3 5 Low Priority Traffic Minimum Version Date Issued SW Version 4 0 July 2006 Description New feature SW Version 4 0 July 2006 New feature Service Provider Link option added to VLAN Link Type New parameters Service Provider VLAN ID VLAN QinQ Protocol Ethertpe SW Version 4 0 July 2006 Improved functionality New parameter MAC Address List Action SW Version 4 0 July 2006 Improved mechanism New parameter Maximum Concatenated Frame Size Removed Maximum Number of Frames SW Version 4 0 July 2006 Changes in values of Downlink MIR for SU 3 SU 6 SW Version 4 0 July 2006 Default value updated SW Versio
22. 6 4096 SU 54 128 53888 Kbps SU 54 32896 SU I 128 2048 Kbps SU I 2048 SU 3 0 2048 Kbps 0 Kbps No SU 6 0 4096 Kbps SU 54 0 45056 Kbps SU I 0 6016 Kbps 0 o Set Change Filter IP Address Ranges o Maximum Delay Maximum Burst Duration Graceful Degradation Limit___ VLAN Priority Threshold ToS Prioritization Option 0 0 0 0 TO 0 0 0 0 all 8 entries No DHCP Unicast Override Filter MIR Downlink Wal Cc Z O Wal C gt n Wal Cc Cc Cc cic Cc Z OO ojo O ojojojo MIR Uplink CIR Downlink CIR Uplink SU 3 0 2048 Kbps Kbps N SU 6 0 4096 Kbps SU 54 0 45056 Kbps SU I 0 2048 Kbps Maximum Delay SU 300 10 000 ms 5 000 ms Maximum Burst Duration AU SU 0 2 000 ms Graceful Degradation Limit AU 0 70 70 MIR Only Option m Disable Enable H Enable VLAN Priority Threshold AU S o AU SU Disable Disable Enable IP Precedence RFC791 Prioritization Enable DSCP RFC2474 Prioritization IP Precedence Threshold AU S DSCP Threshold AU S 0 63 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 272 Parameters Summary Parameter unt Rane Le L ns UDP TCP Port Ranges Prioritization Option Enable Only for UDP Enable Only for TCP Enable for both UDP and TCP UDP RTP RTCP RTP amp RTCP Prioritization RTP Only TCP RTP RTCP Prioritization AU SU H RTP amp RTCP RTP amp RTCP RTP Only Low Priority Traffic Minimum AU SU P 10
23. 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 11 brzAccessVLOID 11 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 12 brzAccessVLOID 12 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 13 brzAccessVLOID 13 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 14 brzAccessVLOID 14 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 15 brzAccessVLOID 15 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 16 brzAccessVLOID 16 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 17 brzAccessVLOID 17 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 17 brzAccessVLOID 18 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 21 brzAccessVLOID 21 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 22 brzAccessVLOID 22 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 23 brzAccessVLOID 23 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 31 brzAccessVLOID 31 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 32 brzAccessVLOID 32 brzNetB RB B100 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 33 brzAccessVLOID 33 brzAccess4900 AU BS OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 41 brzAccessVLOID 41 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 210 System Object Identifiers omer rm brzAccess4900 AU SA OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 42 brzAccessVLOID 42 brzAccess4900 SU BD OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 51 brzAccessVLOID 51 brzAccessVLProducts OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 3 brzAccessVLOID 3 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 211 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB E 2 breezeAccessVLMib OBJECT IDENTIFIER 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 1 1 E21 An is used instead of the brzaccVL prefix System Information Parameters Applicable to all units Read only Hardware Value Range DisplayString SIZE 0 32 Sysinfo System Information breezeAccessVLMib
24. 7 Monitor program Telnet telnetLogin 1 telnetLogout 2 Traps 8 Telnet user Traps 9 TrapFtpOrTftpStatus Applicable to all units successful 1 Traps 10 The status of the last FTP TFTP loading failed 2 process TrapDFSMoveFreq Applicable to AU BU with HW revision B Integer Traps 11 and lower for units with HW revision C and higher replaced by TrapDFSMoveFreq New to support a resolution of 0 5 MHz The new frequency in MHz after detecting radar on a previous channel TrapDFSMoveFreqNew Applicable to AU BU The new frequency in DisplayString Traps 12 MHZ after detecting radar on a previous channel Replaces TrapDFSMoveF req to support a resolution of 0 5 MHz for units with HW revision C and higher EthBroadcastThresholdExceeded Applicable to all units The number of Integer Traps 13 packets that were dropped by the Ethernet broadcast multicast limiter BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 260 Supported Traps TrapSubscriberT ype Applicable to AUS only The type of Integer Traps 14 subscriber that was rejected by the AUS unknownSubscriberType 0 AUS can serve up to 8 SUs Only SU 3 su 3 3 SU 6 and SU I are supported su 6 6 rb 14 14 su 24 24 rb 28 28 su 54 54 rb So 100 TrapMACAddress Applicable to BU RB only MAC erz Traps 15 The MAC address of the BU RB unit whose type has been changed NewUnitType Applicable to BU RB only Sech Traps
25. AU Parameters menu includes the following options Best AU Support The Best AU Support option enables or disables the Best AU selection feature The default is Disable If the Best AU feature is not used the SU associates with the first AU it finds whose ESSID or Operator ESSID is identical to its own ESSID BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 2 6 2 Number Of Scanning Attempts When the Best AU option is enabled the SU gathers information on neighboring AUs for approximately 2 seconds on each of the scanned frequencies The Number of Scanning Attempts parameter defines the number of times that the process will be repeated for all relevant frequencies A higher number may result in a better decision at the cost of an increased scanning time during which the SU is not operational Valid values 1 255 Default value 4 4 2 6 2 6 3 Preferred AU MAC Address The Preferred AU MAC Address parameter defines a specific AU with which the SU should associate Gaining control of the SUs association is a powerful tool in network management The Preferred AU MAC Address parameter is intended for applications where there is a need to dictate the preferred AU with which the SU should associate To prevent the SU from associating with the first viable AU it finds the Best AU Support mechanism should be enabled Once the SU has identified the preferred AU based on its MAC address it will associate with it and terminate th
26. Active scanning when searching for an AU In passive scanning the SU listens to the wireless medium for approximately two seconds at each frequency searching for beacons The disassociation period which is the time from the moment the link was lost until the SU decides that it should start searching for another AU is approximately seven seconds In some situations when there is a high probability that SUs might need to roam among different AUs the use of active scanning enables to significantly reduce the link establishment time This is achieved by using shorter dwell periods transmitting a Probe Request at each frequency This reduces the time spent at each frequency as well as the disassociation period When DFS Option is enabled Scanning Mode is forced to Passive The default selection is Passive Power Control Parameters The Automatic Transmit Power Control ATPC algorithm simplifies the installation process and ensures optimal performance while minimizing interference to other units This is achieved by automatically adjusting the power level transmitted by each SU according to the actual level at which it is received by the AU To support proper operation of the system with optimal performance and minimum interference between neighboring sectors the ATPC algorithm should be enabled in all units The algorithm is controlled by the AU that calculates for each received frame the average SNR at which it receives transmissio
27. BS PS AC EE Gau OVER Temp m Ay WARNING 1 CONNECT POWER CORD AFTER P S I9 INSERTED 2 DISCONNECT POWER CORD BEFORE PS 1S REMOVED Figure 2 20 BS PS AC Front Panel The BS PS AC includes a power input connector marked AC IN for connecting the AC power cord to the mains The ON OFF Power Switch controls the flow of mains power to the power supply module Table 2 4 BS PS LED Functionality 54V Green LED Indicates that the 54V power supply module is OK 3 3V Green LED Indicates that the 3 3V power supply module is OK OVER TEMP Red LED Indicates an over temperature condition in the power supply module BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment 2 6 3 BS PS DC Power Supply Module The BS PS DC is a DC to DC converter that provides power to all the BS AU modules installed in the BS SH chassis Figure 2 21 shows the BS PS DC front panel OVER TEMP ON Figure 2 21 BS PS DC Front Panel The BS PS DC provides a power input connector marked 48VDC for connecting the 48 VDC power source to the module The color codes of the cable wires are as follows E Black pin 2 48 VDC E White pin 1 Return E Shield pin 3 The ON OFF Power Switch controls the flow of mains power to the power supply module The functionality of the LEDs is described in Table 2 4 Installation 61 Chapter 2 Installation 2 6 4 BS AU Network Int
28. Chapter 4 Operation and Administration E Signal Width The average width in microseconds of signals excluding OFDM frames with the correct bandwidth in the channel E OFDM Frames The number of OFDM frames with the correct bandwidth detected in the channel 4 2 6 2 15 7 Spectrum Analysis Information Display Continuous The Spectrum Analysis Information Display Continuous option is available only when the analysis process is active It enables viewing the continuously updated results of the current analysis process The displayed information includes the same details available for a regular Spectrum Analysis Information Display option 4 2 6 2 16 Lost Beacons Transmission Watchdog Threshold 4 2 6 2 17 4 2 6 2 18 144 When it is unable to send beacon frames for a predetermined period of time such as in the case of interferences the AU resets itself The Lost Beacons Transmission Threshold parameter represents the number of consecutive lost beacons after which the unit will reset itself The range for this parameter is 100 1000 or 0 When the parameter is set to 0 this feature is disabled i e internal refresh will never be performed The default value is 218 Disassociate AU only The Disassociate feature enables disassociating all SUs associated with the AU or a selected SU This feature is useful during configuration changes enabling to force the SU s to re initiate the association process including the se
29. Description Value Range ServiceParameters Applicable to all units breezeAccessVLMib 7 Service parameters MirDownlink Applicable to SU RB The ServiceParameters 2 Maximum Information Rate MIR from AU BU to SU RB MIR must be above brzaccVLCirDownlink value Integer Range for Set SU 3 with SW version below 4 0 128 2 048 Kbps SU 3 with SW version 4 0 or higher 128 3 072 Kbps SU 6 with SW version below 4 0 128 3 968 Kbps SU 6 with SW version 4 0 or higher 128 6 016 Kbps SU 54 128 53 888 Kbps SU I 128 6 016 Kbps RB 14 128 6 912 Kbps RB 28 128 22 016 Kbps RB 100 128 107 904 Kbps The actual value Get will be the entered value rounded to the nearest multiple of 128 MirUplink Applicable to SU RB The ServiceParameters 3 Maximum Information Rate MIR from SU RB to AU BU MIR must be above brzaccVLCirUplink value Integer Range for Set SU 3 with SW version below 4 0 128 2 048 Kbps SU 3 with SW version 4 0 or higher 128 3 072 Kbps SU 6 with SW version below 4 0 128 3 968 Kbps SU 6 with SW version 4 0 or higher 128 6 016 Kbps SU 54 128 53 888 Kbps SU I 128 2 048 Kbps RB 14 128 6 912 Kbps RB 28 128 22 016 Kbps RB 100 128 107 904 Kbps The actual value Get will be the entered value rounded to the nearest multiple of 128 N 128 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 238 breezeAccessVLMib
30. Ethernet traffic between the indoor and the outdoor units and also transfers power 54 VDC and control from the indoor unit to the outdoor unit 1 3 2 SU l Subscriber Units The SU I is a compact Subscriber Unit intended for indoor installations by a non professional user The SU I connects to a detached wall window mountable antenna and is available in the following configurations BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Subscriber Unit Table 1 5 SU I Subscriber Units SU I D All indoor medium rate CPE supporting a full LAN anda wall window antenna kit SU I E All indoor medium rate CPE supporting a full LAN antenna not included The SU I is currently available in the 5 4 GHz and 5 8 GHz bands Ed It is recommended to pre configure the units prior to shipment to end users 1 3 3 The SU E BS The SU E BS is a special variant of a Subscriber Unit where the indoor unit is designed for installation in the Base Station chassis The outdoor unit is an SU E ODU with a connection to an external antenna The SU E BS is intended primarily for backhauling or similar applications including applications where it is used in conjunction with a GFSK based system The functionality of the LEDs of the module is the same as the LEDS of a regular AU IDU module with one minor exception the W LNK LED indicates whether the SU is associated with an AU System Description Chapter 1 System Description 1 4 BreezeACCESS VL B am
31. Figure 4 1 Main Menu Administrator Level 83 Figure 4 2 Ethernet Connector Pin Assignments ssesseesseesseeeseseiettttttnttnnttnntnnntnnntnnstnnntnnnnnnnen nenn 206 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual xxiv Tables Table 1 1 Frequency Bande 3 Table 1 2 AU Detached Antennas cece ee eceeeeaaeeeeeee sean eeeeaeeeeaae scenes saeeeseaaeseneeeseaeeesaeeeeeneeeeeee 5 Table 1 3 Subscriber Unit ODU Types 0 0 eceeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeee sence ee ceaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeeseaesseaeeeseaeessaeeseaeeseeeeee 7 Table 1 4 SU A E Subscriber Unit Types ccccececececeeeeeceeeeeeee eens eeeeaeeeeaae scenes seaeeeeeaeseceeeeseaeessaeeeeeeseeeeee 8 Mapeo SU use d Tu 9 TAAG TOARE Viera EE 14 Table 1 7 Data Communication 16 Table 1 8 Configuration and Management 17 Table 1 9 Standards Compliance General 18 Table 1 10 Mechanical Specifications SU A E Subscriber Unit sssnnsssnnssssnnesenennnnnnrnnstnnnnntnnnnsnnn nnne 19 Table 1 11 Connectors SU A E Subscriber Un 20 Table 1 12 Electrical Specifications SU A E Subscriber Unit ce ccccccessseeeecessseeeeeesneeeeessneeeeessneeeeeees 20 Table 1 13 Mechanical and Electrical Specifications SU Subscriber Unit cc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeenees 21 Table 1 14 Connectors SU Subscriber Unit c ccc cceeeeece eens ee eeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeesaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeesaaeeeenees 21 Table 1 15 Mechanical Specifications Modular Base Station Equipment ssse
32. MAC addresses as belonging to devices that are either granted or denied service When the list is defined as a Deny List the AU will not provide services to a unit whose MAC address is included in the list enabling to disconnect units in cases such as when the user had fraudulently succeeded to configure the unit to values different from the subscription plan When the list is defined as an Allow List the AU will provide services only to units with a MAC address that is included in the list The MAC Address List submenu includes the following Operation and Administration 165 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 4 7 1 4 2 6 4 7 2 4 2 6 4 7 3 4 2 6 4 7 4 4 2 6 4 8 166 Add MAC Address to List Select Add MAC Address to List to add a MAC Address to the List Remove MAC Address from List Select Remove MAC Address from List to remove a MAC Address from the List MAC Address List Action This parameter defines the working mode of the MAC list E In the case of an Allowed list if the MAC address is included in the list the SU will be able to associate itself with the AU and receive permission for generating traffic if it is not found in the list it will still be associated but without the permission to generate traffic E In the case of a Deny list if the MAC address is included in the list the SU will be able to associate itself with the AU but will not be able to generate traffic otherwise if the a
33. Mounting kit providing a tilt range of 15 is available from Alvarion The Tilt kit can be attached to the ODU and be mounted on a 1 to 4 pole using two 9 16 wide metal bands 2 3 2 1 Polarization The new SU A ODU can be pole mounted to provide either vertical or horizontal polarization Polarization Arrow Grounding Screw Figure 2 3 Back View of the new SU A ODU The Polarization Arrow on the back of the unit indicates the type of polarization E For vertical polarization install the unit with the Polarization Arrow pointing upward as in the figure above m BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Installing the Outdoor Unit E For horizontal polarization install the unit with the Polarization Arrow pointing sideward and the connectors facing downward 2 3 2 2 Pole Mounting the ODU Using the Clamp Figure 2 4 and Figure 2 5 illustrate how to mount an ODU on a pole using the clamp and threaded rods Ed There is a groove on one end of the threaded rod Be sure to insert the threaded rods with the grooves pointing outward and fasten them to the unit using a screwdriver Install the unit with the bottom panel which includes the connectors facing downward Figure 2 4 New SU A ODU Pole Installation Using the Special Clamp Vertical Polarization Installation 39 Chapter 2 Installation Figure 2 5 New SU A ODU Pole Installation Using the Special Clamp Horizontal Polarization j m Breez
34. O has a special meaning for No Compensation Acknowledge Time Out is set to a value representing the maximum distance of 54 km The time slot size is set to its minimal value of 9 microseconds The default is O No Compensation 4 2 6 2 10 3 Fairness Factor The Fairness Factor enables to define the level of fairness in providing services to different SUs When set to 100 all SUs have the same probability of getting services when competing for bandwidth If set to X then SUs located up to X of the maximum distance from the AU will have an advantage in getting services over SUs located farther than this distance The range is O to 100 The default is 100 4 2 6 2 10 4 Per SU Distance Learning The Per SU Distance Learning option defines the mode in which SUs calculate the ACK timeout based on the maximum cell distance or on the actual distance from the AU When this feature is disabled all SUs in the cell use for the calculation of the ACK timeout the maximum cell distance when enabled each SU uses instead its actual distance from the AU The options are Disable or Enable The default is Disable 4 2 6 2 10 5 Show Cell Distance Parameters Select Show Cell Distance Parameters to view the Cell Distance parameters In addition the Measured Maximum Cell Distance and the MAC address of the unit that the mechanism found to be the farthest from the AU are displayed A distance of 1 km means any distance below 2 km 4 2 6
35. RB with SW version 4 0 and higher Read only The index of the applicable frequency in the applicable Sub Band Serves also as an index of the entry in the Auto Sub Band Frequency Subset Table Applicable to SU RB with SW version 4 0 and higher The status of an entry in the Auto Sub Band Frequency Subset Table The frequency of an active entry will be included in the final list of frequencies to be used for scanning Applicable to SU RB with SW version 4 0 and higher Read only The frequency in MHz of the entry in the Auto Sub Band Frequency Subset table Applicable to all units Enabling disabling the ATPC Algorithm Applicable to AU BU The Minimum SNR Level plus the value of this parameter define the maximum desired level of the average SNR at the AU BU If the ATPC Option is enabled than if the received SNR is above the maximum desired level the AU BU will transmit Power Down messages to the applicable SU RB Applicable to AU BU Defines the minimum desired level in dB of the average SNR at the AU BU Below this level if ATPC Option is enabled the AU BU will transmit ATPC Power Up messages to the applicable SU RB Applicable to AU BU The minimal time between consecutive power up power down messages Applicable to AU BU The step in dB that the SU RB will use when receiving an ATPC Power Up Power Down message Integer 1 5 Integer 1 40 Integer active 1 notActive 2 DisplayString Int
36. RJ 45 connector 3 Put the sealing cap back in its place Make sure that the small protrusion on the side of the cap fits inside the hole on the connector s protective body gt Figure 2 11 Connecting the IDU COM connector and inserting the Sealing Cap 4 Use appropriate sealing material to protect the connection against moisture and humidity Use removable sealing material to enable future access to the connector z Use high quality sealing material such as Scotch 130C Linerless Rubber Splicing Tape from 3M to ensure IP 67 compliant protection against dust and water 5 Route the cable to the location selected for the indoor equipment 6 Assemble a shielded RJ 45 connector with a protective cover on the indoor end of the IDU ODU cable See Appendix D for instructions on preparing the cable Installation Chapter 2 Installation 2 4 Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit The unit can be placed on a desktop or a shelf Alternatively it may be wall mounted using the kit supplied with the unit Figure 2 12 IDU PS 1073 Front Panel The RADIO connector and RESET button are located on the front panel the ETHERNET connector is located on the side panel and LEDs are located on the top panel A Do not connect the data equipment to the RADIO port The RADIO port supplies DC power to the ODU and this may harm other equipment connected to it gt To install the IDU 1 Connect the Indoor to
37. SNAP message learns from it the new location of the clients It forwards the SNAP to other AUs and Layer 2 networking equipment via its Ethernet port to facilitate uninterrupted connectivity and BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 4 9 4 2 6 4 9 1 correct routing of transmissions to these clients The new AU as well as the previous AU with which the SU was associated will forward the SNAP messages to all other SUs associated with them The default is Disable Ports Control SU only The Ports Control sub menu includes the Ethernet Port Control option Ethernet Port Control The Ethernet Port Control option allows enabling or disabling non management traffic to from the Ethernet port When changed to Disable all current data sessions will be terminated The unit is still manageable via the Ethernet port even if it is disabled for data traffic The default selection is Enable 4 2 6 4 10 Show Bridge Parameters The Show Bridge Parameters option displays the current values of the Bridge parameters Operation and Administration 167 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 5 4 2 6 5 1 168 Performance Parameters The Performance Parameters menu enables defining a series of parameters that control the method by which traffic is transmitted through the wireless access network The Performance Parameters menu includes the following parameters E RTS Threshold E Minimum Co
38. SU A ODU cccccseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeneenees 69 3 3 Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenina cccccseeeeeseeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeenees 70 3 4 Configuring the Subscriber Unit s Maximum Modulation Level ccccsssseee 72 3 5 Operation Verification gedeelter 74 3 5 1 Outdoor Unit VErNCANON D 74 3 5 2 Indoor Unit Verification EE 77 3 5 3 SU I Unit Verification sssciccccrenstecnicxtseuetainesidcceinenetedeeusyanetsenudeenhrigzeeecineiaeuetoencasdauee 78 3 5 4 Verifying the Ethernet Connection Modular Base staton 80 3 5 5 Verifying the Indoor to Outdoor Connection Modular Base Station 80 3 5 6 Verifying Data Connectivity cccc cccccssccettecspetcnnedduarcenasaenntdeeestanedieevadeeeaniuanreeaaraiees 80 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 81 4 1 Working with the Monitor Program ccecccccsssseeeeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesneneeeeeeeeeennenes 82 4 1 1 Accessing the Monitor Program Using Telnet eee eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 82 4 1 2 e ul eine l EE E 83 4 2 Men s and Parameters sais ss csisssesccnsiesiennscs was csssasennsi wstaiessnennanie seus sa seaneinsnaa asad nena 85 421 Main E 85 4 2 2 Info Screens MENU E 85 4 2 3 Unit Control Etage Eed 90 4 2 4 Basic Configuration le eege geed eege ee 103 4 2 5 Site Survey Men EEN 105 4 2 6 Advanced Configuration Men AAA 120 Appendix A Software Version Loading UemgTETR 195 Appendix B
39. Summary Parameter DFS Option Frequency Subset Definition in AU A Channel Check Time AU Channel Avoidance AU U Period SU Waiting Option Minimum Pulses to AU Detect Clear radar Detected Channels After Reset Channel Reuse Option A Radar Activity A Assessment Period Maximum Number of AU Detections in Assessment Period Country Code Learning AU by SU Transmit Power AU SU ATPC Option AU SU AU U U Delta from Minimum SNR AU Level Minimum SNR Level AU Minimum Interval AU Between ATPC Messages ATPC Power Level Steps AU Tx Control 268 E AU m Disable U Dependent on Country DFS Support If DFS is supported by the country code then the default will be Enable else it will be Disable H Enable According to the Sub Band A A list of frequency indexes or A for all frequencies supported by the Sub Band 1 3600 seconds 60 seconds 1 60 minutes 30 minutes m Disable Enable te OOO O S SE m Disable Disable HS d m Disable Disable fete 1 10 detections 5 detections m Disable Enable H Enable 10 dBm to a value that The highest allowed depends on HW revision value Country Code Antenna Gain and in SU the Max Tx Power parameter OO No No Yes No No No Yes es Y 10 dBm to a value that The highest allowed Yes depends on HW revision and value Country Code Antenna Gain
40. The Traffic Statistics menu includes the following options E Display Counters Select this option to display the current value of the Ethernet and wireless link WLAN counters E Reset Counters Select this option to reset the counters Ethernet Counters The unit receives Ethernet frames from its Ethernet port and forwards the frames to its internal bridge which determines whether each frame should be transmitted to the wireless medium Frames discarded by the unit s hardware filter are not counted by the Ethernet counters For units with HW revision B and lower the maximum length of a regular IEEE 802 1 Ethernet packet that can be accepted from or transmitted to the Ethernet port is 1514 bytes excluding CRC and VLAN s For units with HW revision C and higher the maximum length of an Ethernet packet that can be accepted from or transmitted to the Ethernet port excluding CRC is 1600 bytes including VLAN s for single or double tagged packets BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 5 1 2 The unit transmits valid data frames received from the wireless medium to the Ethernet port as well as internally generated frames such as responses to management queries and pings received via the Ethernet port The Ethernet Counters include the following statistics E Total received frames via Ethernet The total number of frames received from the Ethernet port This counter includes both invalid frames with errors
41. The unit will also reject a file designated for a different unit type e g an AU upgrade file with the prefix a in the original file name will not be accepted by SUs 11 The FLASH memory can store two software versions One version is called Current and the second version is called Shadow The new version is loaded into the Shadow backup FLASH memory To check that the new firmware was properly downloaded and verified view the firmware versions stored in the FLASH as follows a From the Main Menu select 2 Unit Control b From the Unit Control menu select 5 Flash Memory Control c From the Flash Memory Control menu select S Show Flash Versions The following information is displayed Flash Versions Running from Main Version Main Version File Name 73 1 25 Main Version Number 73 129 Shadow Version File Name 4 0 27 bz Shadow Version Number 4 0 27 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 197 endix B File Download and Upload TFTP Appendix B File Download and Upload Using TFTP The File Download Upload feature simplifies the task of remotely configuring a large number of units using TFTP protocol By downloading the configuration file to a PC it is possible to view all the parameters configured for the unit as a plain ASCII text file It is necessary to edit the file using a simple editor and remove certain parameters or change their values prior to uploading the configuration to another unit The file loading proce
42. VID M PID M Table Legend E VID M VLAN ID Management E PID M VLAN Priority Management 4 2 6 4 1 3 VLAN Link Type The VLAN Link Type parameter enables defining the functionality of the VLAN aware capability of the unit The available options are Hybrid Link Trunk Link Access Link and Service Provider Link Access Link option is available only in SUs The default selection is Hybrid Link 4 2 6 4 1 3 1 Access Link SU only Access Link transfers frames while tagging untagging them since all devices connected to the unit are VLAN unaware Thus the unit cannot transfer tagged frames Table 4 6 summarizes the functionality of the data port for an Access link BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 154 Menus and Parameters Table 4 6 VLAN Data Port Functionality Access Link Receive from Ethernet Untagged frames Accept from Wireless Tagged frames matching VID D Tag Insert VID D PID D to wireless Tag Remove Yes to Ethernet Table Legend E VID D VLAN ID Data E PID D VLAN Priority Data 4 2 6 4 1 3 2 Trunk Link Trunk Link transfers only tagged frames as all devices connected to the unit are VLAN aware Only tagged data frames received on the Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded A It is not recommended that you configure a unit as a Trunk Link with the VLAN ID Management parameter set at 65535 as it does not forward any NO VLAN management frames to its other port making it impos
43. VL MIB MIB Parameter Value Range DrapTTL The maximum time in Integer Drap 4 seconds between two 1 255 DrapMaxNumberOfVoiceCalls The maximum number of Integer Drap 3 voice calls that can be 0 255 supported by the AU when DRAP is enabled allocation requests Drap 5 number of active voice calls LowPriorityTrafficMinimumPercent The minimum percent of the ServiceParameters 12 traffic rate that is allocated 0 100 to the low priority traffic E 2 8 User Filtering Parameters breezeAccessVLMib 8 filtering parameters UserFilterOption Applicable to SU RB UserFilterParams 1 Defines user filtering options disable No filtering iPOnly Only IP protocol packets pass userDefinedAddrOnly Only IP frames from to user defined IP addresses pass pPPoE Only Only PPPoE frames pass Applicable to SU RB A table of up to 8 user defined addresses or address groups to be used if the User Filtering Option UserFilterOption is userDefinedAddrOnly Not accessible pFilterEntry Applicable to SU RB An IP IpFilterTable 1 Filter table entry Not accessible IpID Applicable to SU RB An IP IP Address lpFilterEntry 1 address in the IP Filter table MaskID Applicable to SU RB An IP IP Address IpFilterEntry 2 mask for the IP Filter entry Either a mask or a range but not both can be used to define an address group If the range is other than 0 than the mask is ignored and only
44. VLAN ID Data and the VLAN Priority Data parameters E Tagged frames received on Ethernet port which are meant to be forwarded to the wireless link port are discarded This includes frames with tagging for prioritization purposes only VLAN ID Management The VLAN ID Management is applicable for all link types It enables defining the VLAN ID for management frames which identifies remote stations for management purposes This applies to all management applications using BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters protocols such as SNMP TFTP ICMP ping DHCP and Telnet All servers stations using these protocols must tag the management frames sent to the unit with the value of the VLAN ID Management parameter Valid values 1 to 4094 or 65535 No VLAN The default value is 65535 If the VLAN ID Management is other than 65535 HM Only single tagged management frames with a matching VLAN ID or double tagged management frames with a matching Service Provider VLAN ID received on either the Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded to the unit E A VLAN Management Tag is inserted in all management frames generated by the unit before transmission on either the Ethernet or wireless link port The tag includes the values of the VLAN ID Management and the VLAN Priority Management parameters If the VLAN ID Management is 65535 No VLAN E For Access Trunk and Hybrid links Only untagged management frames received
45. a new operation mode Select from the following options M Select Disable to configure the IP parameters manually If this option is selected configure the static IP parameters as described above E Select DHCP Only to cause the unit to search for and acquire its IP parameters including the IP address subnet mask and default gateway from a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server only If this option is selected you must select the port s through which the unit searches for and communicates with the DHCP server as described in section 4 2 6 1 4 2 You do not have to configure static IP parameters for the unit DHCP messages are handled by the units as management frames Select Automatic to cause the unit to search for a DHCP server and acquire its IP parameters from the server If a DCHP server is not located within approximately 40 seconds the currently configured parameters are used If this option is selected you must configure the static IP parameters as described above In addition you must select the port s through which the unit searches for and communicates with the DHCP server as described in section 4 2 6 1 4 2 The default is Disable Operation and Administration 121 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 1 4 2 4 2 6 1 5 4 2 6 2 4 2 6 2 1 4 2 6 2 2 122 Access to DHCP The Access to DHCP option enables defining the port through which the unit searches for and communicates
46. a radar activity was detected on a certain frequency it will be marked in the database as a Radar Detected frequency The AU will not attempt to check for radar activity in frequencies marked as Radar Detected A certain time after detecting radar activity on a frequency it will be removed from the list of Radar Detected frequencies and will be marked as Radar Free If radar activity was detected on a certain frequency adjacent channels should not be used as well according to the bandwidth For instance if the bandwidth is 20 MHz then if radar activity was detected in 5800 MHz frequencies 5790 MHz and 5810 MHz should not be used as well These frequencies are marked in the database as Adjacent to Radar and will be treated the same as Radar Detected frequencies BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 2 4 4 2 6 2 4 1 4 2 6 2 4 2 Before ceasing transmission on the frequency where radar signals had been detected the AU sends a special disassociation message to its associated SUs This message includes an indication whether the SUs should wait for this AU If the SUs should wait the message includes also the waiting time During this time each SU searches for the AU in the defined frequencies subset If the AU was not found within the waiting time or if a waiting request was not included in the message the SU starts searching for any AU using the Best AU mechanism if applicable Typically operators prefer to
47. address NumOfAssociationsSinceLastReset Applicable to all units Integer SysInfo 11 Read only The number of associations since last reset including duplicate associations re associations CurrentNumOfAssociations Applicable to AU only Not Integer SysInfo 13 applicable to BreezeNET B na 65535 products Read only The number of subscriber units currently associated with the AU UnitBootVersion Applicable to all units DisplayString SIZE 0 32 SysInfo 14 Read only The Boot software version RadioBand Applicable to all units Integer SysInfo 15 Read only The radio band band 5 8GHz 1 of the unit band 5 4GHz band 4 9GHz 3 band 5 2GHz 4 band 2 4GHz 5 band 5 3GHz 6 band 4 9GHzJapan 7 CurrentEthernetPortState Applicable to all units Integer SysInfo 16 Read only The current HalfDuplexAnd10Mbps 1 state of the Ethernet port FullDuplexAnd10Mbps 2 HalfDuplexAnd100Mbps 3 FullDuplexAnd100Mbps 4 linkDown 5 TimeSinceLastReset Applicable to all units DisplayString SIZE 0 32 SysInfo 17 Read only The elapsed time since last reset CountryDependentParameters Country Dependent SysInfo 18 Parameters 1 2 3 4 5 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 213 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB MIB Parameter Value Range CountryCode CountryDependentParameters 1 Applicable to all units Read only The country code and country or country group name that is
48. addresses of stations to which SNMP traps are sent can be defined Send SNMP Traps The Send SNMP Traps option enables or disables the sending of SNMP traps The default selection is Disable SNMP Traps Destination IP Addresses The SNMP Traps Destination IP Addresses submenu enables defining up to 10 IP addresses of devices to which the SNMP Traps are to be sent The default of all 10 SNMP Traps IP destinations is 0 0 0 0 SNMP Traps Community The SNMP Traps Community option enables defining the Community name for each IP address to which SNMP Trap messages are to be sent Valid strings Up to 8 ASCII characters The default for all 10 addresses is public which is the default Read community Delete One Trap Address The Delete One Trap Address option enables deleting Trap address entries from the SNMP Traps Addresses list Delete All Trap Addresses The Delete All Trap Addresses option enables deleting all entries from the SNMP Traps Addresses list AP Client IP Address SU Only The BreezeACCESS WI system comprises a self contained combination of an advanced WiFi Access Point and a BreezeACCESS SU ODU that provides backhaul connectivity The AP Client IP Address parameter enables the installer to configure in the SU the IP address of the WiFi AP connected to it providing availability of the IP address information for remote management of the AP The default AP Client IP Address is 0 0 0 0 meaning none BreezeACCES
49. and valid frames without errors E Transmitted wireless to Ethernet The number of frames transmitted by the unit to the Ethernet port These are generally frames received from the wireless side but also include frames generated by the unit itself WLAN Counters The unit submits data frames received from the Ethernet port to the internal bridge as well as self generated control and wireless management frames After a unicast data frame is transmitted the unit waits for an acknowledgement ACK message from the receiving unit Some control and wireless management frames as well as broadcast and multicast frames sent to more than one unit are not acknowledged If an ACK is not received after a predefined time which is determined by the Maximum Cell distance parameter the unit retransmits the frame until an ACK is received If an ACK is not received before the number of retransmissions has reached a maximum predefined number which is determined by the Number of HW Retries parameter the frame is dropped Each packet to be transmitted to the wireless link is transferred to one of three queues Low Medium and High Packets in the High queue have the highest priority for transmission and those in the Low queue have the lowest priority The packets in the High queue will be transmitted first When this queue is emptied the packets in the Medium queue will be sent Finally when both the High and Medium queues are empty the packets in the Lo
50. are available E Disable E Enable Only for UDP E Enable Only for TCP E Enable for both UDP and TCP The default is Disable 4 2 6 6 3 3 2UDP Port Ranges The UDP Port Ranges menu enables defining port ranges to be used as priority classifiers when the UDP TCP Port Ranges Prioritization Option is set to either Enable Only for UDP or Enable for both UDP and TCP All packets whose destination is included in the list will be routed to the High queue All other packets will be routed to the Low queue unless they were assigned a High priority by another classifier The UDP Port Ranges menu includes the following options E UDP RTP RTCP Prioritization Voice over IP is transported using Real Time Protocol RTP The Real Time Control Protocol RTCP is used to control the RTP When an application uses RTP RTCP it chooses for destination ports BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 184 Menus and Parameters consecutive numbers RTP port is always an even number and the port with the odd number following it will be assigned to RTCP If the administrator selects to prioritize only the RTP packets then all the packets with an odd numbered destination port will always have Low priority The packets with an even number for destination port will receive High priority if the port number is included in the specified ranges If the administrator selects to prioritize both RTP and RTCP packets then all packets whose destination port number is in
51. are available to support a wide range of requirements as detailed in Table 1 3 Table 1 3 Subscriber Unit ODU Types SU A ODU Vertically polarized high gain flat antenna integrated on the front panel New SU A ODU Vertically horizontally polarized high gain flat antenna integrated on the front panel The smaller size new SU A ODU is available in the 5 4 GHz and 5 8 GHz bands SU E ODU A connection to an external antenna not included System Description Chapter 1 System Description J eo SU A ODU and IDU New SU A ODU For each ODU type several models are available to support various end users needs and applications as detailed in Table 1 4 Table 1 4 SU A E Subscriber Unit Types SU 54 BD A high rate CPE that supports a full LAN SU 6 1D A medium rate CPE that supports a single Ethernet device one MAC address SU 6 BD A medium rate CPE that supports a full LAN SU 3 1D An entry level CPE that supports a single Ethernet device one MAC address x Although the achievable throughput for SU 3 SU 6 is lower than that of SU 54 these units use all modulation levels and may have bursts at up to 54 Mbps The IDU provides the interface to the user s equipment and is powered from the 110 220 VAC mains The customer s data equipment is connected via a standard IEEE 802 3 Ethernet 10 100BaseT RJ 45 interface The indoor unit is connected to the outdoor unit via a Category 5 Ethernet cable This cable carries
52. be downloaded a FTPSwDownload 1 FtpSwDownloadSourceDir FTPSwDownload 2 DownloadSwFile Applicable to all units Execution FTPSwDownload 3 of the SW download operation ConfigurationFileLoading FTPParameters 3 ConfigurationFileName ConfigurationFileLoading 1 OperatorDefaultsFileName ConfigurationFileLoading 2 FTPConfigurationFileSourceDir ConfigurationFileLoading 3 ExecuteFTPConfigurationFileLoading ConfigurationFileLoading 4 EventLogFileUploading Applicable to all units Event Log FTPParameters 4 file upload parameters EventLogFileName EventLogFileUploading 1 EventLogDestinationDir EventLogFileUploading 2 Kee ere EventLogFileUploading 3 LoadingStatus UnitControl 11 EventLogFileParams UnitControl 12 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual DisplayString SIZE 80 Up to 20 printable SECH characters An empty string is Applicable to all units The source directory of the required file in the FTP server Applicable to all units Configuration file and Operator Defaults file download upload parameters Applicable to all units The name of the configuration file to be downloaded uploaded Applicable to all units The name of the Operator Defaults file to be downloaded uploaded Applicable to all units The source directory of the required file in the FTP server Applicable to all units Execution of the file downloa
53. current values of the VLAN support parameters Ethernet Broadcast Filtering SU only The Ethernet Broadcast Filtering menu enables defining the layer 2 Ethernet broadcast and multicast filtering capabilities for the selected SU Filtering the Ethernet broadcasts enhances the security of the system and saves bandwidth on the wireless medium by blocking protocols that are typically used in the customer s LAN but are not relevant for other customers such as NetBios which is used by the Microsoft Network Neighborhood Enabling this feature blocks Ethernet broadcasts and multicasts by setting the I G bit at the destination address to 1 This feature should not be enabled when there is a router behind the SU The Ethernet Broadcast Filtering menu includes the following parameters E Filter Options E DHCP Broadcast Override Filter E PPPoE Broadcast Override Filter E ARP Broadcast Override Filter Filter Options The Filter Options enables defining the Ethernet Broadcast filtering functionality of the unit Select from the following options E Disable no Ethernet Broadcast Filtering E On Ethernet Port Only filters broadcast messages received from the Ethernet port E On Wireless Port Only filters broadcast messages received from the wireless link port E On Both Ethernet and Wireless Ports filters broadcast messages received from both the Ethernet and wireless link ports The default selection is Disable BreezeACCESS
54. disable 1 enable 2 na 255 Integer disable 1 enable 2 Applicable to AU BU Read only The current Burst Mode Option of the relevant SU RB Applicable to AU BU Read only The current Concatenation Option of the relevant SU RB Integer disable 1 Applicable to AU BU Read only The current Security Mode of the relevant SU RB Integer wep 1 aesOCB 2 fips197 3 na 255 Integer openSystem 1 sharedKey 2 na 255 Integer disable 1 Applicable to AU BU Read only The current Authentication Algorithm Option of the relevant SU RB Applicable to AU BU Read only The current Data Encryption Option of the relevant SU RB Applicable to AU BU Read only The time in seconds elapsed since receiving the last packet from the relevant SU RB AdbUnitName Applicable to AU BU Read only The DisplayString AUAdbEntry 45 Unit Name of the relevant SU RB SiteSurvey 6 MeasureUpLinkQualitylndicator UpLinkQualityIndicator 1 ReadUpLinkQualitylndicator UpLinkQualitylndicator 2 UpLinkQualityIndicatorStatus UpLinkQualitylndicator 3 MacPinpoint Applicable to AU BU MAC Pinpoint SiteSurvey 7 parameters MacPinpoint 1 MacPinpointEntry MacPinpointTable 1 258 UpLink quality Indicator LQI parameters Applicable only to SU RB Applicable to SU RB Starts calculation Integer of LQI The calculation will be for a start 1 period of 10 seconds cancel 2
55. exceed a certain value In these cases the Transmit Power cannot exceed the value of Maximum EIRP Antenna Gain E Maximum Tx Power parameter in SU only For information on how to view the Sub Bands supported by the unit and the supported parameters values and options refer to section 4 2 2 4 The unit calculates the maximum allowed Transmit Power according to the unit properties and parameters listed above and displays the allowed range when a Transmit Power parameter is selected For each modulation level the unit will use as transmit power the minimum between this parameter and the maximum Tx power allowed by the HW and the Country Code for the specific modulation level The default Transmit Power is the highest allowed value 4 2 6 2 8 1 2Show Transmit Power Parameters 4 2 6 2 8 2 This option displays the Transmit Power parameter and the current transmit power for the different modulation levels Maximum Transmit Power SU only The Maximum Transmit Power submenu includes the following options E Maximum Tx Power E Show Maximum Tx Power Parameters 4 2 6 2 8 2 1 Maximum Tx Power 134 The Maximum Tx Power parameter limits the maximum transmit power that can be reached by the ATPC algorithm It also sets the upper limits for the Transmit Power parameters The minimum value for the Maximum Tx Power is 10 dBm The maximum value depends on several unit properties and parameters E The HW revision of the uni
56. external jacket Verify that the external jacket is well inside the service box to ensure good sealing 2 Take back the shield drain wire before inserting the cable into the RJ 45 connector to ensure a good connection with the connector s shield after crimping BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 207 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB In This Appendix BreezeACCESS VL agents support the following MIBs BW MIB_II RFC1213 E BRIDGE_MIB RFC1286 HM BreezeACCESS VL Private MIB breezeAccessVLMib The following are described in this Appendix HM System Object Identifiers page 210 HM breezeAccessVLMib page 212 E Supported Traps page 260 x The BreezeAccessVLMib is used for both BreezeACCESS VL AU SU and BreezeNET B BU RB product lines Some of the parameters are only applicable to one of the product lines Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB E 1 System Object Identifiers alvarion OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 iso 1 org 3 dod 6 internet 1 private 4 enterprises 1 alvarion 12394 products OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 1 alvarion 1 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 alvarion 4 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 alvarionOID 1 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 1 brzAccessVLOID 1 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 2 brzAccessVLOID 2 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 4 brzAccessVLOID 4 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 5 brzAccessVLOID 5 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 6 brzAccessVLOID 6 OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 4 1 7 brzAccessVLOID 7 OID 1 3
57. filter on Both Ethernet and Wireless Link Ports Applicable to all options of the Access to Network Management parameter The unit can be managed from the port s defined by the Access to Network Management parameter only by stations with IP addresses matching one of the entries in the Set Network Management IP Addresses parameter The default selection is Disable BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 3 3 Set Network Management IP Address The Set Network Management IP Address option enables defining up to 10 IP addresses of devices that can manage the unit if the Network Management Filtering option is enabled The default Network Management IP Address is 0 0 0 0 all 10 addresses 4 2 6 3 4 Delete a Network Management IP Address The Delete Network Management IP Address option enables deleting IP address entries from the Network Management IP Addresses list 4 2 6 3 5 Delete All Network Management IP Addresses The Delete All Network Management IP Addresses option enables deleting all entries from the Network Management IP Addresses list 4 2 6 3 6 Set Change Network Management IP Address Ranges The Set Change Network Management IP address Ranges menu enables defining updating or deleting IP address ranges from which the unit can be managed if the Network Management Filtering option is enabled This is in addition to the previous options in the Network Management menu that enable defining updating and de
58. is Enable 4 2 6 2 2 2 2 Operator ESSID The Operator ESSID parameter defines the Operator ESSID Valid values A string of up to 31 printable ASCII characters The default value is ESSID1 x The Operator ESSID string is case sensitive 4 2 6 2 3 Frequency Definition Parameters 4 2 6 2 3 1 Sub Bands and Frequency Selection Each unit is delivered with one or more pre configured Sub Bands according to the country code These sets of parameters include also the frequencies that can be used and the bandwidth The parameters that determine the frequency to be used are set in the AU If more than one Sub Band is available the sub band to be used can be selected If only one Sub Band is supported then the sub band selection option is not Operation and Administration 123 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 2 3 2 124 available The SU should be configured with a minimal set of parameters to ensure that it will be able to automatically detect and use the frequency bandwidth used by the AU including possible changes in this frequency Automatic Sub Band Select feature To simplify the installation process the SU scans a definable frequencies subset after power up The defined frequencies subsets may include frequencies from more than one Sub Band enabling automatic detection of both frequency and bandwidth If the Best AU feature is enabled the SU will scan the defined subset and the operating frequency bandwid
59. it is set to High all Phy errors with levels bellow a certain threshold not accessible to the user will be reported as regular Phy errors while those with levels higher than the threshold will be reported as detected radar pulses When DFS radar detection is used the Pulse Detection Sensitivity cannot be set to Low forced to high When Spectrum Analyzer is running the Pulse Detection Sensitivity is automatically forced to high for the duration of the test The default is High 4 2 6 2 18 6 Show Noise Immunity Select this option to view the current values of the Noise Immunity Control parameters and some additional parameters of the ANI mechanism BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 146 Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 3 4 2 6 3 1 Network Management Parameters The Network Management Parameters menu enables protecting the Unit from unauthorized access by defining a set of discrete IP addresses as well as IP address ranges from which the unit can be managed using protocols such as Telnet FTP TFTP SNMP DHCP and ICMP This excludes management messages generated in the unit such as Traps or Ping Test frames which are not filtered The direction from which management access is permitted can also be configured which means that management access may be permitted from the wireless medium only from the wired Ethernet only or from both The Network Management Menu also enables managing transmission of traps including definition o
60. of the Event Log file according to the parameters defined below E Event Log Destination Directory The Event Log Destination Directory enables defining the destination directory for the Event Log File Valid values A string of up to 80 printable ASCII characters To clear the field mon press The default is an empty string E Event Log File Name The Event Log File Name option enables defining the name of the event log file to be uploaded Valid values A string of up to 20 printable ASCII characters The default is logfile log E FTP Server IP Address The FTP Host IP Address option enables defining the IP address of the FTP server that is hosting the file The default is 10 0 0 253 E FTP Gateway IP Address The FTP Gateway IP Address option enables defining the FTP default gateway address The default is 0 0 0 0 E FTP User Name The FTP User Name option enables defining the user name to be used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the file Valid values A string of up to 18 printable ASCII characters The default is vx E FTP Password The FTP Password option enables defining the password to be used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the file Valid values A string of up to 18 printable ASCII characters The default is vx BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 102 Menus and Parameters 4 2 3 12 4 2 4 4 2 4 1 1 E Show FTP Event Log File Upload Parameters Displays t
61. of the RF cable Do not over tighten the SMA connectors If parameters are not pre configured configure the basic parameters as described in Section 3 1 Align the antenna as described in Section 3 3 Connect the 10 100 Base T Ethernet connector to the data equipment The cable connection should be a crossed Ethernet if connecting to a hub switch and a straight cable if connecting directly to a PC Network Interface Card NIC Verify proper operation of the Ethernet link see Table 2 3 for the Ethernet activity LED indication To verify data connectivity from the end user s PC or from a portable PC connected to the unit ping a known device in the network or try connecting to the Internet 2 5 4 2 Wall Mounting the GU The wall mounting kit for the SU I includes a bracket 2 screws and 2 plastic anchors Refer to Figure 2 14 1 If anchors are needed wall board plaster board etc drill two holes for the anchors using a 6 mm drill bit and insert anchors The distance between the two holes should be 86 mm Use the drilling template supplied with the SU I Fasten the two screws provided with the kit directly to the anchors Use the two hangers on the rear to hang the mounting bracket on the two screws Make sure the bracket is stable Insert one side of the SU I s base diagonally under the designated rail Gently apply pressure on the opposite side of the SU I until a clicking sound is heard and the two bracket studs
62. on either the Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded to the unit E An AU operating in Service Provider link mode with VLAN ID Management 65535 cannot be managed from either the Ethernet or wireless ports E An SU operating in Service Provider link mode with VLAN ID Management 65535 will accept untagged management frames from the Ethernet port From the wireless port it will accept only tagged frames with a VLAN ID tag that matches the defined Service Provider VLAN ID E Management frames generated by the unit are not tagged The following table summarizes the functionality of the internal management port in accordance with the value of the VLAN ID Management parameter The table is valid for all link types Refer to the VLAN Link Type Access Link Trunk Link and Service Provider Link options for some restrictions when configuring this parameter Operation and Administration 153 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 5 VLAN Management Port Functionality Receive from Ethernet when Link Type is Tagged frames matching VID M Access Trunk or Hybrid Untagged frames when VID M 65535 Receive from Ethernet when Link Type is Tagged frames matching VID M Service Provider Receive from Wireless when Link Type is Tagged frames matching VID M Access Trunk or Hybrid Untagged frames when VID M 65535 Receive from wireless when Link Type is Tagged frames matching VID M Service Provider Transmit Insert
63. only Broadcast Packets m Limit Multicast Packets that are not Broadcasts H Limit All Multicast Packets including broadcast lt br n Disable lt oO D Ethernet Broadcast Multicast 50 Yes Ethernet Broadcast Multicast AU SU 1 60 minutes 5 minutes Yes Limiter Send Trap Interval Bridge Aging Time 20 2000 seconds BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 270 Parameters Summary parameter unt Range 1 Detaut pun Time Broadcast Relaying AU Disable Enable Enable ENO Unicast Relaying AU H Disable Enable o m Enable MAC Address List Up to 100 MAC addresses None empty N MAC Address List Action AU m Deny Deny Yes H Allow Roaming Option SU m Disable Disable femoris Ethernet Port Control SU m Disable Enable Yes F 1 6 Performance Parameters Parameter umn pange Dotat Run Time RTS Threshold AU SU 20 4032 bytes AU 4032 SU 60 Yes Minimum Contention Window AU SU 0 7 15 31 63 127 255 511 1023 Maximum Contention AU SU 7 15 31 63 127 255 511 1023 Yes Window 1023 Yes Maximum Modulation Level AU SU According to the Min Max The highest available Modulation Level defined for value the Sub Band Multicast Modulation Level AU According to the Min Max The lowest available Yes Modulation Level defined for value the Sub Band Number of HW Retries AU SU Average SNR Memory Factor AU SU 1 to 32 Burst Mode Option AU SU Disable Enable No H Enab
64. or transmits traffic on the 10 100 BaseT port 3 5 5 Verifying the Indoor to Outdoor Connection Modular Base Station After connecting the unit to an Ethernet outlet verify that the Ethernet Integrity Indicator which is the yellow LED embedded in the RADIO connector is on This indicates that the unit has detected an Ethernet link connection The Ethernet Activity Indicator which is the green embedded LED should blink whenever the unit receives or transmits traffic on the RADIO port 3 5 6 Verifying Data Connectivity To verify data connectivity from the end user s PC or from a portable PC connected to the unit ping the Access Unit or try to connect to the Internet a0 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 4 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration In This Chapter B Working with the Monitor Program page 82 E Menus and Parameters page 85 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 1 Working with the Monitor Program 4 1 1 Accessing the Monitor Program Using Telnet 1 Connect a PC to the Ethernet port using a crossed cable 2 Configure the PC s IP parameters to enable connectivity with the unit The default IP address is 10 0 0 1 3 Run the Telnet program The Select Access Level menu is displayed 4 Select the required access level depending on your specific access rights A password entry request is displayed Table 4 1 lists the default passwords for each of the access levels Table 4 1 Default Pass
65. plates together Do not over tighten See Figure 2 16 3 Assemble the bottom L type plate with the Wall H L type plate Note the Wall H plate is the one with the horizontal ellipse on the short side Make sure the inscriptions are facing upwards Use two M5 screws to fasten the plates together Do not over tighten BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Installing the SU I 4 Attach the assembled plates to the flat rear side of the antenna Use the two remaining M5 screws to fasten them 5 Fasten the antenna to the wall Use the two 8 screws provided with the kit Do not over tighten 6 Connect the antenna cable to the connector located on the bottom side of the antenna Use only the torque key supplied with the antenna Do not over tighten Do not use a wrench or a similar tightening tool 7 Rotate the antenna left or right so the domed surface of the antenna is facing the direction of the Base Station Check the received Signal LEDs to ensure the antenna is aimed correctly Figure 2 16 Wall Mount with Rotation Capability Installation Chapter 2 Installation 2 5 5 3 Window Mount The installation kit includes 2 suction cups 1 Attach the suction cups to the antenna Refer to Figure 2 17 for directions 2 Determine the location of the antenna on the glass Attach it to the window by pressing the suction cups onto the glass 3 Connect the antenna cable to the connector located on the bottom side
66. received from the Ethernet port is placed in either the High or Low queue according to the Traffic Prioritization parameters When the MIR CIR mechanism decides that a packet must be sent the High priority queue will be checked first If the High priority queue is not empty the first element in the queue is forwarded to the MIR CIR mechanism Packets from the Low priority queue will be forwarded only if the High queue is empty The prioritization of the packets is done using different classifiers E VLAN Priority E ToS Priority IP Precedence or DSCP E UDP and or TCP ports Each one of these classifiers can be activated deactivated If more than one classifier is activated the priority of each packet will be determined by the highest priority given to it by the active classifiers The Traffic Prioritization menu enables activating deactivating each of these classifiers and configuring the applicable parameters for each classifier The Low Priority Traffic Minimum Percent parameter can be used to prevent starvation of low priority traffic by ensuring that a certain number of low priority packets is transmitted even at the expense of high priority traffic BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 6 3 1 4 2 6 6 3 2 In addition the Wireless Link Prioritization which is a licensable feature enables to configure parameters that affect the prioritization of traffic in the wireless link for packets with high low p
67. set as main This is done to avoid returning to the previous version which occurs automatically after the reset The default is Enable 4 2 6 2 15 Spectrum Analysis Gaining knowledge of the noise characteristics per channel enables construction of a relatively noise free working environment In order to gain information regarding noise characteristics in the location of the unit the unit will enter passive scanning mode for a definite period during which information will be gathered The scanned channels will be the channels comprising the selected sub set Upon activating the spectrum analysis the unit will automatically reset During the information gathering period the unit will not receive nor transmit data It also will not be able to synchronize associate meaning that it cannot be managed via the wireless link During the spectrum analysis period the unit security mode is changed to promiscuous to enable gathering information regarding all legal frames received by the unit At the end of the period the unit will reset automatically regaining normal operability upon start up The Spectrum Analysis submenu includes the following options BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 142 Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 2 15 1 Spectrum Analysis Channel Scan Period The Spectrum Analysis Channel Scan Period is the period of staying on each channel during each cycle for information gathering when performing spectrum analysis Range 2 30 second
68. starting scanning and it will not send roaming SNAPs Integer disable 1 enable 2 na 255 MacAddressDenyList MAC Address Deny List parameters is BridgeParameters 10 MacAddressDenyListT able MacAddressDenyList 1 Applicable to AU only Not applicable to BreezeNET B units A list of up to 100 MAC Addresses If brzaccVLMacAddressDenyListAction is set to denyList these are SUs that are not allowed to transfer data to the AU If brzaccVLMacAddressDenyListAction is set to allowList only these SUs are allowed to transfer data to the AU Not accessible Applicable to AU only Not applicable to BreezeNET B units An entry in the Mac Address Deny List Table Not accessible Applicable to AU only Not applicable to BreezeNET B units A read only table index for a MAC Address entry in the Mac Address Deny List Table Applicable to AU only Not applicable to BreezeNET B units The list of MAC Addresses in the MAC Address Deny List Table To Remove a MAC Address SET the corresponding entry to 0 To Add a new MAC Address SET an entry which is currently 0 Applicable to AU only Not applicable to BreezeNET B units Add a MAC address to the MAC Address Deny List Table Applicable to AU only Not applicable to BreezeNET B units Remove a MAC address from the MAC Address Deny List Table Applicable to AU only Not applicable to BreezeNET B units Read only The number of MAC addresses in the MAC Address Deny List Tab
69. that all power indicator LEDs on the BS PS AC DC front panel are ON and that the Installation 63 Chapter 2 Installation OVERTEMP alarm indicator is off Refer to Table 2 4 for a description of these LEDs 11 Configure the basic parameters in all BS AU modules as described in section 3 1 12 Connect the 10 100 BaseT LAN connector s to the network The cable connection should be straight Ethernet if connecting the indoor unit to a hub switch and a crossed cable if connecting it directly to a PC Network Interface Card NIC E m The length of each of the Ethernet cables the cable connecting the indoor unit to the user s equipment and the Indoor to Outdoor cable should not exceed 100 meters H Reset the unit using the RESET button after connecting or reconnecting the indoor and outdoor units with the indoor to outdoor cable D BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Chapter 3 Commissioning About This Chapter Configuring Basic Parameters page 66 Using the Optional Y cable New SU A ODU page 69 Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna page 70 Configuring the Subscriber Unit s Maximum Modulation Level page 72 Operation Verification page 74 Chapter 3 Commissioning 3 1 66 Configuring Basic Parameters After completing the installation process as described in the preceding chapter the basic parameters must be configured to ensure that the unit operates correctly After the basic par
70. the EventLogFileParams 2 log file eet ela 1 cancel 2 Ge UnitControl 13 location FeatureUpgrade UnitControl 14 FeatureUpgradeManually FeatureUpgrade 1 Feature Upgrade parameters Applicable to all units Upgrade unit to support new feature ChangeUnitType UnitControl 15 Applicable RB BU only Change the unit type between BU and RB DisplayString SIZE 32 64 License string 32 to 64 hexadecimal digits Integer bu 1 rb 2 cancel 3 E23 NwMngParameters Network management breezeAccessVLMib 3 parameters Network Management Parameters AccessTONwMng Applicable to all units The port NwMngParameters 1 to be used for remote management NwMngFilter NwMngParameters 2 Applicable to all units Disables or enable IP address based filtering of management messages on one or both ports mnglpFilterTable NwMngParameters 3 Applicable to all units A table of up to 10 IP addresses of stations that are authorized to access the unit for management purposes Not accessible mnglpFilterEntry Applicable to all units A mnglpFilterTable 1 Management IP Addresses Table entry Not accessible NwMnglpAddress Applicable to all units An IP mnglpFilterEntry 1 address in the Management IP Addresses Table entry NwMnglpTableldx Applicable to all units mnglpFilterEntry 2 Read only A table index for an entry in the Management IP Addresses Table Intege
71. the IDU over the indoor outdoor Ethernet cable 20 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Specifications 1 7 5 2 SU I Subscriber Unit 1 7 5 2 1 Mechanical and Electrical Table 1 13 Mechanical and Electrical Specifications SU I Subscriber Unit ight g DC Power Input from Power Supply 48 VDC Mains Power Input to Power Supply 90 265 VAC 47 63 Hz 1 7 5 2 2 Connectors Table 1 14 Connectors SU I Subscriber Unit Connector Description ETHERNET 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 Cable connection to a PC straigh Cable connection to a hub crossed POWER 48 VDC DC Power Plug System Description Chapter 1 System Description 1 7 5 3 Modular Base Station Equipment 1 7 5 3 1 Mechanical om f smere rm uerg 19 rack 3U or desktop 4 um AU D BS access unit AU D BS ODU pole or wall mountable 30 5 x 11 7 x 5 7 AU Ant 5G 16 60 2 3 5 pole mountable 43 6 x 25x 1 0 AU Ant 5G 17 90 2 3 5 pole mountable 55 x 25x 1 1 AU Ant 5G 15 120 2 3 5 pole mountable 53 x 26 x 1 1 AU Ant 5 4G 8 Omni 2 5 4 5 pole mountable 70cm high 6cm base 1 5 diameter AU Ant 5 8G 8 Omni Surface or pole mountable 40cm high 3 2cm base 0 23 diameter AU Ant 4 9G 15 120 2 4 pole mountable 55 x 25x 1 7 AU Ant 5 8G 14 120 UK 1 4 pole mountable 55x7 5x5 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Specifications 1 7 5 3 2 Connectors Table 1 16 Connectors Modular Base Station Equipment unit connector peserpto
72. the Telnet session is not terminated properly for example if you simply close the window the monitor program is blocked for several minutes To enable access to the monitor program during that time the unit must be reset via SNMP or by disconnecting reconnecting power The display of the Main Menu varies depending on the user s access level as follows For users with read only access rights only the Info Screens option is displayed Users with this access level are not able to access the Unit Control Basic Configuration Site Survey and Advanced Configuration menus For users with Installer access rights the first four menu items Info Screens Unit Control Basic Configuration and Site Survey are displayed Users with this access level are not able to access the Advanced Configuration menu For users with Administrator access rights the full Main Menu is displayed These users can access all menu items Common Operations The following describes the standard operations used when working with the Monitor program E Type an option number to open or activate the option In certain cases you may need to click Enter E Click Esc to exit a menu or option Operation and Administration 83 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration x The program is automatically terminated following a determined period of inactivity The default time out is 5 minutes and is configured with the Log Out Timer parameter In some ca
73. the antenna by pointing it in the general direction of the Base Station L 2 Verify that the power indication of the unit O Dis On 3 Verify that the W LINK LED i Wi of the ODU is On indicating that the unit is associated with an Access Unit If the W LINK LED is Off check that the ESSID and Frequency parameters are correctly configured If the SU is still not associated with the AU increase the transmit power level to its maximum value If the unit is still not associated with the AU improve the quality of the link by changing the direction of the antenna or by placing the antenna at a higher or alternate location 4 Rotate the antenna until the maximum SNR reading is achieved where at least 1 green LED is on If you encounter prolonged difficulty in illuminating the minimum required number of green LEDs try to improve the reception quality by placing the antenna at a higher point or in an alternate location 5 Ensure that the front of the antenna is always facing the Base Station However in certain conditions such as when the line of site to the Base Station is hampered better reception may be achieved using a reflected signal In this case the antenna is not always directed toward the Base Station 6 Secure the unit firmly to the pole SU A ODU fasten the rotation screws SU I antenna BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna x In some cases the antenna may need to be tilted to ensur
74. the overall throughput of the applicable SU as well as all other SUs associated with the same AU The link quality can be estimated based on the SNR measurement of the SU at the AU which can be viewed in the MAC Address Database option in the Site Survey menu If the measured SNR is less than a certain threshold it is recommended that the maximum modulation level of the SU be decreased in accordance with Table 4 11 using the values of typical sensitivity It is BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters recommended to add a 2 dB safety margin to compensate for possible measurement inaccuracy or variance in the link quality x The SNR measurement at the AU is accurate only when receiving transmissions from the applicable SU If necessary use the Ping Test utility in the Site Survey menu to verify data transmission When the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm is disabled this parameter will serve to determine Fixed Modulation Level used for transmissions The minimum value for the Maximum Modulation Level is defined by the Sub Band in use The maximum value for the Maximum Modulation Level is defined by the Sub Band in use and the HW revision of the unit Units with HW revision A support a maximum value of 7 while units with HW revision B and higher support a maximum value of 8 For information on how to view the Sub Bands supported by the unit and the supported parameters values and options refer to section 4 2 2
75. the unintentional merging of two wireless networks or two sectors in the same network Typically a different ESSID is defined for each AU To facilitate easy addition of SUs to an existing network without a prior knowledge of which specific AU will serve it and to support the Best AU feature a secondary global ESSID namely Operator ESSID can be configured in the AU If the Operator ESSID Option is enabled at the AU the Beacon frames transmitted by it will include both the ESSID and Operator ESSID The SU shall BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters regard such frames if either the ESSID or the Operator ESSID matches it own ESSID The ESSID of the AU with which the SU is eventually associated is defined as the Run Time ESSID of the SU Typically the initial ESSID of the SU is configured to the value of the Operator ESSID When the SU has become associated with a specific AU its ESSID can be reconfigured to the value of the ESSID of the AU 4 2 6 2 2 1 ESSID The ESSID parameter defines the ESSID of the unit Valid values A string of up to 31 printable ASCII characters The default value is ESSID1 x The ESSID string is case sensitive 4 2 6 2 2 2 Operator ESSID Parameters AU only The Operator ESSID Parameters submenu includes the following parameters 4 2 6 2 2 2 1 Operator ESSID Option The Operator ESSID Option enables or disables the use of Operator ESSID for establishing association with SUs The default
76. the wireless medium excluding retransmissions This count is useful for calculating the rates of retransmissions or dropped frames as only unicast frames are retransmitted if not acknowledged Total submitted frames bridge The total number of data frames submitted to the internal bridge for transmission to the wireless medium The count does not include control and wireless management frames or retransmissions There are also separate counts for each priority queue through which the frames were routed High Mid and Low Frames dropped too many retries The number of dropped frames which are unsuccessfully retransmitted without being acknowledged until the maximum permitted number of retransmissions This count includes dropped data frames as well as dropped control and wireless management frames Total retransmitted frames The total number of retransmissions including all unsuccessful transmissions and retransmissions Total transmitted concatenated frames The total number of concatenated frames transmitted successfully to the wireless medium excluding retransmissions There are also separate counts for concatenated frames that include one frame Single two frames Double or more than two frames More For more details refer to section 4 2 6 5 10 Total Tx events The total number of transmit events Typically transmission events include cases where transmission of a frame was delayed or was aborted before completion The
77. to all units The IP address MnglpRangesEntry 5 subnet mask of the range Used only if brzaccVLMngIPRangeFlag is rangeDefinedByStartAddrMask DeleteOneNwlpRange Applicable to all units Deletes a Integer NwMngParameters 11 single selected entry from the cancelOperation 0 Management IP Ranges Table deleteEntry 1 10 DeleteAlINwlpRanges Applicable to all units Deletes all Integer NwMngParameters 12 entries from the Management IP deleteAll 1 Ranges Table cancelOperation 2 ApClientlpAddress Applicable to SU RB only The IP IP address NwMngParameters 13 address of a WiFi AP connected to the unit E 2 4 IP Parameters breezeAccessVLMib 4 IpParams 1 of the unit lpParams 2 mask of the unit lpParams 3 gateway IP address of the unit UseDhcp Applicable to all units DHCP Integer lpParams 4 client mode of operation disable 1 disable Use regular manual dHCPOnly 2 methods to configure IP automatic 3 parameters DHCP Only Use DHCP server to configure IP parameters automatic Use DHCP server to configure IP parameters If a DHCP server is not available use manually configured values for UnitlpAdress SubnetMask and DefaultGWaAdress AccessTODHCP Applicable to all units The portto Integer lpParams 5 be used for communicating with a fromWirelessOnly 1 DHCP server fromEthernetOnly 2 fromBothWirelessAndEthernet 3 RunTimelPaddr Applicable to all units R
78. to the contention window mechanism before transmission When concatenation is enabled data packets in the queue of the internal bridge can be accumulated before the concatenated frame is transmitted to the wireless medium Data frames can be accumulated up to a maximum frame size of 2200 bytes for units with HW revision A or B or 4032 bytes for units with HW revision C or higher In the AU the concatenation process is performed separately for each destination SU Using the Link Capability exchange mechanism each unit learns the HW Revision and the SW Version of the unit s associated with it A concatenated frame with a length exceeding 2200 bytes may be generated and transmitted only if both the source and destination units have HW Revision C or higher If either the source or destination unit uses SW Version 3 0 or 3 1 then the maximum size of the concatenated frame is 3400 bytes and the maximum number of data frames that can be bundled into a concatenated frame is 2 for units with SW version 3 0 and 8 for units with SW version 3 1 A frame is a candidate for bundling into a concatenated frame if all the following conditions are met Operation and Administration 175 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 5 10 1 176 E The frame is a data frame E The destination is an entity behind the destination AU SU E The destination AU SU can support the feature uses SW version 3 0 or higher When a frame is identi
79. with Alvarion experts before switching to manual mode and modifying any of the parameters The general rules for using the Noise Immunity Control parameters are In the SU if performance Modulation Level is lower than expected based on the SNR try switching to Manual mode without changing any of the parameters A Do not change any of the SU s Noise Immunity Control parameters except the Noise Immunity State Control from remote as it may result in loss of connectivity to the unit In the AU try switching to Manual mode if overall throughput is too low or if SUs are lost although communication conditions are sufficient for good connectivity In many deployments the transition to Manual mode is sufficient If not you may try changing the Noise Immunity Level and or Spur Immunity Level parameters The target is to reduce the amount of Phy Error rate reported by the unit see Total Rx events on page 109 To ensure that sensitivity is not reduced too much and SUs are not lost verify that the Age see Display Association Info on page 113 of all SUs is below 20 seconds Do not activate the OFDM Weak Signal parameter if the SNR is below 36 dBm Under normal conditions the OFDM Weak Signal should never be activated in the AU since the SNR of all SUs will be below 36 dBm when ATPC is enabled The Noise Immunity Control submenu includes the following options 4 2 6 2 18 1 Noise Immunity State Control The Noise Immunity State Contro
80. with a DHCP server Select from the following options E From Wireless Link Only E From Ethernet Only E From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link The default for Access Units is From Ethernet Only The default for Subscriber Units is From Wireless Link Only Show IP Parameters The Show IP Parameters option displays the current values of the IP parameters including the Run Time IP Address Run Time Subnet Mask and Run Time Default Gateway Address Air Interface Parameters The Air Interface Parameters menu enables viewing the current Air Interface parameters defined for the unit and configuring new values for each of the relevant parameters Country Code and Sub Bands Each country has its own regulations regarding operation modes and parameters such as allowable frequencies and bandwidth the need to employ an automatic mechanism for detection and avoidance of frequencies used by radar systems maximum transmit power at each of the supported modulation levels and the ability to use burst transmissions To efficiently manage these country dependent parameters each unit has a Country Code parameter and a set of accompanying parameters which depend on this country code Where more than one set of parameters can be used the available sets are defined as Sub Bands selectable through the Frequency configuration menu ESSID Parameters The ESSID Extended Service Set ID is a string used to identify a wireless network and to prevent
81. written permission of Alvarion Ltd E The text and graphics are for the purpose of illustration and reference only The specifications on which they are based are subject to change without notice E The software described in this document is furnished under a license The software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that license E Information in this document is subject to change without notice E Corporate and individual names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted E Alvarion Ltd reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty E The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature and does not constitute an offer for the sale of the product described herein E Any changes or modifications of equipment including opening of the equipment not expressly approved by Alvarion Ltd will void equipment warranty and any repair thereafter shall be charged for It could also void the user s authority to operate the equipment Some of the equipment provided by Alvarion and specified in this manual is manufactured and warranted by third parties All such equipment must be installed and handled in full compliance with the instructions provided by suc
82. 0 eem Percent Wireless Link Prioritization D oe a sie m Enable Low Priority AIFS An 3 254 es O High Priority Traffic Number of HW Retries for AU 1 14 bowery tene oo O AW Priority Traffic Priority Traffic Priority Traffic DRAP Support AU m Disable Enable No m Enable Calls DRAP TTL 1 255 seconds 10 seconds Wireless Link Prioritization parameters are applicable only for units with a license for this feature F 1 8 Security Parameters Parameter unt Range Defaut Run Time Authentication Algorithm AU SU Open system Open system ee ee a Data Encryption Option AU SU Disable Disable No D ll Security Mode AU SU WEP m AES OCB FIPS 197 8 Default Key su rz Default Multicast Key AU T O Key 1 to Key 4 AU SU 32 hexadecimal digits BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 273 Appendix F Parameters Summary Promiscuous Authentication AU H Disable Disable Yes m Enable Disable after reset Applicable only if supported by the Sub Band The FIPS 197 option is available only in units with HW revision C or higher that have the applicable license BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 274 endix G Troubleshooting Appendix G Troubleshooting G 1 Ethernet Port Connection Problems Problem and Indication Possible Cause Corrective Action The Ethernet Integrity Indicator the yellow LED embedded in the Ethernet connector is off and or the Ethernet Acti
83. 16 The new type of the unit TrapSWVersion The SW version of the SU RB B100 with a Gees Traps 17 SW version below 4 0 that tries to associate with a station that has Wireless Link Prioritization Enabled E 3 2 Private Traps Trap umber SUassociatedAUTRAP 2 An AU BU trap indicating a TrapSUMacAddr new association with an SU RB AUdisassociatedT RAP 3 An AU BU trap indicating that TrapSUMacAddr an SU RB has been disassociated from the AU BU The AU BU decides that an SU RB has been disassociated from it and remove it from the ADB after receiving from another AU BU a SNAP frame with the SU RB MAC address The SNAP frame indicating a network topology change where the SU RB has associated with another AU BU will be received if both AUs BUs are connected to the same Ethernet backbone AUagingTRAP 4 An AU BU trap indicating that TrapSUMacAddr an SU RB aged out and was removed from the Associations database following its failure to acknowledge a specified number of consecutive frames SUassociatedTRAP 6 An SU RB trap indicating AssociatedAU association with an AU BU In addition to the MAC address information of the AU BU the trap also includes information on the average SNR of frames received from the AU BU BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 261 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB Trap dumber AUwirelessQualityTRAP 20 An AU BU trap indicating that the quality of the wireless link h
84. 4 Operation and Administration The Channel Reuse Parameters submenu includes the following options E Channel Reuse Option Enabling disabling the Channel Reuse algorithm The default is Disable E Radar Activity Assessment Period The period in hours used for assessment of radar activity in the original channel The range is 1 to 12 hours The default is 5 hours E Maximum Number of Detections in Assessment Period The maximum number of radar detections in the original channel during the Radar Activity Assessment Period that is required for reaching a decision to try again the original channel The range is 1 to 10 radar detections The default is 5 radar detections 4 2 6 2 4 4 1 Show DFS Settings And Data 4 2 6 2 4 5 128 Upon selecting the Show DFS Settings and Data the values of all DFS parameters and the current operating frequency will be displayed The current defined frequency subset as well as the defined subset to be used after the next reset are also displayed In addition all the applicable frequencies will be displayed together with their status in the database Radar Free Radar Detected or Adjacent to Radar Country Code Learning by SU This feature support simplified installation and updates processes by enabling the SU to adapt the Country Code used by the AU The AU advertises its country code in every beacon and association response message Upon synchronization the SU will check if its country
85. AU D E SA Access Unit is very similar to the AU D E BS unit The AU D E SA ODU outdoor unit is very similar to the AU D E BS ODU outdoor unit identical functionality but the e units are not interchangeable The available antennas for D model units are the same as those of the AU D BS Access Unit The main difference is in the structure of the indoor part in the AU D E SA Access Unit the indoor unit is a standalone desktop or wall mountable unit the same d Universal IDU that is also used in the SU rather than a 19 module There are two types of Standalone Access Units differing in the maximum number of Subscriber Units that they can serve E The AU SA Access Unit can serve up to 512 Subscriber Units 124 when Data Encryption is used E The AUS SA Access Unit can serve up to 8 SU 3 and or SU 6 and or SU I Subscriber Units For convenience all references to AU SA are applicable also for AUS SA unless explicitly stated otherwise The IDU connects to the network through a standard IEEE 802 3 Ethernet 10 100BaseT RJ 45 interfaces and is powered from the 110 220 VAC mains The indoor unit is connected to the outdoor unit via a Category 5 Ethernet cable This cable carries Ethernet traffic between the indoor and the outdoor units and also transfers power 54 VDC and control from the indoor unit to the outdoor unit The AU D E SA ODU and the AU D E BS ODU are not interchangeable The AU D E SA ODU cannot be used with t
86. Applicable to SU RB Read only The Integer results of the last LQI calculation 1 8 Applicable to SU RB Only Indicates the test conditions fullTest means that there are no limitations on the range of available modulation levels and that all modulation levels from 1 to 8 can be used limitedTest indicates that the results may not indicate the true quality since the available range is limited by HW HW Revision A or by the applicable parameters in the country code or by the configurable Maximum Modulation Level parameter Integer fullTest 1 limitedTest 2 Applicable to AU BU MAC Pinpoint table Not accessible Applicable to AU BU An entry in the MAC Pinpoint table Not accessible Each entry contains an Ethernet station MAC address and the MAC address of the wireless device used to connect it to the wireless network BreezeACCESS VL System Manual breezeAccessVLMib MptEthernetStationMACAddress Applicable to AU BU only Read only MAC address MacPinpointEntry 1 The MAC address of the Ethernet station It is used as an index in the MAC Pinpoint Table MptUnitMACAddress Applicable to AU BU only Read only MAC address MacPinpointEntry 2 The MAC address of the wireless device used by the station with the MAC Address from the index in order to access the wireless network DrapGatewaysTable DRAP Gateways table Not accessible SiteSurvey 8 Applicable only to AU with DRAP Support enabled A table h
87. Bridging Info option displays a list of all the stations in the SU s Forwarding Database Each MAC address entry is followed by a description which may include the following Et Ethernet An address learned from the Ethernet port WI Wireless An address of a node behind the associated AU learned via the wireless port Sp Special 8 addresses that are always present including gt The MAC address of the SU which appears twice as it is learned from both the Ethernet and wireless ports gt The MAC address if the internal Operating System s stack which also appears twice gt Alvarion s Multicast address 01 20 D6 00 00 01 which also appears twice The system treats this address as a Broadcast address gt Alvarion s special Multicast address 01 20 D6 00 00 05 reserved for future use gt The Ethernet Broadcast address FF FF FF FF FF FF In addition a summary table displays information about the Forwarding Database Bridging Info The summary table includes the current number of entries the aging time specified by the Bridge Aging Time parameter and the maximum number of entries permitted for this table which is 1016 Per Modulation Level Counters The Per Modulation Level Counters display statistics relating to wireless link performance at different radio modulation levels The Per Modulation Level Counters menu includes the following options E Display Counters Select this option to displ
88. DetectionChannelsEntry 4 The frequency of a channel in the DFS Radar Detection Channels DFSRadarDetectionChannelsTable DFSParameters 7 Table Replaces DFSChannelFrequency to support a resolution of 0 5 MHz for units with HW revision C and higher DFSMinimumPulsesToDetect Applicable to AU BU Defines the Integer DFSParameters 8 minimum number of pulses to detect 1 100 radar DFSChannelReuseParameters Channel Reuse Parameters NN DFSParameters 9 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 232 breezeAccessVLMib DFSChannelReuseOption DFSChannelReuseParameters 1 DFSRadarActivityAssessmentPeriod DFSChannelReuseParameters 2 DFSMaximumNumberOfDetectionsInAs sessmentPeriod DFSChannelReuseParameters 3 CountryCodeLearningBySU FrequencyDefinition 12 CurrentAUOperatingFrequencyNew FrequencyDefinition 13 AUDefinedFrequencyNew FrequencyDefinition 14 AutoSubBandSelect FrequencyDefinition 15 AutoSubBandSelectedFreqSubset AutoSubBandSelect 1 AutoSubBandFrequencySubsetT able AutoSubBandSelect 2 AutoSubBandFrequencySubsetEntry AutoSubBandFrequencySubsetTable 1 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Applicable to AU BU Enabling disabling the DFS Channel Reuse Algorithm Applicable to AU BU The period in hours for assessment of radar activity when the Channel reuse algorithm is enabled Applicable to AU BU The maximum number of radar detecti
89. DisplayString SIZE 0 32 CountryDependentParams Table CountryDependentParameters 2 CountryDependentParameterEntry CountryDependentParamsTable 1 CountryDependentParameterT ableldx CountryDependentParameterEntry 1 CountryDependentParameterFrequencies CountryDependentParameterEntry 2 AllowedBandwidth CountryDependentParameterEntry 3 RegulationMaxTxPowerAtAntennaPort CountryDependentParameterEntry 4 RegulationMaxEIRP CountryDependentParameterEntry 5 MinModulationLevel CountryDependentParameterEntry 6 MaxModulationLevel CountryDependentParameterEntry 7 BurstModeSupport CountryDependentParameterEntry 8 214 supported by the unit Applicable to all units Not accessible A table of country dependent parameters Applicable to all units Not accessible An entry in the country dependent parameters table Applicable to all units Read only The sub band ID of the entry in the Country Dependent Parameters table Serves also as index for the table entry Applicable to all units Read only The frequencies included in the applicable sub band entry Applicable to all units Read only The bandwidth when using the applicable the sub band Applicable to all units Read only The maximum allowed Tx power at the antenna port when using the applicable sub band Applicable to all units Read only The maximum allowed EIRP when using the applicable sub band Ap
90. Enables to access all system parameters including the Basic Configuration parameters Available only at the Administrator access level Info Screens Menu The Info Screens menu enables you to view the current values of various parameter sets The parameter sets are identical to the main parameter groups in the configuration menus You can view a specific parameter set or choose to view all parameters at once While this menu is available at all access levels some security related parameters including the encryption Keys ESSID and Operator ESSID are only displayed to users with Administrator access rights The Info Screens menu includes the following options E Show Unit Status E Show Basic Configuration Operation and Administration 85 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 2 1 86 E Show Advanced Configuration Show Country Dependent Parameters Show All Parameters Show Unit Status The Show Unit Status menu is a read only menu that displays the current values of the following parameters Unit Name As defined in the Unit Control menu Unit Type Identifies the unit s function AU BS AU SA AUS BS AUS SA SU 3 1D SU 6 1D SU 6 BD SU 54 BD SU I Unit MAC Address The unit s unique IEEE MAC address Current Number of Associations AU only The total number of SUs associated with this AU This number may include units that are not currently active as there is no aging algorithm for associated SUs
91. H Disable Enable Yes m Enable 4 20 dB m Units in 5 4 5 8 Yes GHz bands 5 dB m Units in the 4 9 5 2 and 5 3 GHz bands 8 dB 4 60 dB 28 dB 1 3600 seconds 30 seconds 1 20 dB Off On Yes H On m Ethernet Status Control Parameters Summary Parameter unt Range Defaut Run Time GU supplied with the unit Channel Scan Period Spectrum Analysis Scan 1 100 cycles No Cycles Automatic Channel AU H Disable Disable No Selection m Enable Configured per analysis 100 1000 0 means Not 21 Yes Threshold Used Noise Immunity State AU SU Automatic Automatic Yes Control Manual Noise Immunity Level AU SU 0 4 Yes Use only 0 or 4 OU Spur Immunity Level AU SU Yes OFDM Weak Signal AU SU 0 not active or 1 active fOr Pulse Detection AU SU Low High Yes Sensitivity m High Not applicable if only one Sub Band is available for the applicable Country Code Applicable only if DFS is supported by the Sub Band Configurable only in units without an integral antenna FLA Network Management Parameters mme Lu Range 1 Dotaut L ns Access to Network AU SU From Wireless Link Only From Both Ethernet Management From Ethernet Only and Wireless Link From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link Network Management Disable Disable No Filtering Activate Management IP Filter On Ethernet Port Activate Management IP Filter On Wireless Port Activate Management IP Filter O
92. ICULAR PURPOSE SATISFACTORY QUALITY CORRESPONDENCE WITH DESCRIPTION NON INFRINGEMENT AND ACCURACY OF INFORMATION BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Legal Rights GENERATED ALL OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED ALVARION WARRANTIES HEREIN RUN ONLY TO PURCHASER AND ARE NOT EXTENDED TO ANY THIRD PARTIES ALVARION NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS Limitation of Liability a ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO THE PURCHASER OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF USE INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS OR FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHETHER ARISING UNDER BREACH OF CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER BASED ON THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES b TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES HEREUNDER OF ALVARION OR ITS EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT BY PURCHASER NOR SHALL THE AGGREGATE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES TO ALL PARTIES REGARDING ANY PRODUCT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THAT PRODUCT BY THAT PARTY EXCEPT IN THE CASE OF A BREACH OF A PARTY S CONFIDENTIALITY OBLIGATIONS Electronic Emission Notices This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subje
93. IDs in the VLAN Forwarding List is 20 Valid values are 1 to 4094 4 2 6 4 1 4 3 Remove Forwarding VLAN ID The Remove Forwarding VLAN ID option enables removing a VLAN ID from the VLAN ID Forwarding List Valid values are VID values from 1 to 4094 that are included in the VLAN Forwarding List 4 2 6 4 1 4 4Show VLAN ID Forwarding List The Show VLAN Forwarding List option displays the values of the VLAN IDs included in the VLAN Forwarding List x If the VLAN ID Forwarding List is empty and the VLAN Forwarding Support is set to Enable then all data frames are discarded If VLAN Relaying Support and VLAN Forwarding Support are both enabled then all VLAN IDs configured in the Relaying List must also be configured in the Forwarding List 4 2 6 4 1 5 WLAN Relaying AU only The VLAN Relaying feature is applicable only for Trunk Links and Service Provider Links It enables defining the VLAN ID values to be included in the VLAN Relaying List If the Link Type is defined as either a Trunk Link or a Service Provider Link and the VLAN Relaying Support option is enabled a frame relayed from the wireless link which is a frame received from the wireless link that should be transmitted back through the wireless link with a VLAN ID or a Service Provider VLAN ID that is not a member of the unit s VLAN Relaying List is discarded If VLAN Forwarding Support is also enabled it is necessary to configure all the VLAN IDs in the Relaying List a
94. Integer license for the Wireless Link 3 254 Prioritization feature and to BU 100 Applicable only if the Wireless Link Prioritization Option is enabled Define the AIFS Arbitration Inter frame Space that will be used for transmitting Low Priority Traffic Applicable only to AU witha Integer license for the Wireless Link 1 14 Prioritization feature and to BU 100 Applicable only if the Wireless Link Prioritization Option is enabled Defines the Maximum number of HW Retries for a unicast data packet that has High Priority Applicable only to AU witha Integer license for the Wireless Link 1 14 Prioritization feature and to BU 100 Applicable only if the Wireless Link Prioritization Option is enabled Defines the Maximum number of HW Retries for a unicast data packet that has Low Priority BreezeACCESS VL System Manual breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter ne ee AUBurstDurationHighPriority WirelessLinkPrioritization 5 AUBurstDurationLowPriority WirelessLinkPrioritization 6 SUBurstDurationHighPriority WirelessLinkPrioritization 7 SUBurstDurationLowPriority WirelessLinkPrioritization 8 Drap ServiceParameters 11 DrapSupport Drap 1 DrapUdpPort Drap 2 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Applicable only to AU with a Integer license for the Wireless Link 0 40 Prioritization feature and to BU 100 Applicable only if the Wireless Link Prio
95. LAN tag to be inserted into an existing IEEE 802 1Q tagged Ethernet frame This is a solution to transport multiple customers VLANs across the service provider s network without interfering with each other The VLAN Support menu includes the following parameters E VLAN Link Type Operation and Administration 151 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 4 1 1 4 2 6 4 1 2 152 E VLAN ID Data SU only E VLAN ID Management E Service Provider VLAN ID SU only E VLAN Forwarding E VLAN Relaying AU only E VLAN Traffic Priority E VLAN QinQ Protocol Ethertype VLAN ID Data SU only The VLAN ID Data is applicable only when the VLAN Link Type parameter is set to Access Link It enables defining the VLAN ID for data frames which identifies the VLAN to which the unit belongs Valid values range from 1 to 4094 Default value 1 The VLAN ID Data affects frames received from the wireless link port as follows E Only tagged frames with a VLAN ID VID equal to the VLAN ID Data defined in the unit are forwarded to the Ethernet port E The tag headers are removed from the data frames received from the wireless link before they are transmitted on the Ethernet port The VLAN ID Data affects frames received from the Ethernet port as follows E A VLAN Data Tag is inserted in all untagged frames received from the Ethernet port before transmission on the wireless link The tag includes the values of the
96. Multicast Key AU Security Mode Key 1 to Key 4 Operation and Administration 93 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 3 Parameters that are not reset after Set Partial Factory Operator Defaults Air Interface Parameters ESSID Operator ESSID Option AU Operator ESSID AU Cell Distance Mode AU Maximum Cell Distance AU Per SU Distance Learning Option AU Selected Sub Band AU Frequency AU DFS Option AU SU Waiting Option AU Channel Reuse Option AU Radar Activity Assessment Period AU Maximum Number of Detections in Assessment Period AU Frequency Subset AU ATPC Option AU Transmit Power Maximum Tx Power SU Tx Control AU Best AU Support SU Preferred AU MAC Address SU All Noise Immunity Control parameters Network Management Parameters AP Client IP Address SU Performance Parameters Adaptive Modulation Decision Thresholds BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 94 Menus and Parameters Table 4 3 Parameters that are not reset after Set Partial Factory Operator Defaults i U A Service Parameters DRAP Option AU A Number of HW Retries for High Priority Traffic 4 2 3 2 1 3 Set Complete Operators Defaults SU U AU ion AU i iori ic AU iori ic AU iori ic AU iori ic AU iori ic AU Select this option to reset the unit to the Operator Defau
97. OCB Advanced Encryption Standard AES is defined by the National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST and is based on Rijndael block cipher AES OCB Offset Code Book is a mode that operates by augmenting the normal encryption process by incorporating an offset value E FIPS 197 is certified for compliance with Federal Information Processing Standards It provides encryption and message integrity in one solution and implements the Advanced Encryption Standard using Rijndael block cipher Ed The FIPS 197 encryption algorithm is a licensed feature and is available only in units with the required license FIPS 197 can be supported only in Access Units with HW revision C or higher FIPS 197 feature license is not available for AUS unit Operation and Administration 191 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 7 1 4 2 6 7 2 192 The following parameters are available through the Security Parameters menu in certain units some or all of the security options may not be available E Authentication Algorithm E Data Encryption Option E Security Mode E Default Key SU only HM Default Multicast Key AU only E Key 1 to Key 4 E Promiscuous Authentication AU only Authentication Algorithm The Authentication Algorithm option determines the operation mode of the selected unit The following two options are available E Open System An SU configured to Open System can only associate with an AU also configu
98. Outdoor cable to the RADIO connector located on the front panel of the indoor unit 2 Connect the power cord to the unit s AC socket located on the rear panel Connect the other end of the power cord to the AC mains The unit can operate with AC mains of 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz E The color codes of the power cable are as follows Brown Phase Blue Neutral 0 Yellow Green Ground 3 Verify that the POWER LED is lit indicating that power is supplied to the unit 4 Configure the basic parameters as described in section 3 1 5 Connect the 10 100 BaseT ETHERNET connector to the network The cable connection should be a straight Ethernet if connecting the indoor unit to a hub switch and a crossed cable if connecting it directly to a PC Network Interface Card NIC m BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit Ed The length of the Ethernet cable connecting the indoor unit to the user s equipment together with the length of the Indoor to Outdoor cable should not exceed 100 meters 2 4 1 RESET Button Functionality Using a sharp object press the recessed RESET button for a short time to reset the unit and reboot from the Main version In units with ODU HW revision C and an IDU PS 1073 the RESET button can be used for setting the unit to its factory defaults Press the button for at least 5 seconds until the ETH LED of the IDU stops blinking the unit will reboot with the factory default configur
99. Override Filter option enables or disables the broadcasting of ARP messages Even if according to the selected option in the Filter Options parameter broadcast messages should be filtered ARP broadcasts are transmitted if this parameter is set to Enable Select from the following options E Disable ARP messages are filtered or transmitted according to the general filtering criteria in the Filter Options parameter E Enable ARP messages are transmitted regardless of the selected value of the Filter Options parameter The default selection is Enable Operation and Administration 163 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 4 3 4 2 6 4 3 1 4 2 6 4 3 2 4 2 6 4 3 3 164 Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter The Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter parameters available in both AU and SU enable to limit the number of broadcast and or multicast packets that can be transmitted per second in order to prevent the potential flooding of the wireless medium by certain ARP attacks In SUs the limiter is placed after the Ethernet Broadcast Filters For this reason the limiter will receive only the packets that pass through these filters If the Ethernet filters of the SU are disabled the limiter will be applied to all relevant packets received When the Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter is enabled and the specified limit is reached the unit will send a trap The trap will be sent periodically till the number
100. P Address Range option enables deleting IP address range entries from the Filter IP Address Ranges list Delete All User Filtering Entries The Delete All User Filtering Entries option enables deleting all entries from the Filter IP Address Ranges list DHCP Unicast Override Filter When user filtering is activated unicast DHCP messages are filtered out therefore the unit cannot communicate with the DHCP server The DHCP Unicast Override Filter option enables to overcome this problem When enabled unicast DHCP messages pass overriding the user filtering mechanism The default is Disable DHCP Unicast BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 6 1 6 Show User Filtering Parameters 4 2 6 6 2 4 2 6 6 2 1 The Show All User Filtering Parameters option displays the current value of the User Filtering Option and the list of User Filtering addresses subnet masks and ranges MIR and CIR Parameters The CIR Committed Information Rate specifies the minimum data rate guaranteed to the relevant subscriber The MIR Maximum Information Rate value specifies the maximum data rate available for burst transmissions provided such bandwidth is available Under normal conditions the actual Information Rate IR is between the applicable CIR and MIR values based on the following formula IR CIR K MIR CIR In this formula K is between 0 and 1 and is determined dynamically by the AU according to overall demand in
101. PLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE UNITS OF PRODUCT INCLUDING ALL THE SOFTWARE DELIVERED TO PURCHASER HEREUNDER ARE NOT FAULT TOLERANT AND ARE NOT DESIGNED MANUFACTURED OR INTENDED FOR USE OR RESALE IN APPLICATIONS WHERE THE FAILURE MALFUNCTION OR INACCURACY OF PRODUCTS CARRIES A RISK OF DEATH OR BODILY INJURY OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES MAY INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO USE AS PART OF ON LINE CONTROL SYSTEMS IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS REQUIRING FAIL SAFE PERFORMANCE SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES WEAPONS SYSTEMS OR OTHER APPLICATIONS REPRESENTING A SIMILAR DEGREE OF POTENTIAL HAZARD ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES b PURCHASER S SOLE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES ABOVE SHALL BE REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE AS SPECIFIED ABOVE AT ALVARION S OPTION TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED EITHER IN FACT OR BY OPERATION OF LAW STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES TERMS OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PART
102. S VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 4 4 2 6 4 1 Bridge Parameters The Bridge Parameters menu provides a series of parameter sets that enables configuring parameters such as control and filtering options for broadcast transmissions VLAN support and Type of Service prioritization The Bridge Parameters menu includes the following options E VLAN Support E Ethernet Broadcast Filtering SU only E Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter E Bridge Aging Time E Roaming Option SU only E Broadcast Relaying AU only E Unicast Relaying AU only E MAC Address List AU only VLAN Support The VLAN Support menu enables defining the parameters related to the IEEE 802 10 compliant VLAN aware Virtual LAN aware feature of the units Each VLAN includes stations that can communicate with each other but cannot communicate with stations belonging to different VLANs The VLAN feature also provides the ability to set traffic priorities for transmission of certain frames The information related to the VLAN is included in the VLAN Tag Header which is inserted in each frame between the MAC header and the data VLAN implementation in BreezeACCESS VL units supports frame routing by port information whereby each port is connected to only one VLAN The system also supports the 802 1 QinQ standard which defines the way to have 2 VLAN tags double tagged frames This procedure allows an additional VLAN tag called Service Provider V
103. S VL System Manual 243 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB MIB Parameter Value Range TcpPortRangeDelete TcpPortRangeConfig 5 TcpPortRangeDeleteAll TcpPortRangeConfig 6 Applicable to all units DisplayString Delete port range s from A range is defined by TCP Port Ranges Table lt start gt lt end gt or lt start gt Get operation will return an where lt start gt is the Start empty string Port of the range and lt end gt is the End Port If only lt start gt is specified the range is lt start gt lt start gt The value of lt start gt and lt end gt are between 0 and 65535 The user can delete several ranges using a comma to separate between ranges Example 10 26 99 987 900 Applicable to all units Integer Delete all entries form TCP deleteAll 1 Port Ranges Table Get cancelOperation 2 operation will return 1 WirelessLinkPrioritization Wireless Link Prioritization TrafficPrioritization 4 parameters WirelessLinkPrioritizationOption WirelessLinkPrioritization 1 Applicable only to AU witha Integer license for the Wireless Link disable 1 Prioritization feature and to enable 2 BU 100 Enable disable the na 255 traffic prioritization over the lowPriorityAIFS WirelessLinkPrioritization 2 HWRetriesHighPriority WirelessLinkPrioritization 3 HWRetriesLowPriority WirelessLinkPrioritization 4 244 Wireless Link Applicable only to AU witha
104. SNR at which you want each SU to be received at the AU the lower limit of the optimal reception level range Available values 4 to 60 dB Default value 28 dB 4 2 6 2 8 3 3ATPC Delta from Minimum SNR Level The Delta from Minimum SNR Level is used to define the highest SNR at which you want each SU to be received at the AU the higher limit of the optimal reception level range Max Level Minimum SNR Level Delta from Minimum SNR Level Available values 4 to 20 dB Default value 5 dB for units operating in the 5 4 and 5 8 GHz bands 8 dB for units operating in the 4 9 5 2 and 5 3 GHz bands Operation and Administration 135 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 2 8 3 4 Minimum Interval Between ATPC Messages The Minimum Interval Between ATPC Messages parameter sets the minimal time between consecutive power up power down messages to a specific SU Setting a low value for this parameter may lead to higher overhead and to an excessive rate of power level changes at the SUs High values for this parameter increase the time it will take the SUs to reach optimal transmit power level Available values 1 to 3600 seconds Default value 30 seconds 4 2 6 2 8 3 5ATPC Power Level Step 4 2 6 2 8 4 The ATPC Power Level Step parameter defines the step size to be used by the SUs for incrementing decrementing the Current Transmit Power after receiving a power up power down message If the distance between
105. Service Set ID ESSID used to prevent the merging of collocated systems The ESSID is accessible only with the write community string administrator password Applicable to AU BU only Enabling disabling the use of the Operator ESSID Applicable to AU BU only A secondary ESSID to support easy installation of SUs as well as the use of the Best AU BU feature Accessible only with SNMP Write Community string administrator password Applicable to SU RB only The ESSID of the associated AU BU Accessible only with SNMP Write Community string administrator password Applicable to all units For AU BU read write For SU RB read only The distance is learned from the AU BU In units with SW version 2 0 and up applicable only when the Cell Distance Mode is set to Manual The highest distance from the AU BU of any SU RB served by it Affects the maximum time the units wait for a response message and the slot size by taking into account the round trip propagation delay Applicable to AU and SU Not applicable to BreezeNET B products Arbitration Inter Frame Spacing AIFS This is the number of time slots that define the DIFS DIFS SIFS AlIFS A value of 1 should be used only in point to point applications to allow one unit to have advantage over the other unit Applicable to AU BU only A wireless link quality threshold expressed in of retransmissions for sending the brzaccVLAUWirelessQualityT RAP This trap indicate
106. Sivan We re on your wavelength BreezeACCESS VL SW Version 4 0 27 February 2007 P N 214484 Document History Document History Topic FIPS 197 Sections 4 2 5 6 3 4 2 6 7 4 9 GHz B amp B models Section 1 4 1 7 1 1 7 5 1 1 1 7 5 4 1 AUS functionality change Section 1 2 4 2 6 2 12 IDU ODU Cable Section 2 1 2 Frequency configuration Section 4 2 6 2 3 1 4 2 6 2 5 Transmit Power Maximum Transmit Power Section 4 2 6 2 8 5 3 FCC limitations Section 4 2 6 2 4 1 Per SU Distance Learning Section 4 2 5 6 2 4 2 6 2 10 ATPC Delta from Minimum SNR Level Section 4 2 6 2 8 3 3 Tx Control Section 4 2 6 2 8 5 Description Optional support under license of FIPS 197 compliant encryption AU SU with 25dBi antennas for point to point links in the 4 9 GHz band AUS can support up to 8 SU 3 SU 6 units increased from 5 Update of maximum length of IDU ODU cable Improved mechanism for automatic detection of frequency bandwidth Removed parameters Sub Band select SU Frequency Subset Definition SU New parameters User Defined Frequency Subsets Simplified configuration mechanism A single parameter instead of per modulation level parameters Update Tx Power limitations for compliance with FCC regulations New feature Default values updated Added option Ethernet Status Control Version Date Issued SW Version 4 0 July 2006 SW Version
107. Summary F 1 1 Unit Control Parameters Change Unit Name AU SU Up to 32 printable ASCII characters None ve Password Password Password Name An empty string is not allowed An empty string is not allowed Name An empty string is not allowed FTP Source Dir Up to 80 printable ASCII characters Use to clear es es o Configuration File Name FTP Server IP Address AU SU IP address 10 0 0 253 FTP Gateway IP Address AU SU IP address 0 0 0 0 No ss FTP User Name AU SU Up to 18 printable ASCII characters No FTP Password AU SU Upto 18 printable ASCII characters Vx No FTP Log File Name AU SU Up to 20 printable ASCII characters logfile log FTP Log File Destination AU SU Up to 80 printable ASCII characters None empty Yes Director Use to clear Event Log Policy AU SU Message Warning Y Warning Error Fatal Log None Ethernet Port Negotiation AU SU Force 10 Mbps and Half Duplex Auto Negotiation No Mode Force 10 Mbps and Full Duplex Force 100 Mbps and Half Duplex Force 100 Mbps and Full Duplex Auto Negotiation Change System Location AU SU Up to 34 printable ASCII characters Manual Feature Upgrade AU SU License string 32 to 64 hexadecimal digits BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 266 Parameters Summary F 1 2 IP Parameters AU SU IP Address AU SU IP address Subnet Mask AU SU IP address Default Gateway Address AU SU IP address DHCP Option A
108. The measurement unit is 250 microseconds and the range is from 1 to 40 0 25 to 10 milliseconds or O to disable bursts for high priority packets The default is 8 2 milliseconds 4 2 6 6 3 5 8SU Burst Duration for Low Priority Traffic 4 2 6 6 4 4 2 6 6 4 1 4 2 6 6 4 2 190 The SU Burst Duration for Ligh Priority Traffic parameter defines the maximum duration of a burst that can be made by the SUs served by the AU for low priority packets The measurement unit is 250 microseconds and the range is from 1 to 40 0 25 to 10 milliseconds or O to disable bursts for low priority packets The default is 20 5 milliseconds DRAP Parameters AU only DRAP Dynamic Resources Allocation Protocol is a protocol that can be used by the AU to communicate with Voice and Networking Gateways connected to SUs served by it enabling identification of these Gateways It also enables managing voice calls made by Voice Gateways VG The AU keeps track of all current voice calls and upon receiving from a VG a request for a new call compares the current number of calls to the maximum allowed number If the maximum allowed number has been reached the AU will not confirm the request The DRAP feature is applicable only for gateways that support DRAP The following is a description of DRAP related parameters DRAP Support The DRAP Support option enables or disables the DRAP feature that offers the possibility of identifying the connected G
109. U SU Disable Disable No DHCP Only Automatic Access to DHCP AU SU From Wireless Only AU From Ethernet Only No From Ethernet Only l W From Both Wireless and SU Fram Wireless Only WW Ethernet 1 3 Air Interface Parameters 7 All frequencies in the available All available frequencies Yes Sub Bands in all available Sub Bands Parameter unt Range Defaut Run Time ESSID AU SU Up to 31 printable ASCII ESSID1 characters Operator ESSID Option AU m Disable Enable No m Enable Operator ESSID Up to 31 printable ASCII ESSID1 characters Best AU Support SU m Disable Disable No m Enable Attempts Preferred AU MAC SU MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Yes Address no preferred AU Scanning Mode Cell Distance Mode Automatic Manual Automatic NO Maximum Cell Distance AU 0 54 Km 0 no compensation Yes 0 means no compensation 0 100 100 Arbitration Inter Frame AU SU 1 time slot 2 time slots Yes Spacing m 2time slots Per SU Distance AU m Disable Disable Yes Learning H Enable Wireless Trap Threshold 1 100 30 Maximum Number of AU AU BS AU SA 1 512 1 124 if AU BS AU SA 512 Yes Associations Data Encryption Option is enabled AUS BS AUS SA 8 AUS BS AUS SA 1 8 Sub Band Select According to the Country Code Frequency AU According to the Sub Band The lowest frequency in No the Sub Band SU User Defined Frequency Subsets BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 267 Appendix F Parameters
110. VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 4 2 2 4 2 6 4 2 3 4 2 6 4 2 4 DHCP Broadcast Override Filter The DHCP Broadcast Override Filter option enables or disables the broadcasting of DHCP messages Even if according to the selected option in the Filter Options parameter broadcast messages should be filtered DHCP broadcasts are transmitted if this parameter is set to Enable Select from the following options E Disable DHCP Broadcast messages are filtered or transmitted according to the general filtering criteria in the Filter Options parameter E Enable DHCP Broadcast messages are transmitted regardless of the selected value of the Filter Options parameter The default selection is Disable PPPoE Broadcast Override Filter The PPPoE Broadcast Override Filter option enables or disables the broadcasting of PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet messages Even if according to the selected option in the Filter Options parameter broadcast messages should be filtered PPPoE broadcasts are transmitted if this parameter is set to Enable Select from the following options E Disable PPPoE Broadcast messages are filtered or transmitted according to the general filtering criteria in the Filter Options parameter E Enable PPPoE Broadcast messages are transmitted regardless of the selected value of the Filter Options parameter The default selection is Disable ARP Broadcast Override Filter The ARP Broadcast
111. a connectivity 3 5 1 Outdoor Unit Verification To verify the correct operation of the Outdoor Unit examine the LED indicators located on the bottom panel of the outdoor unit The following tables list the provided LEDs and their associated indications x Verifying the correct operation of the Outdoor Unit using the LEDs as described below is only possible after the configuration and alignment processes are completed Table 3 3 AU ODU LEDs Wireless Link Green Unit is associated with one or Indictor more SUs Blinking red No associations Off Wireless link is disabled Status Self test and power Green Power is available and indication self test passed Blinking Amber Testing not ready for operation Red Self test failed fatal error Ethernet activity Green Ethernet link detected nnectivi CONNERY Amber No Ethernet connectivity between indication the indoor and outdoor units e BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Operation Verification Table 3 4 SU ODU LEDs Wireless Link Green Unit is associated with an AU Indictor no wireless link activity Blinking Green Data received or transmitted on the wireless link Blinking rate is proportional to wireless traffic rate Off Wireless link is disabled Status d Self test and power Green Power is available and a indication self test passed Blinking Amber Testing not ready for operation Red Sel
112. able to SU RB Integer disable 1 enable 2 na 255 Integer 1 255 Mac Address 000000000000 means no preferred AU Integer Range 1 20 MAC Address DisplayString Integer Na 255 227 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB NeighborAuAssocLoadStatus NeighborAuEntry 5 NeighborAuMark NeighborAuEntry 6 NeighborAuHwRevision NeighborAuEntry 7 NeighborAuCountryCode NeighborAuEntry 8 NeighborAuSwVer NeighborAuEntry 9 NeighborAuAtpcOption NeighborAuEntry 10 NeighborAuAdapModOption NeighborAuEntry 11 NeighborAuBurstModeOption NeighborAuEntry 12 NeighborAuDfsOption NeighborAuEntry 14 NeighborAuConcatenationOption NeighborAuEntry 15 NeighborAuLearnCountryCodeBySU NeighborAuEntry 17 NeighborAuSecurityMode NeighborAuEntry 18 228 Applicable to SU RB Read only The load status of the AU BU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU BU Table Full means that it has reached its maximum permitted load meaning in AU that the number of associated SUs is the Maximum Number Of Associations for AU or in BU that it is already associated with an RB Applicable to SU RB Read only The overall mark given by the Best AU BU algorithm to the AU BU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU BU Table Applicable to SU RB Read only The HW revision of the AU BU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU BU Table Applicable t
113. able 1 10 Mechanical Specifications SU A E Subscriber Unit mt Dimensions om Weight ko General An IDU indoor unit and an ODU outdoor unit with an integral antenna or a connection to an external antenna IDU PS1073 Plastic box black desktop or wall 14x 6 6 x 3 5 mountable New SU A ODU Metal box plus an integral diamond 22 x 22 x7 5 4 5 8 GHz shaped antenna in a plastic enclosure pole or wall mountable SU E ODU Metal box pole or wall mountable 30 5 x 11 7 x 5 7 0 3 SU A ODU Metal box plus an integral cut diamond 41 5 x 36 9 x 6 3 2 3 shaped antenna in a plastic enclosure pole or wall mountable System Description Chapter 1 System Description 1 7 5 1 2 Connectors Table 1 11 Connectors SU A E Subscriber Unit ETHERNET 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 Cable connection to a PC crossed Cable connection to a hub straight RADIO AC IN SU A ODU INDOOR New SU A ODU IDU COM 5 4 5 8 GHz SU E ODU INDOOR ANT 1 7 5 1 3 Electrical 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 3 pin AC power plug 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 protected by a waterproof sealing assembly 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 protected by a sealing cap 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 protected by a waterproof sealing assembly N Type jack 50 ohm lightning protected Table 1 12 Electrical Specifications SU A E Subscriber Unit General Power consumption 25W IDU AC power input 85 265 VAC 50 60 Hz ODU 54 VDC from
114. able to the ground terminal located on the rear panel of the BS SH chassis and firmly tighten the grounding screw Connect the opposite end of the grounding cable to a ground connection or to the cabinet if applicable Carefully insert the BS PS power supply and the BS AU modules into the relevant slots and push firmly until they are securely locked Before insertion verify that the switches of all BS PS modules are in the OFF position Refer to section 2 6 1 for a description of the slot assignment Close the captive screws attached to each module Place blank covers over all of the unused slots Connect the indoor to outdoor cable s to the RADIO connector s of the BS AU module s If a BS PS DC power supply is used connect the DC power cord to the 48 VDC IN jack of the BS PS DC power supply If a redundant power supply module is installed connect a DC power cord also to the second DC power module Connect the power cord s to the 48 VDC power source as follows a Connect the black wire to the 48 VDC contact of the power source b Connect the white wire to the Return contact c Connect the shield to the ground If a BS PS AC power supply is used connect the AC power cord to the AC IN jack of the BS PS AC power supply If a redundant power supply module is installed connect an AC power cord also to the second AC power module Connect the power cord s to the mains outlet Switch the BS PS AC DC power supplies to ON Verify
115. all units Read only Integer mngTrapEntry 3 Index for an entry in the 1 10 Management Trap Table DeleteOneTrapAddr Applicable to all units Deletes a Integer NwMngParameters 8 single selected entry from the GE e Management Trap Table deleteEntry 1 Ger na 255 DeleteAllTrapAddrs Applicable to all units Deletes all Integer NwMngParameters 9 entries from the Management deleteAll 1 Trap Table cancelOperation 2 na 255 MnglpRangesTable Applicable to all units A table of NwMngParameters 10 Management IP Address Ranges Not accessible MnglpRangesEntry Applicable to all units An entry MnglpRangesTable 1 in the table of Management IP Address Ranges Not accessible EE Applicable to all units Index of Integer MnglpRangesEntry 1 an entry in the IP Address 1 10 Ranges Table MnglPRangeFlag Applicable to all units Defines Integer MnglpRangesEntry 2 the method of defining the range rangeDefinedByStartEndAdadr 1 Using Start amp End Addresses oi na rangeDefinedByStartEndAddr or using Start Address and Mask angeDefinedByStatAddrMask MnglpRangesEntry 3 Address of the range MnglpRangeEnd Applicable to all units End IP address MnglpRangesEntry 4 Address of the range Used only if brzaccVLMnglPRangeFlag is rangeDefinedByStartEndAddr BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 219 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB MIB Parameter Value Range MnglpRangeMask Applicable
116. ameters have been configured additional parameters can be remotely configured via the Ethernet port or the wireless link using Telnet or SNMP management or by loading a configuration file Refer to section 4 1 for information on how to access the Monitor program using Telnet and how to use it The Basic Configuration menu includes all the parameters necessary for the initial installation and operation of Subscriber and Access Units In many installations most of these parameters should not be changed from their default values The basic parameters and their default values are listed in Table 3 1 Refer to Chapter 4 for detailed information on the applicable parameters Unit Control Parameters Default Gateway Address 0 0 0 0 Pe Access to DHCP AU From Ethernet Only SU From Wireless Only ESSID ESSID1 Sub Band Select AU 1 Applicable only if more than one Sub Band is available Frequency AU The lowest frequency in the selected Sub Band User Defined Frequency Subsets All frequencies SU BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Configuring Basic Parameters Table 3 1 Basic Parameters Transmit Power Dependent on HW Transmit Power in SU revision unit type and cannot be higher than the Sub Band Maximum Tx Power parameter Maximum Tx Power SU Dependent on HW Maximum Tx Power revision and Sub Band cannot be higher than the upper limit according to the Sub Band in use Tx Power AU Antenna Gain units wit
117. anagement system The AlvariSTAR system uses a distributed client server architecture which provides the service provider with a robust scalable and fully redundant network management system in which all single points of failure can be avoided BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Management Systems AlvariSTAR provides the following BWA network management functionality Device Discovery Device Inventory Topology Fault Management Configuration Management Performance Monitoring Device embedded software upgrade Security Management Northbound interface to other Network Management Systems or OSS Embedded with the entire knowledge base of BWA network operations AlvariSTAR is a unique state of the art power multiplier in the hands of the service provider that enables the provisioning of satisfied customers AlvariSTAR dramatically extends the abilities of the service provider to provide a rich portfolio of services and to support rapid customer base expansion System Description Chapter 1 System Description 1 7 Specifications Le Radio Table 1 6 Radio Specifications tom serpin Frequency m 4 9 GHz Family 4 900 5 100 GHz E 5 2 GHz Family 5 150 5 350 GHz m 5 3 GHz Family 5 250 5 350 GHz Em 5 4 GHz Family 5 470 5 725 GHz m 5 8 GHz Family 5 725 5 850 GHz Operation Mode Time Division Duplex TDD H 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth m 10 MHz HW Revision C an
118. and has 8 slots that can accommodate BS AU Network Interface modules These slots can also accommodate various combinations of aft TH oe other modules including Network see eeu Interface BS AU modules for Access IT eee a Units operating in any of the bands S a Y S supported by BreezeACCESS equipment using GFSK modulation including BreezeACCESS II BreezeACCESS MMDS BreezeACCESS XL and BreezeACCESS V It can also accommodate a BS GU GPS and Alarms module to support GPS based synchronization of BreezeACCESS systems using Frequency Hopping radios Two different types of power supply modules are available for the BreezeACCESS VL modules The BS PS DC that is powered from a 48 VDC power source and the BS PS AC powered from the 110 220 VAC mains The optional use of two power supply modules ensures fail safe operation through power supply redundancy When the same chassis is used also for Access Unit modules belonging to other BreezeACCESS families using GFSK modulation then one BS PS power supply AC or DC should be used to provide power to the BreezeACCESS VL Access Units and a different power supply module suitable for GFSK equipment is required for powering the BreezeACCESS GFSK Access Units Each BS AU module together with its outdoor AU D E BS ODU radio unit and an antenna comprise an AU D E BS Access Unit that serves a single sector There are two types of Access Units differing in the maximum number of Subscriber Units that
119. and other high priority traffic a set of Wireless Link Prioritization parameters enables configuring parameters that affect the processes of gaining access to the wireless media and of transmitting high low priority packets The Wireless Link Prioritization feature is a licensed feature and is available only in units with the suitable Feature License The time interval between two consecutive transmissions of frames is called Inter Frame Spacing IFS This is the time during which the unit determines whether the medium is idle using the carrier sense mechanism The IFS depends on the type of the next frame to be transmitted as follows E GIG Short Inter Frame Spacing is used for certain frames that should be transmitted immediately such as ACK and CTS frames The value of SIFS is 16 microseconds E DIFS Distributed coordination function Inter Frame Spacing is typically used for other frame types when the medium is free If the unit decides that the medium is not free it will defer transmission by DIFS plus a number of time slots as determined by the Contention Window back off algorithm after reaching a decision that the medium has become free DIFS equal SIFS plus AIFS where AIFS is a configurable number of time slots Under regular conditions AIFS is configured to two time slots To support prioritization in the wireless link we can configure a higher AIFS for low priority traffic AIFS of two time slots will always be used for h
120. ange Kbps Default Kbps Range Kbps Default Kbps Type avs Jun o Jon fa sos Jas o eem o fozes o gt fems fa 4 2 6 6 2 5 Maximum Burst Duration SU and AU Sets the maximum time for accumulating burst transmission rights according to the Burst Duration algorithm Available values range from O to 2000 milliseconds The default value is 5 milliseconds enabling a maximum burst of 0 005 X CIR Kbps after a period of inactivity of 5 milliseconds or more 4 2 6 6 2 6 Maximum Delay SU only Sets the maximum permitted delay in the buffers system As certain applications are very sensitive to delay if relatively high delays are permitted these applications may suffer from poor performance due to data accumulation in the buffers from other applications such as FTP The Maximum Delay parameter limits the number of available buffers Data that is delayed more than the permitted maximum delay is discarded If the SU supports applications that are very sensitive to delay the value of the Maximum Delay should be decreased Valid values range from 300 to 10000 milliseconds The default value is 5000 milliseconds 4 2 6 6 2 7 Graceful Degradation Limit AU only Sets the limit on using the graceful degradation algorithm In cases of over demand the performance of all SUs is degraded proportionally to their CIR IR 100 k x CIR The graceful degradation algorithm is used as long as k lt K where K is the Graceful Deg
121. arch for the best AU or a preferred AU using the Best AU process without performing a full reset The Disassociate submenu includes two options E Disassociate All SUs E Disassociate SU By MAC Address to disassociate a selected SU Noise Immunity Control The Adaptive Noise Immunity ANI mechanism is designed to reduce the wireless physical layer errors and by that enhance the AU processing power of the unit delivering higher packet processing efficiency This ANI mechanism is triggered by the rate of detected Physical Errors and it is modifying different thresholds affecting the immunity to specific interference types BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters This feature active by default exists in all units with HW revision C and higher running SW version 3 0 and higher Starting in SW version 4 0 the processing power of the system has been increased dramatically When using version 4 0 the units are capable to process more packets per seconds including physical error packets As a result the ANI mechanism triggered by the number of received error packets may not function properly in certain scenarios resulting in link performances that are far below the expectations The option of manually controlling the various parameters used by the ANI mechanism enables to achieve optimal performance in certain deployments where the automatic ANI mechanism may not function properly It is strongly recommended to consult
122. are displayed In addition all the parameters displayed upon selecting Show DFS Settings and Data are also displayed Frequency Definition Submenu in SU User Defined Frequency Subsets The User Defined Frequency Subsets menu enables defining for each of the available Sub Bands the frequencies that will be used by the SU when scanning for an AU For each available Sub Band the available frequencies are displayed and an index is associated with each frequency Enter either the desired frequency indexes A All for using all frequencies in the subset or N None for not scanning that sub band The default is all frequencies in all available sub bands Show Frequency Definitions Upon selecting the Show Frequency Definitions the selected frequencies in the available Sub Bands and the current operating frequency are displayed Best AU Parameters SU An SU that can communicate with more than one AU using the same ESSID may become associated with the first AU it finds not necessarily the best choice in terms of quality of communication The same limitation also exists if only one AU Operation and Administration 129 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 2 6 1 z 130 in the neighborhood has an ESSID identical to the one used by the SU as it is not always necessarily the best choice The topology of a fixed access network is constantly changing Changes in base station deployment and subscriber den
123. are displayed and each of the frequencies in the list is associated with an index The frequencies subset can be defined by entering the indexes of the required frequencies or A to select all available frequencies The default is the complete list of frequencies available in the Sub Band 4 2 6 2 4 3 3 Channel Check Time The Channel Check Time defines the time allocated for checking whether there is a radar activity on a new frequency after power up or after attempting to move to a new frequency upon detecting radar activity on the previously used frequency During this time the AU does not transmit The range is 1 to 3600 seconds The default is 60 seconds BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 126 Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 2 4 3 4 Channel Avoidance Period The Channel Avoidance Period defines the time that the frequency will remain marked in the database as Radar Detected or Adjacent to Radar after detecting radar activity These frequencies will not be used when searching for a new frequency When this time has elapsed the unit frequency s marking will change to Radar Free The range is 1 to 60 minutes The default is 30 minutes 4 2 6 2 4 3 5SU Waiting Option The SU Waiting Option defines whether the disassociation message sent by the AU after detecting radar activity on the current frequency will include a message instructing the SU to search only for the AU before attempting to search for another AU The messag
124. are locked onto the SU I s base To dismount the SU I gently push the two bracket studs in the direction of the wall and lift the CPE diagonally Pull the CPE until free from the rail Installation Chapter 2 Installation i 7 Anchors z 7 Ge rm Figure 2 14 SU I Wall Mount 2 5 5 Installing the Detached Antenna The detached antenna kit includes the following components 52 ALA04 200160 panel antenna 2 meter SMA SMA M M RF cable Simple wall mounting kit enabling installation on a wall without any capability for adjusting the direction For installation instructions see Section 2 5 5 1 Wall mounting kit with rotation capability enabling installation on a wall with capability for adjusting the direction For installation instructions see Section_ BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Installing the SU I E Simple window mounting accessories enabling installation on a glass window without any capability for adjusting the direction For installation instructions see Section 2 5 5 3 E Window mounting kit with rotation capability enabling installation on a glass window with rotation capability for adjusting the direction For installation instructions see Section 2 5 5 4 Ensure that the antenna is mounted vertical to the floor with the connector facing downward and the front of the antenna facing to the exterior of the building preferably directed towards the Base Station
125. as changed and dropped below Off or increased above On a threshold defined by TrapToggle TrapRTx the WirelessTrapThreshold PowerUpFromReset 101 An AU BU trap indicating UnitMacAddress power up after reset MonitorStatusTRAP 102 Applicable to all units A trap indicating that a log in or log out has been performed via Telnet Includes the login access right and the IP address of the PC performing Telnet ParameterChangedTRAP 103 Applicable to all units A trap indicating a change in CIR MIR IP Filter or VLAN parameter LoadingStatusTRAP 104 Applicable to all units A trap indicating the results successful or failed of the last FTP TFTP loading process PromiscuousModeTRAP 105 An AU BU trap indicating that Beneran mode was enabled on or disabled off TrapLog TrapAccessRights TrapTelnetUserlpAddress TrapParameterChanged TrapFtpOrTftpStatus UnitMacAddress TrapToggle UnitMacAddress DFSRadarDetectedTRAP 106 An AU BU trap indicating that UnitMacAddress radar was detected DFSFrequencyTRAP 107 An AU BU trap indicating the new frequency after radar was detected TrapDFSMoveFreq HW Revision B and lower TrapDFSMoveFreqNew HW DFSNoFreeChannelsExistT RAP 108 An AU BU trap indicating that radar was detected and there is no free channel EthBroadcastMulticatLimiterT RAP Applicable for all units The 109 trap is send if the Ethernet broadcast fil
126. ated BreezeACCESS VL System Manual xi Legal Rights Outdoor Unit and Antenna Installation and Grounding Ensure that outdoor units antennas and supporting structures are properly installed to eliminate any physical hazard to either people or property Make sure that the installation of the outdoor unit antenna and cables is performed in accordance with all relevant national and local building and safety codes Even where grounding is not mandatory according to applicable regulation and national codes it is highly recommended to ensure that the outdoor unit and the antenna mast when using external antenna are grounded and suitable lightning protection devices are used so as to provide protection against voltage surges and static charges In any event Alvarion is not liable for any injury damage or regulation violations associated with or caused by installation grounding or lightning protection BreezeACCESS VL System Manual xii Important Notice Important Notice This user manual is delivered subject to the following conditions and restrictions E This manual contains proprietary information belonging to Alvarion Ltd Such information is supplied solely for the purpose of assisting properly authorized users of the respective Alvarion products E No part of its contents may be used for any other purpose disclosed to any person or firm or reproduced by any means electronic and mechanical without the express prior
127. ated in the Show Air Interface Parameters display Security Mode The Security Mode option enables selecting the algorithm to be used for encrypting the authentication messages and or data frames The available options are WEP AES OCB and FIPS 197 if available The default is WEP Default Key SU only The Default Key defines the Key to be used for encrypting decrypting the authentication messages Shared Key mode and or data frames Data Encryption enabled The AU learns the Default Key from the SU provided it is one of the Keys defined in the AU The AU may use different keys when authenticating and or communicating with different SUs Available values range from 1 to 4 The default is KEY 1 Default Multicast Key AU only The Multicast Default Key defines the Key to be used for encrypting decrypting multicasts and broadcasts when Data Encryption is enabled Available values range from 1 to 4 The default is KEY 1 Key 1 to Key 4 The Key options enables defining the encryption key to be used for initializing the pseudo random number generator that forms part of the encryption decryption process The Keys must be set before the Shared Key authentication algorithm or Data Encryption can be used To support proper operation both the Key and the content must be identical at both sides of a wireless link Each Key is a string of 32 hexadecimal numbers For security reasons it is a write only parameter d
128. ateways and limiting the maximum number of voice calls made by Voice Gateways in a cell The default option is Enable UDP Port The UDP Port parameter defines the UDP port used by the DRAP protocol The range is from 8000 to 8200 The default value is 8171 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 6 4 3 Maximum Number of Voice Calls The Maximum Number of Voice Calls parameter sets the maximum number of active calls in the cell The range is between 0 and 255 The default value is 40 4 2 6 6 4 4 DRAP TTL The DRAP TTL parameter sets the time between two consecutive Allocation Requests from the Gateways The Allocation requests are used to identify the existence of an active Gateway In Voice Gateways they also include information about the current number of voice calls and requests for new calls The range is between 1 and 255 seconds The default value is 10 seconds 4 2 6 6 4 5 Number of Active Voice Calls This option shows the current number of active voice calls in the cell 4 2 6 6 5 Show Service Parameters Displays the current values of the Service Parameters 4 2 6 7 Security Parameters BreezeACCESS VL systems can support encryption of authentication messages and or data frames using one of the following encryption standards E WEP Wireless Equivalent Privacy algorithm WEP is defined in the IEEE 802 11 Wireless LAN standard and is based on the RSA s RC4 encryption algorithm E AES
129. ation Ed Reset the ODU using the RESET button on the IDU after connecting or reconnecting the indoor and outdoor units with the indoor to outdoor cable Installation Chapter 2 Installation 2 5 Installing the SU I The following sections describe how to install the SU I CPE 2 5 1 Installation Requirements 2 5 1 1 Packing List SU I CPE Power Adapter 3 meters Ethernet Cable Wall window mountable detached antenna kit including wall window mounting accessories and a 2 meters SMA SMA M M RF cable only with SU I D 2 5 1 2 Additional Optional Items Wall Mounting Bracket kit for the SU I CPE Mains plug adapter or termination plug if the power plug on the power adapter not fit local power outlets The Power Adapter is supplied with a North American power plug and an EU power connector adapter Portable PC with an Ethernet card and a straight Ethernet cable for configuring parameters using either Telnet or BreezeCONFIG for BreezeACCESS VL application TFTP server SW is required for downloading SW versions Other installation tools and materials means for securing cables to walls etc x Items marked with an asterisk are available from Alvarion 48 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Installing the SU I 2 5 2 SU I Connectors and LEDs Figure 2 13 SU I Panel Table 2 3 SU I Panel Components Name Description Status Self test and power indication Ethernet Ether
130. available via the Ethernet port To set factory defaults 1 Connect the PC with the Set Factory Defaults utility to the Ethernet port of the unit Set Factory Defaults 5 x About Unit MAC address po AJ fer ea fo er 2 Enter the unit s MAC address 3 Click on the Set button This utility performs the same operation as Set Complete Factory Defaults restoring the default factory configuration of all parameters except to Passwords general FTP parameters and AU s Frequency BreezeACCESS VL System Manual endix D Preparing the Indoor to or SU Cable Appendix D Preparing the Indoor to Outdoor SU Cable The Indoor to Outdoor cable provides pin to pin connection on both ends Figure 4 2 shows the wire pair connections required for the Indoor to Outdoor cable 1234567 8 Saamen W ITE Figure 4 2 Ethernet Connector Pin Assignments The color codes used in cables that are supplied with crimped connectors are as listed in the following table Cable Color Codes Blue white Orange Orange white Brown Brown white Green Green white BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 206 Preparing the Indoor to Outdoor SU Cable Use a crimp tool for RJ 45 connectors to prepare the wires insert them into the appropriate pins and use the crimp tool to crimp the connector Make sure to do the following 1 Remove as small a length as possible of the
131. aximum Number of Associations parameter is 512 E Show MIR CIR Database Displays information on the MIR CIR support for associated Subscriber Units Each entry includes the following information The MAC address of the associated Subscriber Unit The values of the MIR and CIR parameters configured in the applicable SU for the downlink AU to SU and for the uplink SU to AU The value configured in the applicable SU for the Maximum Delay parameter The maximum data rate of the Subscriber Unit E Display MAC Pinpoint Table The MAC Pinpoint table provides for each of the Ethernet stations identified by the MAC Address connected to either the AU or to any of the SUs served by it the identity MAC Address of the wireless device to which they are connected E Gateways Table When the DRAP option is supported the Gateways Table provides details on the active Gateways connected to any of the SUs served by the AU For each Gateway the displayed information includes Gateway Type VG 1D1V VG 1D2V NG 4D1W IP Address Number of Voice Calls applicable only to Voice Gateways Operation and Administration 115 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 5 4 2 MAC Address Database in SU 4 2 5 5 116 The MAC Address Database option in the SU displays information regarding the Subscriber Units bridging forwarding information The following option is available E Display Bridging Info The Display
132. ay the current values of the Per Modulation Level Counters BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 5 6 4 2 5 6 1 E Reset Counters Select this option to reset the Per Modulation Level Counters The statistics show the number of frames accumulated in different categories since the last reset For SUs the Per Modulation Level Counters display the following information for each modulation level supported by the unit E SUCCESS The total number of successfully transmitted unicasts at the applicable modulation level E FAILED The total number of failures to successfully transmit unicast frame during a HW Retry cycle at the applicable modulation level In addition the Average Modulation Level AML is also displayed This is the average modulation level rounded to the nearest integer since the last time the Per Modulation Level counters were reset The average is calculated using the SUCCESS count at each modulation level as weights For AUs the SUCCESS and FAILED counts are provided for each of the associated SUs which are identified by their MAC address Link Capability The Link Capability option provides information on HW and SW capabilities of relevant units In an AU the information provided in the Link Capability reports is for all associated SUs In an SU the Link Capability reports include information on all AUs in the neighboring AUs table all AUs with whom the SU can communicate The Li
133. bands to secure the unit to a pole The bands must be 9 16 inches wide and at least 12 inches long The metal bands are not included with the installation package Be sure to mount the unit with the bottom panel which includes the LED indicators facing downward BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Installing the Outdoor Unit Grooves for Insertion of 9 16 Metal Band Threaded holes Figure 2 1 Threaded Holes Grooves Figure 2 2 illustrates the method of mounting an outdoor unit on a pole using the clamps and threaded rods LY Z N cke d d O A Q TW Wf I Figure 2 2 3 Pole Installation Using Special Clamps Ed There is a groove on one end of the threaded rod Be sure to insert the threaded rods with the grooves pointing outward as these grooves enable you to use a screwdriver to fasten the rods to the unit Installation 37 Chapter 2 Installation 2 3 2 Pole Mounting the New SU A ODU The new SU A ODU can be mounted on a 1 to 4 pole using one of the following options E A pole mounting kit is supplied with each unit The kit includes a special clamp and a pair of threaded rods flat washers spring washers and nuts There are two pairs of threaded holes on the back of the unit enabling to use the mounting kit for installing the unit using either vertical or horizontal polarization The clamp enables installing the unit on diverse pole diameters from 1 to 4 E A Tilt Pole
134. ber 2006 Parameters Summary Appendix F MIR CIR parameters of SU I Updated SW Version 4 0 27 Table 4 12 Table 4 13 February 2007 MIB Appendix E Parameters Summary Appendix F AUS supports also GU Updated functionality SW Version 4 0 27 Section 1 2 February 2007 Password Recovery New feature a procedure SW Version 4 0 27 Section 4 1 1 for password recovery if February 2007 password was lost forgotten BreezeACCESS VL System Manual vi Document History Topic Description Version Date Issued AP Client IP Address New feature SW Version 4 0 27 Sections 4 2 6 3 8 February 2007 Table 4 3 MIB Appendix E Parameters Summary Appendix F Noise Immunity Control New feature SW Version 4 0 27 Sections 4 2 6 2 18 February 2007 Table 4 3 Parameters Summary Appendix F BreezeACCESS VL System Manual vii Legal Rights Legal Rights Copyright 2007 Alvarion Ltd All rights reserved The material contained herein is proprietary privileged and confidential and owned by Alvarion or its third party licensors No disclosure thereof shall be made to third parties without the express written permission of Alvarion Ltd Alvarion Ltd reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by refer
135. c regarding these products on the manufacturer s web site it is highly recommended to contact the manufacturer s sales representative directly Installation Chapter 2 Installation 2 2 A Equipment Positioning Guidelines This section provides key guidelines for selecting the optimal installation locations for the various BreezeACCESS VL system components ONLY experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and wherever applicable are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities should install outdoor units and antennas Failure to do so may void the BreezeACCESS VL product warranty and may expose the end user or Service Provider to legal and financial liabilities Alvarion and its resellers or distributors are not liable for injury damage or regulation violations associated with the installation of Outdoor Units or antennas Select the optimal locations for the equipment using the following guidelines E The outdoor unit can be either pole or wall mounted Its location should enable easy access to the unit for installation and testing E The higher the placement of the antenna the better the achievable link quality E AU ODU units should be installed as close as possible to the antenna E The antenna connected to the AU ODU unit should be installed so as to provide coverage to all Subscriber Units SUs within its service area The recomme
136. cable 5 Connect the Ethernet cable to the outdoor unit RJ 45 connector 6 Replace the waterproof seal and then the top nut Make sure that the external jack of the cable is well inside the waterproof seal to guarantee a good seal 7 Route the cable to the location selected for the indoor equipment 8 Assemble an RJ 45 connector with a protective cover on the indoor end of the indoor to outdoor cable 2 3 4 2 Units with a Waterproof Seal Supplied with the Ethernet Cable not applicable to new SU A ODU gt To connect the indoor to outdoor cable 1 Verify that the o ring supplied with the cable kit is in place 2 Connect the RJ 45 connector of the Ethernet cable to the outdoor unit 3 Attach the waterproof seal to the unit Tighten the top nut 4 Route the cable to the location selected for the indoor equipment 5 Assemble an RJ 45 connector with a protective cover on the indoor end of the indoor to outdoor cable See Appendix D for instructions on preparing the cable 2 3 4 3 New SU A ODU 1 The sealing cap has a special groove allowing to insert an ethernet cable with an already assembled RJ 45 connector through the cap To expose the groove lightly squeeze the cap Carefully insert the cable with the assembled connector through the groove a BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Installing the Outdoor Unit Groove Figure 2 10 Inserting the IDU COM Cable into the Sealing Cap 2 Connect the Ethernet cable to the IDU COM
137. ceeded the processing capability or the capacity of the Ethernet port RxDecryptEvents Applicable to all units Read only The Counter 32 RxEvents 4 number of frames that were not received properly due to a problem in the data decryption mechanism TotalRxEvents Counter 32 RxEvents 5 total number of Rx events PerModulationLevelCounters TrafficStatistics 5 ResetPerModulationLevelCounters Applicable to all units Resets the Per Integer PerModulationLevelCounters 1 resetCounters 1 cancel 2 SUPerModulationLevelCounters Table Applicable to SU RB Not accessible PerModulationLevelCounters 2 The Per Modulation Level Counters Table SUPerModulationLevelCountersEntry Applicable to SU RB Not accessible An PerModulationLevelCountersTable 1 entry in the Per Modulation Level Counters Table SUPerModulationLevelCounters Tableldx Applicable to SU RB Read only The PerModulationLevelCountersEntry 1 index of an entry in the Per Modulation Level Counters Table SUPerModulationLevelCountersApplicable Applicable to SU RB Read only The Integer ModulationLeve modulation level applicable for the entry Range 1 to 8 PerModulationLevelCountersEntry 2 in the Per Modulation Level Counters Table Level 8 is not applicable to devices with HW revision A Counter 32 SUPerModulationLevelCounters TxSuccess Applicable to SU RB Read only The PerModulationLevelCountersEntry 3 total number of success
138. cel 2 TrafficStatistics 2 counters TotalRxFramesViaEthernet Applicable to all units Read only Total Counter 32 EthCounters 1 number of frames received via the Ethernet port TxWirelessToEthernet Applicable to all units Read only Total Counter 32 EthCounters 2 number of frames transmitted to the Ethernet port TrafficStatistics 3 counters WirelessLinkCounters 1 AUBeaconsToWireless Applicable to AU BU Read only The Counter 32 TxFramesToWireless 1 number of Beacon frames transmitted to the wireless medium DataAndOtherMngFramesToWireless Applicable to AU BU Read only The Counter 32 TxFramesToWireless 3 number of data and other management frames excluding beacons transmitted to the wireless medium The count includes multicasts broadcasts and one count for each unicast frame transmitted successfully excluding retransmissions BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 251 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB TotallxFramesToWireless Applicable to all units Read only The Counter 32 TxFramesToWireless 4 number of frames transmitted to the wireless medium The count includes one count for each data frame transmitted successfully excluding retransmissions and the number of transmitted control and wireless management frames TotalTransmitted Unicasts Applicable to AU Not applicable to TxFramesToWireless 5 BreezeNET B products Read only The total number of unicast frames successfully transm
139. cells where the DFS Option is enabled Scanning Mode is forced to Passive Applicable to all units Read write in units where AntennaGainChange is supported Read only in units where AntennaGainChange is not supported The net gain including cable attenuation for detached antennas of the antenna Applicable to all units The period in seconds of staying on each channel for information gathering during each cycle when performing Spectrum analysis Integer automatic 1 manual 2 na 255 Integer Range 0 to 100 Percent A value of 0 means the minimal slot size 9 microseconds Na 255 Integer Range 0 to 54 Kilometers 1 means below 2 km MAC Address Integer disable 1 enable 2 Integer passive 1 active 2 Integer 0 50 dB 1 not configurable means Not Set Yet 2 not configurable means Don t Care Spectrum Analysis Parameters B Integer Range 2 30 seconds SpectrumAnalysisChannelScanCycles SpectrumAnalysisParameters 2 AutomaticChannelSelection SpectrumAnalysisParameters 3 SpectrumAnalysisActivation SpectrumAnalysisParameters 4 SpectrumAnalysisStatus SpectrumAnalysisParameters 5 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Applicable to all units The number of scanning cycles when performing Spectrum Analysis Applicable to AU BU Defines weather the AU BU shall choose the most noise free channel upon startup after spec
140. cluded is in the specified ranges will receive High priority The available options are RTP amp RTCP RTP Only The default is RTP amp RTCP E Add UDP Port Ranges This option enables adding UDP port ranges to the list of priority port numbers The list can include up to 64 ranges It is possible to add discrete port numbers and or ranges In ranges a hyphen is used to separate between start and end port numbers A comma is used to separate between entries For example 8900 9000 9005 9010 9016 9017 E Delete UDP Port Ranges This option enables deleting UDP port ranges from the list of priority port numbers It is possible to delete discrete port numbers and or ranges In ranges a hyphen is used to separate between start and end port numbers A comma is used to separate between entries For example 8900 9000 9005 9010 9016 9017 E Delete All UDP Port Ranges This option enables deleting all UDP port ranges from the list of priority port numbers E Show UDP Port Ranges Select this option to view the current UDP RTP RTCP Prioritization option and the list of UDP Port Ranges 4 2 6 6 3 3 3TCP Port Ranges The TCP Port Ranges menu enables defining port ranges to be used as priority classifiers when the UDP TCP Port Ranges Prioritization Option is set to either Enable Only for TCP or Enable for both UDP and TCP All packets whose Operation and Administration 185 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration destinat
141. code and the country code received from the AU are the same If they are not the same and the Country Code Learning by SU is enabled the SU will use the AU s country code the country code derived limitations will be forced and the following parameters will be set according to new country definitions E Maximum TX Power will be set to the maximum defined by the country code E TX Power will be set to the maximum defined by the country code BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters E 4 2 6 2 4 6 4 2 6 2 5 4 2 6 2 5 1 4 2 6 2 5 2 4 2 6 2 6 E The Modulation Level will be set to the maximum modulation level defined by the country code BW The Multicast Modulation Level will be set to the minimum modulation level defined by the country code E The Burst Mode will be set to enable if the country code supports burst mode and the burst duration will be set to default After country code learning adaptation the unit is automatically reset Before this automatic reset if the unit is running from the shadow version the versions must be swapped and the running version must be set as main This is done to avoid returning to the previous version which occurs automatically after the reset The default is Enable The Country Code Learning by SU feature does not function with the default ESSID ESSID1 Show Frequency definitions Upon selecting Show Frequency Definitions the selected Sub Band and Frequency
142. ct to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement The Subscriber Unit equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules and to ETSI EN 301 489 1 rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential environment notwithstanding use in commercial business and industrial environments This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications The Base Station equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules and to EN 301 489 1 rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in commercial business BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Legal Rights and industrial environments This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equi
143. d Applicable to all units If the oa VLTrafficPriVLAN 1 VLAN Priority s value of the 0 7 frame is less than or equal to this threshold the frame will get Low priority otherwise the frame will get High priority Untagged frames will get Low priority TrafficPrilPToS ToS Prioritization TrafficPrioritization 2 parameters Applicable to all units ToSPrioritizationOption Applicable to all units Integer TrafficPrilPToS 1 Disable Enable IP ToS disable 1 prioritization and chooses EE the interpretation of the IP dSCP 3 TOS field from IP header ipPrecedence 2 The IP TOS field is defined by RFC791 In this case the prioritization will be done using the Precedence sub field of IP ToS This sub field has 3 bits so it can be between 0 and 7 dSCP 3 The IP ToS field is defined by RFC2474 In this case the prioritization will be done using the DSCP sub field The size of the sub field is 6 bits so the range is 0 to 63 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 240 breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Value Range PPrecedenceThreshold TrafficPrilPToS 2 IPDSCPThreshold TrafficPrilPToS 3 TrafficPriUdpTcpPortRange TrafficPrioritization 3 UdpTcpPortRangePrioritizationOption TrafficPriUdpTcpPortRange 1 UdpPortRangeConfig TrafficPriUdpTcpPortRange 2 UdpPortPriRTPRTCP UdpPortRangeConfig 1 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Applicable to all units The thresh
144. d at the lowest modulation level according to the Sub Band The minimum value for the Multicast Modulation Level is defined by the Sub Band in use The maximum value for the Multicast Modulation Level is defined by the Sub Band in use and the HW revision of the unit Units with HW revision A support a maximum value of 7 while units with HW revision B and higher support a maximum value of 8 For information on how to view the Sub Bands supported by the unit and the supported parameters values and options refer to section 4 2 2 4 The default value is the lowest supported modulation level Maximum Modulation Level When the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm see section 4 2 6 5 9 is enabled it changes the modulation level dynamically according to link conditions The purpose is to increase the probability of using the maximum possible modulation level at any given moment Although the algorithm will avoid using modulation levels that are too high for the prevailing link conditions it might be better under certain conditions to limit the use of higher modulation levels If the link quality is not sufficient it is recommended that the maximum modulation level be decreased as higher modulation levels increase the error rate In such conditions a higher Maximum Modulation Level increases the number or retransmissions before the modulation level is being reduced by the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm A high number of retransmissions reduces
145. d higher Central Frequency Resolution 10 MHz for HW Revision A and B 5 MHz for HW Revision C and higher Antenna Port AU D BS SA ODU SU E ODU N Type jack 50 ohm SU I SMA jack 50 ohm Max Input Power HW Revision A 48 dBm typical ataniennapart HW Revision B and higher 30 dBm typical E Maximum Output Power 21 dBm SU A ODU Integral Antenna 21 dBi typical in the 5 150 5 875 GHz band 20 dBi in the 4 9 5 1 GHz band 10 5 horizontal x 10 5 vertical vertical polarization compliant with EN 302 085 V1 1 1 Range 1 Class TS 1 2 3 4 5 New SU A ODU Integral 20 1 dBi typical in the 5 250 5 875 GHz band 14 horizontal x Antenna 5 4 5 8 GHz 14 vertical vertical horizontal polarization compliant with EN 302 085 V1 2 2 2003 08 Range 1 ROHS SU I D Detached Antenna 15 dBi typical net excluding cable loss in the 5 150 5 875 GHz band 45 55 horizontal x 10 12 vertical vertical polarization ROHS compliant BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Specifications Table 1 6 Radio Specifications tem serpin AU D Detached Antennas AU Ant 5G 16 60 16 dBi typical 5 150 5 875 GHz 60 horizontal x 10 vertical sector antenna vertical polarization compliant with EN 302 085 V1 1 2 CS3 AU Ant 5G 17 90 17 dBi typical 5 150 5 875 GHz 90 horizontal x 6 vertical sector antenna vertical polarization compliant with EN 302 085 V1 1 2 CS3 AU Ant 5G 15 120 15 dBi typical 5 150 5 875 GHz 120 h
146. d several ranges using a comma to separate between ranges Example 10 26 99 987 900 UdpPortRangeDelete Applicable to all units DisplayString UdpPortRangeConfig 5 Delete port range s from A range is defined by UDP Port Ranges Table lt start gt lt end gt or lt start gt Get operation will return an where lt start gt is the Start empty string Port of the range and lt end gt is the End Port If only lt start gt is specified the range is lt start gt lt start gt The value of lt start gt and lt end gt are between 0 and 65535 The user can delete several ranges using a comma to separate between ranges Example 10 26 99 987 900 UdpPortRangeDeleteAll Applicable to all units Integer UdpPortRangeConfig 6 Delete all entries form UDP deleteAll 1 Port Ranges Table Get cancelOperation 2 operation will return 1 TcpPortRangeConfig UDP Port Range TrafficPriUdpTcpPortRange 3 parameters Applicable to all units BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 242 breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Value Range TcpPortPriRTPRTCP Applicable to all units Integer TcpPortRangeConfig 1 RTP RTGCP ports rtpANDrtcp 1 prioritization option for TCP rtpOnly 2 packets rtpANDrtcp 1 the possible RTP and RTCP packet with destination port in the defined port ranges will get High priority rtpOnly 2 only possible RTP packet packet with even destination port with destination port in the defined port ranges will
147. d to the nearest multiple of 128 N 128 BreezeNET B products will return 65535 for na Integer Integer Range for Set SU 3 with SW version below 4 0 0 2 048 Kbps SU 3 with SW version 4 0 or higher 0 3 072 Kbps SU 6 with SW version below 4 0 0 3 968 Kbps SU 6 with SW version 4 0 or higher 0 6 016 Kbps SU 54 0 45 056 Kbps SU I 0 2 048 Kbps The actual value Get will be the entered value rounded to the nearest multiple of 128 N 128 BreezeNET B products will return 65535 for na Integer Range 300 10000 milliseconds BreezeNET B products will return 65535 for na Integer Range 0 2000 milliseconds BreezeNET B products will return 65535 for na Integer Range 0 70 na 255 239 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB MIB Parameter Value Range MirOnlyOption Applicable only to AU Not Integer ServiceParameters 9 applicable to BreezeNET B disable 1 products When enabled it enable 2 overrides the CIR MIR na 255 algorithm for determining actual information rate and forces the algorithm to operate with MIR parameters settings only When enabled the Graceful Degradation algorithm is disabled TrafficPrioritization Traffic Prioritization ServiceParameters 10 parameters Applicable to all units VLTrafficPriVLAN VLAN Prioritization TrafficPrioritization 1 parameters Applicable to all units LANPriorityThreshol
148. d upload operation Applicable to all units The name of the event log file to be uploaded Applicable to all units The destination directory for the event logd file in the FTP server Applicable to all units Execution of the event log upload operation Applicable to all units The status of an FTP or TFTP loading process not allowed DisplayString SIZE 80 Up to 80 printable ASCII characters Use To clear field Integer downloadFile 1 cancel 2 DisplayString SIZE 80 Up to 20 printable ASCII characters An empty string is not allowed DisplayString SIZE 80 Up to 20 printable ASCII characters An empty string is not allowed DisplayString SIZE 80 Up to 80 printable ASCII characters Use To clear field Integer executeFTPGetConfiguration File 1 executeFTPPutConfiguration File 2 executeF TPGetOperator Defaults 3 executeF TPPutOperator Defaults 4 cancel 5 DisplayString SIZE 80 Up to 20 printable ASCII characters DisplayString SIZE 80 Up to 80 printable ASCII characters Use To clear field Integer uploadFile 1 cancel 2 Integer inProcess 1 successful 2 failed 3 217 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB EventLogPolicy EventLogFileParams 1 Applicable to all units The lowest severity of events to be logged Integer message 1 warning 2 error 3 Integer feces Applicable to all units Erase
149. ddress is not found in the list the SU will be associated and will be able to generate traffic Possible options for this parameter are Deny and Allow The default is Deny Show MAC Address List Select Show MAC Address List to display the current list of MAC Addresses included in the List and the selected List Action Roaming Option SU only The Roaming Option defines the roaming support of the unit When roaming is not expected it is preferable to set this parameter to Disable This will cause the unit to start scanning for another AU after losing connectivity with the current AU only after 7 seconds during which no beacons were received from the current AU This will prevent scanning for another AU in cases where no beacons were received due to a short temporary problem When set to Enable the SU will wait only one second before it starts scanning for another AU In addition when the Roaming Option is enabled the SU will send Roaming SNAP messages upon associating with a new AU This enables fast distribution of the new location for all clients that are behind the SU In this case the SU will send multicast SNAP messages via the wireless link each time it associates with a new AU except for the first association after reset The SU will send one SNAP message for each client learned on its Ethernet port based on its bridging table In the SNAP message the clients MAC address is used as the source address The AU that receives this
150. disable 1 disables the VLAN Relaying feature enable 2 Applicable to Trunk and Service Provider na 255 links only VlanRelayingTable Applicable to AU only Not applicable to VLANRelaying 2 BreezeNET B products A table of up to 20 VLAN IDs of devices to which data frames are relayed when the VLAN Relaying feature is Enabled Applicable to Trunk and Service Provider links only Not accessible VlanRelayingEntry Applicable to AU only Not applicable to VlanRelayingTable 1 BreezeNET B products A VLAN Relaying Table entry Applicable to Trunk and Service Provider links only Not accessible VlanRelayingTableldx Applicable to AU only Not applicable to Integer VlanRelayingEntry 1 BreezeNET B products A read only table 1 20 index for a VLAN entry in the VLAN Relaying Table Integer 1 4094 0 remove entry VlanldRelaying Applicable to AU only Not applicable to VilanRelayingEntry 2 BreezeNET B products The list of VLAN ID s in the VLAN ID Relaying Table To remove a VLAN ID SET the corresponding entry to 0 To add a new VLAN ID SET an entry which is now 0 deser femoris CHL ANGupport 6 VianDataPriority Applicable to SU RB only Integer VLANTrafficPriority 1 Priority tagging for data frames 0 7 Applicable to Access Link only 255 na VianManagementPriority Applicable to all units Priority tagging for Integer VLANTrafficPriority 3 management frames Applicable to 0 7 Access Link and T
151. dure can also be used for uploading a feature license file or an updated country code file to multiple units When multiple configurations are being done simultaneously that is the file is being uploaded to several units it is recommended that the file will include only the required parameters In the configuration file the following three fields represent each parameter 1 A symbolic string similar to the name of the parameter in the Monitor program followed by 2 The value of the parameters which uses the same values as the Monitor program 3 An optional comment If used the comment should start with a character An unknown parameter will be ignored A known parameter with a value that is invalid or out of range will be set by the unit to its default value Use the SNMP write community string the default is private to define both the uploaded file put and the downloaded file get The file should be transferred in ASCII mode Use the extension cfg for a configuration file Use the extension cmr for the Operator Defaults file Use the extension fln for a Feature License file Use the extension ccf for a Country Code file Feature license and country code files include multiple strings where each string is applicable only for a certain unit identified by its MAC address When uploading a feature license or a country code file to multiple units each unit will accept only the parts that are applicable for
152. e 4 2 6 4 1 3 3 Hybrid Link Hybrid Link transfers both tagged and untagged frames as the devices connected to the unit can be either VLAN aware or VLAN unaware This is equivalent to defining no VLAN support as the unit is transparent to VLAN Table 4 8 summarizes the functionality of the data port for a Hybrid link Table 4 8 VLAN Data Port Functionality Hybrid Link Accept from Ethernet Accept from Wireless Tag Remove BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 156 Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 4 1 3 4Service Provider Link A Service Provider Link transfers both single tagged frames Service Provider tag and double tagged frames Service Provider tag Customer tag The Service Provider tag includes the Service Provider VLAN ID and the VLAN QinQ Ethertype Source address Destination Lenath Frame Check address Ether lype Sequence DA sa Len Etype Data FCS Original Ethernet frame l i l 802 1Q frame from DA sa Etype Tag Len Etype Data FCS sister network Data FCS Double tagged frame oe sa Etype Tag Etype Tag Len Etype 116115 The following tables summarize the functionality of the SU AU data port for a Service Provider Link Table 4 9 VLAN Data Port Functionality for SU Service Provider Link Accept from Ethernet Untagged frames Single tagged frames m f Forwarding is disabled m f Forwarding is enabled only frames with VLAN ID value
153. e Double or more data frames Concatenated Frame More The Concatenation Parameters submenu includes Concatenation Option The Concatenation Option enables or disables the concatenation mechanism The default is Enable BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 5 10 2 Maximum Concatenated Frame Size 4 2 6 6 4 2 6 6 1 The Maximum Concatenated Frame Size parameter defines the maximum size in bytes for a concatenated frame The range is HM 1256 to 2200 bytes for units with HW revision A or B HM 256 to 4032 bytes for units with HW revision C or higher The Default values are HM 2200 for units with HW revision A or B M 4032 for units with HW revision C or higher Service Parameters The Service Parameters menu enables defining user filtering MIR CIR parameters traffic prioritization parameters and DRAP parameters The Service Parameters menu includes the following options E User Filtering Parameters SU only E MIR and CIR Parameters E Traffic Prioritization E DRAP Parameters AU only E Wireless Link Prioritization only AU with a license for the feature User Filtering Parameters SU only The User Filtering Parameters submenu enables defining the IP addresses of user devices authorized to access the wireless medium for security and or control purposes In addition it can be used to enable the transmission and reception of specific protocol frames These filtering options do not af
154. e parameter is set to Service Provider Link It enables defining the Service Provider VLAN ID for data frames which identifies the Service Provider VLAN to which the unit belongs The range is 1 to 4094 The default value is 1 The Service provider VLAN ID affects frames received from the wireless link port as follows E Both single tagged frames having Service Provider VLAN ID tag and double tagged frames having Service Provider VLAN ID and customer VLAN ID tags with matching VLAN ID are forwarded to the Ethernet Port provided the Ethertype of the tag matches the configured VLAN QinQ Ethertype BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 160 Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 4 1 7 E Before transmitting the frames to the Ethernet port the Service Provider VLAN ID tag is removed The Service Provider VLAN ID affects frames received from the Ethernet link port as follows A Service Provider tag that includes the configured Service Provider VLAN ID and the VLAN QinQ Ethertype is inserted in all frames both tagged and untagged before transmission to the wireless link VLAN Traffic Priority The VLAN Traffic Priority menu enables configuring the VLAN Priority field in applicable frames These parameters only impact the way in which other VLAN aware devices in the network will handle the packet All parameters that affect prioritization within the BreezeACCES VL system including VLAN based prioritization are located in the Traffic Pri
155. e Modulation Algorithm is disabled a frame will be dropped when the number of unsuccessful retransmissions reaches this value For details on the effect of this parameter when the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm is enabled refer to section 4 2 6 5 9 The Number of HW Retries parameter is not applicable when the Wireless Link Prioritization Option is enabled The available values range is from 1 to 14 The default value is 10 Burst Mode Burst mode provides an increased throughput by reducing the overhead associated with transmissions in the wireless medium In a burst transmission the inter frame spacing is reduced and unicast data frames are transmitted without any contention period burst mode is not activated on broadcasts multicasts The Burst Mode is available only if Burst Mode is supported by the Sub Band in use For information on how to view the Sub Bands supported by the unit and the supported parameters values and options refer to section 4 2 2 4 In AUs with HW Revision B or lower Burst Mode cannot be activated when the DFS option is used In AUs with HW Revision B or lower the Burst Mode option will be blocked upon trying to enable Burst Mode when the DFS Option is enabled This limitation does not apply to AUs with HW Revision C In SUs and AUs with HW Revision B or lower Burst Mode cannot be activated when using WEP for data encryption In units with HW Revision B or lower the Burst Mode option will be bl
156. e connection PING the unit s IP address and verify that PING replies are being received 6 Use the TFTP utility with the following syntax to perform the upgrade tftp i hostaddress put sourcefile destinationfile where iis for binary mode and hostaddress is the IP address of the unit to be upgraded put causes the PC client to send a file to the hostaddress BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Software Version Loading Using TFTP 7 The original sourcefile name of SW files is in the structure uX_Y_Z bz where u is the unit type a for AU s for SU and X Y Z is the version number 8 destinationfile is the name of the file to be loaded Use the SNMP write community lt SnmpWriteCommunity gt bz to define the destination filename The default SNMP write community is private For example to load the upgrade file a4_0_13 bz to an AU whose IP address is 206 25 63 65 tftp i 206 25 63 65 put a4_O_13 bz private bz 9 When the loading is complete the following message is displayed indicating completion of the TFTP process Download operation has been completed successfully 10 The unit decompresses the loaded file and checks the integrity of the new version The new version replaces the previous shadow version only after verification If verification tests fail the loaded version will be rejected Among other things that are tested the unit will reject a file if either the file name or the version number matches the current Main versions
157. e includes also the time period during which the SU should not search for any other AU The waiting time is the Channel Check Time plus 5 seconds The default is Enable 4 2 6 2 4 3 6 Minimum Pulses to Detect The Minimum Pulses to Detect parameter defines the minimum number of radar pulses that should be detected before reaching a decision that radar is active on the channel The range is from 1 to 100 pulses The default is 6 pulses 4 2 6 2 4 3 7 Clear Radar Detected Channels After Reset 4 2 6 2 4 4 When the Clear Radar Detected Channels After Reset is enabled after the next reset all viable frequencies will be marked in the database as Radar Free including frequencies previously marked as either Radar Detected or Adjacent to Radar In addition the AU will start operation using its default frequency The default is Disable Channel Reuse Parameters DFS The Channel Reuse algorithm enables returning to the original channel under certain conditions that indicate low radar activity on the original channel The conditions are that radar was detected in this channel not more than N times Maximum Number of Detections in Assessment Period during the last T hours Radar Activity Assessment Period When the Channel Reuse Option is enabled then by the end of the Channel Avoidance Period the unit will attempt returning to the original frequency provided these conditions are met Operation and Administration 127 Chapter
158. e performing an upgrade procedure be sure you have the correct files and most recent instructions Upgrade packages can be obtained from the Technical Support section of Alvarion s web site http www alvarion com Shutting down power to the unit before completion of the loading procedure may cause the unit to be inoperable To load software versions 1 Verify that IP connectivity to the required unit is established 2 Ensure that the IP address of the PC from which the upgrade is to be performed belongs to the same subnet as the unit to be upgraded unless the unit is behind a router If the unit is behind a router verify that the unit is configured with the correct Default Gateway Address 3 To view the current IP parameters of the unit use the Monitor program by connecting the PC to the unit either directly or via Telnet To access the IP parameters via the Monitor program a From the Main Menu select 1 Info Screens b From the Info Screen menu select 2 Show Basic Configuration The current basic configuration is displayed including the run time values for the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway Address parameters 4 To modify any of the IP parameters a From the Main Menu select 3 Basic Configuration b To configure the IP address select 1 IP Address c To configure the subnet mask select 2 Subnet Mask d To configure the default gateway address select 3 Default Gateway Address 5 To verify th
159. e scanning process If the preferred AU is not found the SU will associate with an AU according to the decision reached using the best AU algorithm Valid values A MAC address string The default value for the Preferred AU MAC Address is 00 00 00 00 00 00 12 zeros meaning that there is no preferred AU 4 2 6 2 6 4 Show Best AU Parameters and Data The Show Best AU Parameters and Data option displays the applicable information The Neighboring AU Data table displays the following details for each AU with which the unit can communicate E MAC Address E SNR of the received signal E Mark The computed quality mark for the AU E Full The association load status of the AU It is defined as full if the number of SUs associated with the AU has reached the maximum allowed according to the value of the Maximum Number of Associations parameter An AU whose associations load status is full cannot be selected as the Best AU even if its computed mark is the highest Operation and Administration 131 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 2 7 4 2 6 2 8 132 E ESSID The ESSID of the AU In addition to the neighboring AU data table the following information is displayed E Best AU Support E Preferred AU MAC Address E Number of Scanning Attempts E Associated AU MAC Address the MAC address of the selected AU Scanning Mode SU only The Scanning Mode parameter defines whether the SU will use Passive or
160. e status of the Ethernet port link If the selected option is Ethernet Status Control then BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters E Ifthe Ethernet link is down the AU transmitter will be switched to Off E Ifthe Ethernet link is up the AU transmitter will be switched to On This feature can be used during maintenance or testing to avoid transmissions using undesired parameters The parameter is available only when managing the unit from its Ethernet port The default is On 4 2 6 2 9 Antenna Gain The Antenna Gain parameter enables to define the net gain of a detached antenna The configured gain should take into account the attenuation of the cable connecting the antenna to the unit The Antenna Gain is important especially in countries where there is a limit on the EIRP allowed for the unit the maximum allowed value for the Transmit Power parameters cannot exceed the value of EIRP Antenna Gain where the EIRP is defined in the selected Sub Band In certain units with an integral antenna the Antenna Gain is not available as a configurable parameter However it is available as a read only parameter in the applicable Show menus The range is O 50 dB A value of Don t Care means that the actual value is not important A value of Not Set Yet means that the unit will not transmit until the actual value in the range O to 50 is configured The unit can be configured to Don t Care
161. e that the level at which the SU receives transmissions from the AU and vice versa is not too high As a rule of thumb if the SU is located at a distance of less than 300 meters from the AU it is recommended to up tilt the antenna by approximately 10 to 15 To guarantee a safety margin from the saturation level received signal of 40 dBm at the antenna port the SNR should not be higher than 50 dB The orange LED of the SNR bar indicates that the SNR is higher than 50 dB Commissioning 71 Chapter 3 Commissioning 3 4 E gt Es Configuring the Subscriber Unit s Maximum Modulation Level This section describes how to configure the maximum modulation level for Subscriber Units If the unit is associated with the AU then the final configuration of the Maximum Modulation Level parameter may be performed remotely for example from the site of the AU or from another site To configure the Maximum Modulation Level 1 Ifthe SNR of the SU at the AU is too low it is recommended that you configure the Maximum Modulation Level parameter to a value that is lower than the maximum supported by the unit This can decrease the number of retransmissions due to attempts to transmit at modulation levels that are too high for the actual quality of the link 2 Check the SNR of the SU at the AU You can use Telnet to view the SNR values in the MAC Address Database which can be accessed from the Site Survey menu If the ATPC algo
162. eACCESS VL System Manual Installing the Outdoor Unit 2 3 2 3 Pole Mounting the ODU with the Tilt Accessory Tilt Control Screw Figure 2 6 New SU A ODU Pole Installation Using the Tilt Accessory Vertical Polarization gt To mount the ODU on a pole using the Tilt accessory 1 Attach the Tilt accessory to the ODU using the two pairs of flat washers spring washers and nuts supplied in the Tilt kit 2 Mount the Tilt accessory on a 1 to 4 pole using two 9 16 metal bands 3 Release slightly the Tilt Control Screw tilt the ODU downward upward as required and re tighten the screw Installation 41 Chapter 2 Installation 2 3 3 42 Connecting the Grounding and Antenna Cables The Grounding screw marked is located on the bottom panel of the outdoor unit in the new SU A ODU it is located on the backside of the unit The Antenna RF connector marked Y is located on the top panel of the AU ODU SU E ODU To connect the grounding cable 1 Connect one end of a grounding cable to the grounding terminal and tighten the grounding screw firmly 2 Connect the other end of the grounding cable to a good ground earth connection To connect the RF cable units with external antenna 1 Connect one end of the coaxial RF cable to the RF connector on the top panel of the unit 2 Connect the other end of the RF cable to the antenna 3 The RF connectors should be properly sealed to protect against rain and m
163. each modulation level is defined by the selected Sub Band which reflects the applicable regulatory constraints For some countries the power may also be limited by limitations on the maximum EIRP also included in the Sub Band parameters and the Antenna Gain parameter For more details refer to section 4 2 2 4 and to section 4 2 6 2 8 1 For information on specific HW and Country Code limitations see the Country Codes document 3 The sensitivity values are for a bandwidth of 20 MHz When using a 10 MHz bandwidth the sensitivity for each modulation level is 3 dB lower 4 Modulation Level indicates the radio transmission rate and the modulation scheme Modulation Level 1 is for the lowest radio rate and modulation scheme 5 Modulation Level 8 is supported only in units with HW Revision B and above 1 7 2 Data Communication Table 1 7 Data Communication Standard compliance IEEE 802 3 CSMA CD VLAN Support Based on IEEE 802 1Q Layer 2 Traffic Prioritization Based on IEEE 802 1p Layer 3 Traffic Prioritization m IP Precedence ToS RFC791 m DSCP RFC2474 Layer 4 Traffic Prioritization UDP TCP destination ports BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Specifications 1 7 3 Configuration and Management Table 1 8 Configuration and Management tem serpin Management Monitor program via Telnet m SNMP H Configuration upload download Management Access From Wired LAN Wireless Link Management access protection m Multilevel pas
164. ead only IP address lpParams 6 The run time IP address If DHCP is used the run time IP address is the address given to the unit by the server Alternatively the static IP address is used BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 220 breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Value Range RunTimeSubNetMask Applicable to all units Read only IP address lpParams 7 The run time subnet mask If DHCP is used the run time subnet mask is the mask given to the unit by the server Alternatively the static subnet mask value is used RunTimeDefaultIPGateway Applicable to all units Read only IP address IpParams 8 The run time Gateway IP address If DHCP is used the Run Time Gateway IP Address is the address given to the unit by the server Alternatively the static default gateway is used E 2 5 Bridge Parameters ee ee parameters ee 5 EE el to all units VLAN support BridgeParameters 1 parameters Applicable to Access Link only VianID Applicable to SU RB only VLAN ID for Integer VLANSupport 1 data frame tagging i Ee 0 na no VLAN ID EthernetLinkType Applicable to all units VLAN support Integer VLANSupport 2 mode Link Type accessLink 1 The accessLink option is not available for trunkLink 2 AU BU hybridLink 3 serviceProviderLink is not applicable for serviceProviderLink 4 BU RB ManagementVID Applicable to all units VLAN ID for Integer VLANSupport 3 manageme
165. ead only The supported AES Encryption Option Applicable to all units Indicates whether the notSupported 2 Integer hwRevisionA 1 hwRevisionB 2 hwRevisionC 3 hwRevisionD 4 hwRevisionE 5 na 255 Integer supported 1 notSupported 2 Integer supported 1 notSupported 2 Integer supported 1 notSupported 2 Integer supported 1 Antenna Gain parameter is notSupported 2 changeable of fixed Unit Control Parameters MIB Parameter a e ne e ne 2 ResetUnit UnitControl 1 SetDefaults UnitControl 2 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual a to all units Resets the unit and applies new parameter values Applicable to all units Sets unit configuration to Defaults values after the next reset completeFactory All parameters revert to Factory Defaults values partialFactory All parameters revert to Factory Defaults values except the parameters required for maintaining wireless connectivity completeOperator All parameters revert to Operator Defaults values partialOperator All parameters revert to Operator Defaults values except the parameters required for maintaining wireless connectivity cancel 1 resetSystemNow 2 Integer NoDefaultSettingRequested 0 completeFactory 1 partialFactory 2 completeOperator 3 partialOperator 4 cancelCurrentPendingRequest 5 215 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB muB Parameter Senge 1 wegen Uni
166. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 42 2 3 4 Connecting the Indoor to Outdoor Cable AA 43 2 4 Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit cc ces teen eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneees 46 2 4 1 RESET Button Functionality icccccctccrcccaccenccdsessttennsicaseteen vianetavecsicensbaccontsestateenten 47 2 5 Installing the SU Keeseren eege 48 2 5 1 Installation Requirements xissccssncisinwcasexessendie receseveeesexcnonteentinanceiesiiecenneewetelaniees 48 2 5 2 SU I Connectors EE Sse ccroccornavagecoteciminacedeassaeeeemlnaerensimtarmeeniemansretade 49 2 5 39 Installation Guidelines wrccsccssentenrarasereneessdsen tates wntines enintaan ii NRE AREA 50 2 5 4 Installing the ae Nia che cc een ed eee ate es 50 2 5 5 Installing the Detached Antenna cccccceessseceeneeeeeeeeeeeeesteeeeeeeeeeneneeseeeeees 52 2 6 Installing the Modular Base Station EqQuipMment ccccssseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 59 2 6 1 BS SH Slot Assignment ss ccdcccedsvecsci dace sccorzcasessansaiscaesdealsnsceetecsumndeesescmncanetdeneance 59 2 6 2 BS PS AC Power Supply Module ek 60 2 6 3 BS PS DC Power Supply Module EE 61 2 6 4 BS AU Network Interface Module AAA 62 2 6 5 Installing the BS SH Chassis and Modules 63 Chapter 2 COMinis ENEE ebe EE ER 65 3 1 Configuring Basle Parameters vssssccccvcsccccccinesscciecsssesnetccnsccesssaccneceseancccecaueasncecenesnanccene 66 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual xviii Contents 3 2 Using the Optional Y cable New
167. efective Product in accordance with Alvarion standard R amp R procedure b With respect to the Firmware Alvarion warrants the correct functionality according to the attached documentation for a period of fourteen 14 month from invoice date the Warranty Period During the Warranty Period Alvarion may release to its Customers firmware updates which include additional performance improvements and or bug fixes upon availability the Warranty BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Legal Rights Bug fixes temporary patches and or workarounds may be supplied as Firmware updates Additional hardware if required to install or use Firmware updates must be purchased by the Customer Alvarion will be obligated to support solely the two 2 most recent Software major releases ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THAT THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY PURCHASER S OR ANY THIRD PERSON S MISUSE NEGLIGENCE IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR IMPROPER TESTING UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE OR BY ACCIDENT FIRE LIGHTNING OR OTHER HAZARD Disclaimer a The Product is sold on an AS IS basis Alvarion its affiliates or its licensors MAKE NO WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL IM
168. eger disable 1 enable 2 na 255 Integer 4 20 dB Integer 4 60 dB Integer Range 1 to 3600 seconds Integer 1 20 dB Cell distance Parameters ae BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 234 breezeAccessVLMib CellDistanceMode CellDistanceParameters 1 FairnessFactor CellDistanceParameters 2 MeasuredMaxCellDistance CellDistanceParameters 3 UnitWithMaxDistance CellDistanceParameters 4 PerSuDistanceLearning CellDistanceParameters 5 ScanningMode Airlnterface 16 Antenna Gain Airlnterface 17 SpectrumAnalysisParameters Airlnterface 18 SpectrumAnalysisChannelScanPeriod SpectrumAnalysisParameters 1 Applicable AU BU The selected mode of deciding on Cell Distance Applicable AU BU Not applicable to BreezeNET B products with SW version below 4 0 The percentage of the maximum distance that is taken into account in the time slot calculation Applicable AU BU The Maximum Cell Distance as calculated by the AU BU Applicable AU only Not applicable to BreezeNET B units The MAC address of the unit with the maximum distance from the AU Aplicable only to AU with SW version 4 0 and higher Applicable only if Cell Distance Mode is set to Automatic When disabled all SUs in the cell will use for the ACK Timeout the computed distance of the farthest SU When enabled each SU will use its own computed distance Applicable to SU RB The scanning mode In
169. ements apply to more than one country In these cases the Country Code includes a 4 digits proprietary group code and the Country Group name for example FCC E Data Encryption Support Indicates whether data encryption is supported for the applicable country E AES Encryption Support Indicates whether encryption using AES is supported for the applicable country E Authentication Encryption Support Indicates whether authentication encryption is supported for the applicable country For each of the available sets Sub Bands the following information is provided E Sub Band ID and Frequencies E Allowed Bandwidth If more than one bandwidth is allowed then each bandwidth is associated with a different sub band as the bandwidth may affect the available frequencies E Regulation Max Tx Power at Antenna Port The maximum transmit power allowed at the antenna port of the unit E Regulation Max EIRP The maximum allowed EIRP Effective Isotropic Radiated Power in dBm or No Limit E Min Modulation Level The lowest allowed modulation level Operation and Administration 89 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration E Max Modulation Level The highest allowed modulation level E Burst Mode Indicates whether Burst Mode operation is allowed E Maximum Burst Duration If Burst Mode is allowed this parameter displays the upper limit for the Maximum Burst Duration E DFS Option Indicates whether the DFS Dynamic Freque
170. ence into such contract or warranty Trade Names Alvarion BreezeCOM WALKair WALKnet BreezeNET BreezeACCESS BreezeMANAGE BreezeLINK BreezeCONFIG BreezeMAX AlvariSTAR BreezeLITE AlvariCRAFT MGW eMGW and or other products and or services referenced here in are either registered trademarks trademarks or service marks of Alvarion Ltd All other names are or may be the trademarks of their respective owners Statement of Conditions The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Alvarion Ltd shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this manual or equipment supplied with it Warranties and Disclaimers Exclusive viii All Alvarion Ltd Alvarion products purchased from Alvarion or through any of Alvarion s authorized resellers are subject to the following warranty and product liability terms and conditions Warranty a Alvarion warrants that the Product hardware it supplies and the tangible media on which any software is installed under normal use and conditions will be free from significant defects in materials and workmanship for a period of fourteen 14 months from the date of shipment of a given Product to Purchaser the Warranty Period Alvarion will at its sole option and as Purchaser s sole remedy repair or replace any d
171. erface Module Figure 2 22 shows the front panel of the BS AU Access Unit Network Interface module wuk ODU CURRENT CONSUMPTION ooustatus FESET Figure 2 22 BS AU Front Panel The BS AU provides the following interfaces M 10 100 BaseT A 10 100BaseT Ethernet connector for connecting the BS AU to the network A straight Ethernet cable should be used to connect the module to a hub router or switch E RADIO A 10 100BaseT Ethernet connector for connecting the BS AU to an AU ODU outdoor unit A Do not connect the data equipment to the RADIO port The RADIO port supplies DC power to the ODU and this may harm other equipment connected to it The recessed RESET switch on the front panel is for resetting the outdoor unit m BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment 2 6 5 gt Installing the BS SH Chassis and Modules This section describes how to install the power supply and Access Unit network interface modules in the Base Station chassis To install the BS SH chassis and modules OR 10 Install the BS SH chassis in a 19 cabinet To prevent over heating leave a free space of at least 1U between the upper lower covers of the BS SH chassis and other units in the cabinet Place the BS SH chassis on an appropriate shelf or table When mounting the BS SH on a shelf or table attach the rubber legs supplied with the unit Connect one end of a grounding c
172. ersion that does not support this feature the SU will use the maximum cell distance to calculate the ACK timeout The AU always uses the maximum cell distance to calculate the ACK timeout It should be noted that if the size of the time slot used by all units is adapted to the distance of the farthest unit then no unit will have an advantage when competing for services However this reduces the overall achievable throughput of the cell In certain situations the operator may decide to improve the overall throughput by reducing the slot size below the value required for full fairness This means that when there is competition for bandwidth the back off algorithm will give an advantage to SUs that are located closer to the AU The Cell Distance Parameters menu includes the following parameters Cell Distance Mode The Cell Distance Mode option defines whether the maximum distance of the AU from any of the SUs it serves will be determined manually using the Maximum Cell Distance parameter or automatically In addition the Per SU Distance Learning feature is supported only when the Cell Distance Mode is set to Automatic The Options are Automatic or Manual BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters The default is Automatic 4 2 6 2 10 2 Maximum Cell Distance The Maximum Cell Distance parameter allows configuring the maximum distance when the Cell Distance Mode option is Manual The range is O to 54 Km The value of
173. eseseeceeeseseeeeeeessseeeeeeessaeeeseeseeseenaseenees 8 1 8 f The 65 SS ee er 9 1 4 BreezeACCESS VL B amp B 4 9 GHZ OMly c ceecceceeeeesseneeeneeeeeeeenseseeeeeeneeeeeeeseeeeesenaees 10 1 5 Networking CUULP TION A cccerssssnnnnececussseenennnananesnnneeeeensaanonnenneeseesusnsnnnnaecarsssennsaganansoss 11 it EN E TO 12 ZN E E 12 EE 12 ag TST Lo a gee Pe ee eee eee ey eer ree 14 SS Radia a a e GN 14 1 7 2 Data Communication ace 2scecceausiciteeisnaeteccatsenetiane ed scusadadaenessenstenveseanmincnenqereiadeede 16 1 7 3 Configuration and Management seiscieisccsieiconesessvaenecannasariertaeadie dea tetenenteotecbereaenn 17 1 7 4 Standards Compliance Genera 18 1 7 5 Physical and Electrical geegent a EE 19 s We lge Lulu Nia EE 27 Contents Chapter 2 gt 1S EE 29 2 1 Installation Requirements 0sccssessecccessensssennsenneseensenennenenseseenseneneasznenssennencisenes 30 2A Packing EGU EE 30 2 1 2 Indoor to Outdoor Cables eeleren eer 33 2 2 Equipment Positioning Guidelines ccccsssseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeeeeesseeeeeees 34 2 3 Installing the Outdoor UN sivicicssacecenccie ne ceceastceresanessenssnsanecissanceeceinaaneeessncammecenexnsenentes 36 2 3 1 Pole Mounting the Outdoor UE ccctcsinccetcarssacconenasa scveandysiencetniondececerincienancsenteeyes 36 2 3 2 Pole Mounting the New GU A ODU een 38 2 3 3 Connecting the Grounding and Antenna Cables ccccececeeeeee
174. ess link using modulation level 2 Integer 0 60 Integer Range 1 to 8 Level 8 is not applicable to devices with HW revision A Counter 32 Counter 32 Counter 32 Counter 32 255 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB Applicable to AU BU Read only Counts the total number of unicast frames AdbTxSuccess ModLevel3 AUAdbEntry 11 Counter 32 excluding retransmissions that were successfully transmitted to the SU over the wireless link using modulation level 3 Applicable to AU BU Read only Counts the total number of unicast frames excluding retransmissions that were successfully transmitted to the SU over the wireless link using modulation level 4 Applicable to AU BU Read only Counts the total number of unicast frames excluding retransmissions that were successfully transmitted to the SU over the wireless link using modulation level 5 Applicable to AU BU Read only Counts the total number of unicast frames excluding retransmissions that were successfully transmitted to the SU over the wireless link using modulation level 6 Applicable to AU BU Read only Counts the total number of unicast frames excluding retransmissions that were successfully transmitted to the SU over the wireless link using modulation level 7 Applicable to AU BU Not applicable to units with HW revision A Read only Counts the total number of unicast frames excluding retransmissions that AdbT
175. essing the FTP server that is hosting the file Valid values A string of up to 18 printable ASCII characters The default is vx E FTP Password The FTP Password option enables defining the password to be used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the file Valid values A string of up to 18 printable ASCII characters The default is vx Operation and Administration 99 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration E Show Configuration File Upload Download Parameters Displays the current values of the Configuration File Upload Download parameters x There is one set of general FTP parameters FTP Server IP Address FTP Gateway IP Address CC FTP User Name and FTP Password This set or relevant parts of the set serves the SW Download procedure the Configuration File Upload Download procedure and the Event Log File Upload procedure Changing any of these parameters in the menu for either procedure will automatically change its value in the menu for the other procedures 4 2 3 8 Log Out Timer The Log Out Timer parameter determines the amount of inactive time following which the unit automatically exits the Monitor program The time out duration can range from 1 to 999 minutes The default value is 5 minutes 4 2 3 9 Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode The Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode submenu displays the current Ethernet port state and enables defining the negotiation mode of the Ethernet port The available optio
176. eters E VLAN Support VLAN ID Management Refer to section 4 2 6 4 for a description of these parameters Security Parameters E Authentication Algorithm E Data Encryption Option E Security Mode HM Default Multicast Key AU E Default Key SU E Key 1 to Key 4 E Promiscuous Authentication AU Some or all of the security parameters may not be available in units that do not support the applicable features Refer to section 4 2 6 7 for a description of these parameters Site Survey Menu The Site Survey menu displays the results of various tests and counters for verifying the quality of the wireless link These tests can be used to help Operation and Administration 105 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 5 1 4 2 5 1 1 106 determine where to position the units for optimal coverage antenna alignment and troubleshooting The counters can serve for evaluating performance and identifying potential problems In the AU there is also an extensive database for all SUs served by it The Site Survey menu includes the following options E Traffic Statistics E Ping Test E Continuous Link Quality display SU only E MAC Address Database E Per Modulation Level Counters E Link Capability Traffic Statistics The traffic statistics are used to monitor interpret and analyze the performance of the wired and wireless links The counters display statistics relating to wireless link and Ethernet frames
177. f devices on both the wired and wireless sides not including BreezeACCESS VL units The available range is 20 to 2000 seconds The default value is 300 seconds 4 2 6 4 5 Broadcast Relaying AU only The Broadcast Relaying option enables selecting whether the unit performs broadcast relaying When the Broadcast Relaying parameter is enabled broadcast packets originating from devices on the wireless link are transmitted by the AU back to the wireless link devices as well as to the wired LAN If disabled these packets are sent only to the local wired LAN and are not sent back to the wireless link Disable the broadcast relaying only if all broadcast messages from the wireless link are certain to be directed to the wired LAN The default selection is Enable 4 2 6 4 6 Unicast Relaying AU only The Unicast Relaying option enables selecting whether the unit performs unicast relaying When the Unicast Relaying parameter is enabled unicast packets originating from devices on the wireless link can be transmitted back to the wireless link devices If disabled these packets are not sent to the wireless link even if they are intended for devices on the wireless link Disable the Unicast Relaying parameter only if all unicast messages from the wireless link are certain to be directed to the local wired LAN The default selection is Enable 4 2 6 4 7 MAC Address List AU only The MAC Address List submenu enables to define a list of up to 100
178. f test failed fatal error Ethernet activity Green Ethernet link between the connectivity indoor and outdoor units is detected indication no activity Blinking Green Ethernet connectivity is OK with traffic on the port Blinking rate proportional to traffic rate Red No Ethernet connectivity between the indoor and outdoor units SNR BAR Received signal Red LED Signal is too low SU RA strength Indication SNR lt 4 dB 8 green LEDs Quality of the received signal Orange LED Signal is too high SNR gt 50 dB Commissioning 75 Chapter 3 Commissioning Table 3 5 SU ODU SNR Bar LED Functionality LEDs 2 to 3 green are On LEDs 2 to 4 green are On LEDs 2 to 5 green are On LEDs 2 to 6 green are On LEDs 2 to 7 green are On LEDs 2 to 8 green are On LEDs 2 to 9 green are On LEDs 2 to 9 green and 10 orange are On 7 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Operation Verification 3 5 2 Indoor Unit Verification To verify the correct operation of the indoor equipment examine the LED indicators located on the top panel of the SU IDU and AU IDU units or on the front panel of the BS AU module Table 3 6 provides information for the BS AU IDU LEDs Table 3 7 lists the LEDs of the PS1073 IDU Table 3 6 BS AU LEDs Wireless link activity ODU CURRENT CONSUMPTION Current Consumption of the Outdoor Unit ODU STATUS Outdoor Unit Self test IDU PWR Power indication for the Indo
179. f up to 10 traps destination IP addresses and the associated community strings In addition the menu enables specifying the IP address of a connected AP client device to facilitate remote management of a BreezeACCESS WI system The Network Management Parameters menu includes the following options HM Access to Network Management E Network Management Filtering E Set Network Management IP address E Delete a Network Management IP Address HM Delete All Network Management IP Addresses E Set Change Network Management IP Address Ranges E SNMP Traps E AP Client IP Address SU only Access to Network Management The Access to Network Management option defines the port through which the unit can be managed The following options are available E From Wireless Link Only E From Ethernet Only E From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link Operation and Administration 147 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration A 4 2 6 3 2 148 The default selection is From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link Be careful not to block your access to the unit For example if you manage an SU via the wireless link setting the Access to Network Management parameter to From Ethernet Only completely blocks your management access to the unit In this case a technician may be required to change the settings at the user s site Network Management Filtering The Network Management Filtering option enables or disables the IP address based management fi
180. fect management frames sent to or generated by the unit The User Filtering Parameters menu provides the following options Operation and Administration 177 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 6 1 1 4 2 6 6 1 2 4 2 6 6 1 3 4 2 6 6 1 4 4 2 6 6 1 5 178 User Filtering Option The User Filtering Option disables or enables the User Filtering feature The following options are available E Disable no filtering E IP Protocol Only only IP Protocol packets pass E User Defined Addresses Only only IP frames from to IP addresses included in the User Filter Addresses list pass E PPPoE Protocol Only only PPPoE messages pass Ethernet type 0x8863 and 0x8864 The default selection is Disable Set Change Filter IP Address Range The Set Change Filter IP Address Ranges option enables defining updating up to 8 IP address ranges to from which IP frames are to pass if the User Defined Addresses Only option is selected in the User Filtering Option parameter The default Filter IP Address Range is 0 0 0 0 TO 0 0 0 0 all 8 ranges A range can be defined using a string that includes either a start and end address in the format lt start address gt to lt end address gt example 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 255 or a base address and a mask in the format lt base address gt mask lt mask gt example 192 168 1 1 mask 255 255 255 0 Delete Filter IP Address Range The Delete Filter I
181. fied as an eligible candidate for concatenation it is marked accordingly and will be processed according to the following E Ifthere is no concatenated frame designated to the same destination unit in the queue Ifthe hardware queue is empty the frame is transmitted immediately Otherwise the queue is not empty the frame is inserted to the queue as a concatenated frame E Ifa concatenated frame designated to the same destination unit exists in the queue If the combined size of both frames is above the maximum allowed concatenated frame size both frames are transmitted as two separate frames Otherwise the combined frames size is below the maximum size the new frame is added to the concatenated frame If the number of data frames in the concatenated frame has reached the maximum allowed applicable only if the destination unit uses SW version 3 0 or 3 1 the concatenated frame will be transmitted to the wireless medium Otherwise the concatenated frame remains in the queue until the hardware queue becomes free When a frame is marked as a candidate for concatenation it will be transmitted as a concatenated frame If it is not bundled with another data frame before transmission it will be a concatenated frame with a single data frame Concatenated Frame Single If it is bundled with two or more data frames it will be a concatenated frame with either double data frames Concatenated Fram
182. following additional counters are displayed to indicate the reason for and the nature of the event BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters Dropped The number of dropped frames which are unsuccessfully retransmitted without being acknowledged until the maximum permitted number of retransmissions Underrun The number of times that transmission of a frame was aborted because the rate of submitting frames for transmission exceeds the available transmission capability Others The number of frames whose transmission was not completed or delayed due to a problem other than those represented by the other counters E Total received frames from wireless The total number of frames received from the wireless medium The count includes data frames as well as control and wireless management frames The count does not include bad frames and duplicate frames For a description of these frames refer to Bad frames received and Duplicate frames discarded below E Total received data frames The total number of data frames received from the wireless medium including duplicate frames Refer to Duplicate frames discarded below E Total Rx events The total number of frames that were not received properly The following additional counters are displayed to indicate the reason for the failure Phy The number of Phy errors unidentified signals CRC The number of frames received from the wireless medium conta
183. fully transmitted unicasts at the applicable modulation level SUPerModulationLevelCountersTxFailed Applicable to SU RB Read only The PerModulationLevelCountersEntry 4 total number of failures to successfully transmit a unicast frame during a HW Retry cycle at the applicable modulation level AverageModulationLevel Applicable to SU RB Read only The Integer PerModulationLevelCounters 3 average modulation level for successful Counter 32 _ go transmission rounded to nearest integer since last reset of the Per Modulation Level counters MacAddressDatabase MAC Address Database SiteSurvey 5 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 254 breezeAccessVLMib MacAddressDatabase 1 AdbResetAllCounters AUMacAddressDatabase 1 Applicable to AU BU Resets all the counters for all SUs in the MAC Address Database Integer reset 1 noReset 2 En Mawar AUMacAddressDatabase 2 The AU MAC Address Database Table AUAdbEntry AUAdbTable 1 Adbindex AUAdbEntry 1 AdbMacAddress AUAdbEntry 2 AdbStatus AUAdb_Entry 3 Applicable to AU BU Not accessible An entry in the AU MAC Address Database Table Applicable to AU BU Read only The Index of an entry in the AU MAC Address Database Table Applicable to AU BU Read only The MAC Address of an SU entry in the AU MAC Address Database Table Applicable to AU BU Read only The wireless status of the relevant SU Integer
184. g Execute FTP Put Configuration File cfg Execute FTP Get Operator Defaults File cmr Execute FTP Put Operator Defaults File cmr E FTP Configuration File Source Dir The FTP Configuration File Source Dir option enables defining the source directory of the configuration Operator Defaults file BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters Valid values A string of up to 80 printable ASCII characters To clear the field n press The default is an empty string E Configuration File FTP File Name The Configuration File FTP File Name option enables defining the name of the configuration file to be uploaded downloaded Valid values A string of up to 20 printable ASCII characters An empty string is not allowed The default is config cfg E Operator Defaults FTP File Name The Operator Defaults File Name option enables defining the name of the Operator Defaults file to be uploaded downloaded Valid values A string of up to 20 printable ASCII characters An empty string is not allowed The default is operator cmr E FTP Server IP Address The FTP Host IP Address option enables defining the IP address of the FTP server that is hosting the file The default is 10 0 0 253 E FTP Gateway IP Address The FTP Gateway IP Address option enables defining the FTP default gateway address The default is 0 0 0 0 E FTP User Name The FTP User Name option enables defining the user name to be used for acc
185. get High priority TcpPortRangeNum Applicable to all units Read Integer TcpPortRangeConfig 2 only The number of entries in the TCP Port Range Table TcpPortRangeTable Applicable to all units Not TcpPortRangeConfig 3 accessible A table of TCP port ranges used for prioritization The user can define up to 64 ranges An entry is empty if start is 65535 and end is 0 TcpPortRangeEntry Applicable to all units Not TcpPortRangeTable 1 accessible A TCP Port Ranges Table entry TcpPortRangeStart Applicable to all units Read Integer TcpPortRangeEntry 1 only Start port of an TCP 0 65535 Port Range TcpPortRangeEnd Applicable to all units Read Integer TcpPortRangeEntry 2 only End port of an TCP 0 65535 Port Range TcpPortRangeldx Applicable to all units Read Integer TcpPortRangeEntry 3 only Index of an TCP Port 1 64 Range entry TcpPortRangeAdd Applicable to all units Add DisplayString TcpPortRangeConfig 4 port range s to TCP Port A range is defined by Ranges Table lt start gt lt end gt or lt start gt Get operation will return an where lt start gt is the Start empty string Port of the range and lt end gt is the End Port If only lt start gt is specified the range is lt start gt lt start gt The value of lt start gt and lt end gt are between 0 and 65535 The user can add several ranges using a comma to separate between ranges Example 10 26 99 987 900 BreezeACCES
186. gorithm Applicable to AU RB Enabling disabling the promiscuous mode where any SU can be authenticated by and communicate with the AU Applicable to all units Key number 1 Accessible only with SNMP Write Community String administrator password Applicable to all units Key number 2 Accessible only with SNMP Write Community String administrator password Applicable to all units Key number 3 Accessible only with SNMP Write Community String administrator password Applicable to all units Key number 4 Accessible only with SNMP Write Community String administrator password Applicable to all units Returns types of encryption that are supported Integer disable 1 enable 2 Integer Range 1 to 4 Integer wep 1 aesOCB 2 fips197 3 Integer disable 1 enable 2 DisplayString 32 hexadecimal digits DisplayString 32 hexadecimal digits DisplayString 32 hexadecimal digits DisplayString 32 hexadecimal digits Integer 0 7 No encryption 0 WEP 1 AES OCB 2 WEP AES OCB 3 FIPS 197 4 WEP FIPS 197 5 AES OCB FIPS 197 6 WEP AES OCB FIPS 197 7 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual breezeAccessVLMib E 2 10 Performance Parameters PerformanceParams breezeAccessVLMib 10 RTSThreshold PerformanceParams 1 MinContentionWindow PerformanceParams 3 MaxContentionWindow PerformanceParams 4 MaximumModulationLevel Perf
187. h manufacturers as attached to this manual or provided thereafter by Alvarion or the manufacturers Non_compliance with such instructions may result in serious damage and or bodily harm and or void the user s authority to operate the equipment and or revoke the warranty provided by such manufacturer BreezeACCESS VL System Manual xiii About This Manual This manual describes the BreezeACCESS VL Broadband Wireless Access System Release 4 0 27 and how to install operate and manage the system components This manual is intended for technicians responsible for installing setting up and operating the BreezeACCESS VL system and for system administrators responsible for managing the system This manual contains the following chapters and appendices Chapter 1 System description Describes the BreezeAccess VL system and its components Chapter 2 Installation Describes how to install the system components Chapter 3 Commissioning Describes how to configure basic parameters align the Subscriber Unit antenna and validate unit operation Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Describes how to use the BreezeACCESS VL Monitor application for configuring parameters checking system status and monitoring performance Appendix A Software Version Loading Using TFTP Describes how to load a new software version using TFTP Appendix B File Download and Upload Using TFTP Describes how to download and upload configu
188. h external antenna According to the antenna If set to Not Set Yet supplied with the unit and must be configured the Sub Band according to actual value taking into account cable s attenuation Preferred AU MAC Address SU 00 00 00 00 00 00 none Applicable only when Best AU Support is enabled aosan Jus IL emun ca tn At ooo corses OOO Fareste Inn Parsun rama oc Maximum Modulation Level SU 8 or the highest value Refer to section 3 4 supported according to the country code No higher than 7 for units with HW revision A Commissioning Chapter 3 Commissioning Table 3 1 Basic Parameters Authentication Algorithm Open System Availability of security support according to the Security Mode WEP country code Default Multicast Key AU Promiscuous Authentication AU Key 1 to Key 4 00 0 32 zeros meaning no key E Some parameters are changed to their new values only after reset refer to Appendix F for more details After the basic parameters are configured the unit should be reset in order to activate the new configuration Ge BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Using the Optional Y cable New SU A ODU 3 2 Using the Optional Y cable New SU A ODU A special Y cable available from Alvarion enables to connect a a portable PC directly to the IDU COM port of the SU A ODU This enables the installer to perform the entire process of configuring basic parameters align
189. hat are listed in Table 4 2 Table 4 2 Parameters not reset after Set Complete Factory Operator Defaults Unit Control Parameters All Passwords FTP Server IP address see note below FTP Gateway IP address see note below FTP User Name see note below Air Interface Parameters E The FTP parameters are not set to their default values after Set Complete Operator Defaults l However they are set to their default value after Set Complete Factory Defaults Note that in this case they are set to the default values immediately upon selecting the Set Complete Factory Default option even before the next reset 4 2 3 2 1 2 Set Partial Factory Defaults Select this option to reset the unit to the standard Factory Default configuration excluding the parameters that are required to maintain connectivity and management access The parameters that do not change after Set Partial Factory Defaults are listed in Table 4 3 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 92 Menus and Parameters Table 4 3 Parameters that are not reset after Set Partial Factory Operator Defaults Parameters Group Parameter Passwords Unit Control parameters Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode FTP Server IP address FTP Gateway IP Address FTP User Name FTP Password IP Parameters IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Address DHCP Option Access to DHCP Security Parameters Authentication Algorithm Default Key SU Data Encryption Mode Default
190. hat unit is in coverage area of AU according to radio planning Verify that antenna is directed toward the AU Try to improve location height of antenna BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 277 Appendix G Troubleshooting G 3 Low Throughput Problems Problem and Indication Possible Cause Corrective Action Low throughput is suspected Ethernet link problems Verify proper settings of Ethernet operation mode actual Ethernet speed Check the dominant Modulation of 100 Mbps Level in Per rate Counters and Check Ethernet counters see expected throughput in the Expected Throughput table below Wrong configuration of Verify that Maximum Modulation level is not Maximum Modulation set to a value that is not too low according to level the Recommended Maximum Modulation Level table below Low throughput of Non optimal configuration A value that is too low see the multicast broadcast traffic of Multicast Modulation Recommended Maximum Modulation Level level table below may degrade throughput of broadcast and multicast traffic High retransmissions rate Interference problems Check for interference using the Spectrum retransmissions rate in Analysis Mode If necessary change the excess of 15 operating frequency of the AU Expected Throughput in Mbps TCP Traffic 20 MHz Bandwidth Burst Mode Enabled Concatenation Enabled TCP Traffic Modulation Level ic iver efet efe eTe DREES w RERESCCRERERESEC o
191. he BS AU the AU D E BS ODU cannot be used with the standalone IDU BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Subscriber Unit 1 3 Subscriber Unit The Subscriber Unit SU installed at the customer premises enables the customer data connection to the Access Unit The Subscriber Unit provides an efficient platform for high speed Internet and Intranet services The use of packet switching technology provides the user with a connection to the network that is always on enabling immediate access to services There are two types of Subscriber Units E The SU A E series where each unit comprises an Indoor Unit and an Outdoor Unit with or without an integrated antenna These products are intended for installation by a professional installer enabling long range connectivity E The SU I series of all indoor Subscriber Unit intended for installation by non professional end users in locations that are close to the Base Station In addition there is a special variant of a Subscriber Unit the SU E BS where the indoor unit is designed for installation in the Base Station chassis The SU E BS is intended primarily for backhauling or similar applications The following sections provides additional details on the various types of Subscriber Units 1 3 1 SU A E Subscriber Units The SU A E Subscriber Unit comprises a desktop or wall mountable Indoor Unit IDU and an outdoor unit that contains the processing and radio modules Several ODU types
192. he current values of the Event Log Upload parameters There is one set of general FTP parameters FTP Server IP Address FTP Gateway IP Address FTP User Name and FTP Password This set or relevant parts of the set serves the SW Download procedure the Configuration File Upload Download procedure and the Event Log File Upload procedure Changing any of these parameters in the menu for either procedure will automatically change its value in the menu for the other procedures Feature Upgrade The Feature Upgrade option enables to enter a license string for upgrading the unit to support new features and or options Upon selecting the Manual Feature Upgrade option the user will be requested to enter the license string Each license string is associated with a unique MAC Address and one feature option If the encrypted MAC Address in the license string does not match the unit s MAC Address the string will be rejected If there is a match a message notifying of the new feature option will be displayed The unit must be reset for the change to take effect The license string should comprise 32 to 64 hexadecimal digits New Feature License files can be uploaded remotely using TFTP see Appendix B Basic Configuration Menu The Basic Configuration menu includes all parameters required for the initial installation and operation of the unit After the unit is properly installed and operational additional parameters can be configured either local
193. hich are included in the Forwarding List Tag Insert Tag Remove E The following units management limitations apply when using a Service Provider Link H The unit can be managed only with tagged frames VLAN ID Management must be other than 65535 H To enable proper management all units in a cell the AU and all SUs served by it must use the VLAN ID Management m The VLAN ID Management must differ from the Customer s VLAN ID Data 4 2 6 4 1 4 VLAN Forwarding AU and SU The VLAN Forwarding feature is applicable only for Trunk Links and Service Provider Links It enables defining the VLAN ID values to be included in the VLAN Forwarding List If the Link Type is defined as either a Trunk Link or a Service Provider Link and the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled a data frame received with a VLAN ID or a Service Provider VLAN ID that is not a member of the unit s VLAN Forwarding List is discarded The VLAN Forwarding submenu provides the following options BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 158 Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 4 1 4 1 VLAN Forwarding Support The VLAN Forwarding Support option enables or disables the VLAN Forwarding feature Available selections are Disable and Enable The default selection is Disable 4 2 6 4 1 4 2Add Forwarding VLAN ID The Add Forwarding VLAN ID option enables adding a VLAN ID to the VLAN Forwarding List One VLAN ID can be entered at a time The maximum number of VLAN
194. ified by the Bridge Aging Time parameter The default is 300 seconds There is no aging time for Association Info entries The maximum number of entries permitted for these tables which are 1017 1024 minus the number of special Sp addresses as defined above for Bridging Info and as specified by the Maximum Number of Associations parameter for Association Info The default value of the Maximum Number of Associations parameter is 512 Ed When Data Encryption is enabled the actual maximum number of associations is limited to 124 The displayed number is the value configured for the Maximum Number of Associations parameter which might be higher than the actual limit E Display Association Info Displays information regarding the Subscriber Units associated with the AU Each list entry includes the following information The MAC Address of the associated Subscriber Unit Age in seconds indicating the elapsed time since receiving the last packet from the Subscriber Unit The value configured for the Maximum Modulation Level parameter of the Subscriber Unit The Status of the Subscriber Unit There are three options 1 Associated 2 Authenticated 3 Not Authenticated a temporary status Operation and Administration 113 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration The various status states are described below this is a simplified description of the association process without the effects of the Best AU algorith
195. igh priority traffic as well as AU s transmissions of broadcasts multicasts and beacons This will give Operation and Administration 187 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration A advantage to units that need to transmit high priority traffic depending also on the configured values for the Contention Window parameters Other parameters related to transmission to the wireless media that can be configured separately for high low priority packets are the Number of HW Retries and Burst Duration Typically a lower value of Number of HW Retries should be configured for traffic such as VoIP which on the one hand is sensitive to delays and on the other hand is less sensitive to missing packets than data traffic The Burst Duration which defines the maximum duration of a burst should be set to a lower value for delay sensitive traffic Typically the Burst Duration of the AU should be set to higher value than that of the SUs because of the higher number of packets that should be transmitted by the AU When the Wireless Link Prioritization feature is enabled the following parameters are not applicable E Arbitration Inter Frame Spacing AIFS E Number of HW Retries E Burst Mode Option E Burst Mode Time Interval When an SU with a SW version below 4 0 tries to associate with an AU that has the Wireless Link Prioritization feature enable the AU will generate a trap that will include information about this SU In this way
196. imum transmit power of the SU should be limited to ensure compliance with applicable regulations or for other reasons Different power levels may be used for different modulation levels by taking into account possible HW limitations or regulatory restrictions Transmit Power The Transmit Power submenu includes the following options E Transmit Power E Show Transmit Power Parameters 4 2 6 2 8 1 1 Transmit Power In the AU the Transmit Power parameter defines the fixed transmit power level and is not part of the ATPC algorithm In the SU the Transmit Power parameter defines the fixed transmit power level when the ATPC algorithm is disabled If the ATPC Option is enabled the value configured for this parameter serves for setting the initial value to be used by the ATPC algorithm after either power up or losing synchronization with the AU The minimum value for the Transmit Power Parameter is 10 dBm the ATPC may reduce the actual transmit power of the SU to lower values The maximum value of the Transmit Power Parameter depends on several unit properties and parameters BW The HW revision of the unit Operation and Administration 133 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration E The Maximum Allowed Tx Power as defined for the applicable Sub Band E The Maximum EIRP as defined for the applicable Sub Band together with the value of the Antenna Gain In certain countries the Maximum EIRP of some equipment types cannot
197. ing the antenna and verifying proper operation of the unit right after completing the installation minimizing the number of times the installer must climb to the roof It also enables simpler configuration performance monitoring during various maintenance testing actions To IDU COM Connector TPC IDU ODU cable go IDU Figure 3 1 Connecting the Y cable Commissioning 69 Chapter 3 Commissioning 3a y Aligning the Subscriber Unit Antenna This antenna alignment process described in this section is applicable to both the SU A ODU and the SU I antenna unless stated otherwise The SNR bar display is located on the bottom panel of the SU A ODU front panel of the SU I indoor unit The ten LEDs indicate the quality of the received signal The higher the number of green LEDs indicating On the higher the quality of the received signal This section describes how to align the Subscriber Unit antenna using the SNR bar display Antenna alignment using the SNR bar display is possible only after the Subscriber Unit is associated with an Access Unit The associated Access Unit must be operational and the basic Subscriber Unit parameters must be correctly configured Otherwise the unit will not be able to synchronize with the Access Unit As the SNR measurement is performed on received frames its results are meaningless unless the Subscriber Unit is associated with an Access Unit To align the Subscriber Unit antenna 1 Align
198. ining CRC errors Overrun The number of frames that were discarded because the receive rate exceeded the processing capability or the capacity of the Ethernet port Decrypt The number of frames that were not received properly due to a problem in the data decryption mechanism E Total received concatenated frames The total number of concatenated frames received from the wireless medium including duplicate frames There are also separate counts for concatenated frames that include one frame Single two frames Double or more than two frames More For more details refer to section 4 2 6 5 10 Operation and Administration 109 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 5 2 110 Bad fragments received The number of fragments received from the wireless medium containing CRC errors Duplicate frames discarded The number of data frames discarded because multiple copies were received If an acknowledgement message is not received by the originating unit the same data frame can be received more than once Although duplicate frames are included in all counters that include data frames only the first copy is forwarded to the Ethernet port Internally discarded MIR CIR The number of data frames received from the Ethernet port that were discarded by the MIR CIR mechanism to avoid exceeding the maximum permitted information rate Ping Test The Ping Test submenu is used to control pinging from the unit and incl
199. inistrator password This is also the SNMP Write Community String EthernetNegotiationMode Applicable to all units Ethernet UnitControl 9 port mode of operation Integer force1 0MbpsAnd HalfDuplex 1 force10MbpsAnd FullDuplex 2 force100MbpsAnd HalfDuplex 3 force100MbpsAnd FullDuplex 4 autoNegotiationMode 5 a BE UnitControl 10 parameters FTPParameters 1 FTP server parameters FTPServerUserName Applicable to all units The user ee SIZE 20 FTPServerParams 1 name to be used for access to the Up to 18 printable ASCII FTP server characters FTPServerPassword Applicable to all units The DisplayString SIZE 20 FTPServerParams 2 password to be used for access to Up to 18 printable ASCII the FTP server characters FTPClientlpAddress Applicable to all units The IP IP address FTPParameters 3 address of the FTP stack in the unit For SW version 4 0 and higher this is read only set to the IP Address of the unit FTPServertlpaddress Applicable to all units The IP IP address FTPServerParams 4 address of the FTP server BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 216 breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Value Range FTPClientMask FTPParameters 5 Applicable to all units The IP MASK of the FTP stack in the unit IP address FTPParameters 6 Default Gatewa IP address fees Je l FTPParameters 2 download parameters Applicable to all units The name of the SW file to
200. ion 4 0 and higher Apply the selected subset After the next reset the new subset will be used for scanning Applicable to all units Not applicable to SU RB with SW version 4 0 and higher Not accessible The Current Frequency Subset table that for SU RB includes all frequencies that are currently used for scanning In AU BU it includes all frequencies that can be used by the DFS mechanism if applicable Applicable to all units Not applicable to SU RB with SW version 4 0 and higher Not accessible An entry in the Current Frequency Subset table Applicable to all units Not applicable to SU RB with SW version 4 0 and higher Read only The index of an entry in the Current Frequency Subset table Applicable to all units with HW revision B and lower for units with HW revision C and higher replaced by CurrentFrequencySubsetFrequency New to support a resolution of 0 5 MHz Not applicable to SU RB with SW version 4 0 and higher Read only The frequency in MHz of an entry in the Current Frequency Subset table Integer active 1 notActive 2 DisplayString Integer SetSelectedFreqsSubset 1 cancel 2 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual breezeAccessVLMib CurrentFrequencySubset FrequencyNew FrequencySubsetEntry 3 CurrentAUOperatingFrequency FrequencyDefinition 7 AUDefinedFrequency FrequencyDefinition 8 CurrentSUOperatingFrequency FrequencyDefinition 9 Applicable to all uni
201. ion is included in the list will be routed to the High queue All other packets will be routed to the Low queue unless they were assigned a High priority by another classifier The TCP Port Ranges menu includes the following options E TCP RTP RTCP Prioritization Voice over IP is transported using Real Time Protocol RTP The Real Time Control Protocol RTCP is used to control the RTP When an application uses RTP RTCP it chooses for destination ports consecutive numbers RTP port is always an even number and the port with the odd number following it will be assigned to RTCP If the administrator selects to prioritize only the RTP packets then all the packets with an odd numbered destination port will always have Low priority The packets with an even number for destination port will receive High priority if the port number is included in the specified ranges If the administrator selects to prioritize both RTP and RTCP packets then all packets whose destination port number is included in the specified ranges will receive High priority The available options are RTP amp RTCP RTP Only The default is RTP amp RTCP E Add TCP Port Ranges This option enables adding TCP port ranges to the list of priority port numbers The list can include up to 64 ranges It is possible to add discrete port numbers and or ranges In ranges a hyphen is used to separate between start and end port numbers A comma is used to separate bet
202. is 30 4 2 6 2 14 Country Code Learning by SU AU only This feature supports simplified installation and updates processes by enabling the SU to adapt the Country Code used by the AU The AU advertises its country code in every beacon and association response message Upon synchronization the SU shall check if its country code and the country code received from the AU are the same If they are not the same and the Operation and Administration 141 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Country Code Learning by the SU is enabled the SU will use the AU s country code the country code derived limitations will be forced and the following parameters will be set according to the new country definitions E Maximum TX Power per modulation level will be set to the maximum defined by the country code E TX Power per modulation level will be set to the maximum defined by the country code HM The Modulation Level will be set to the maximum modulation level defined by the country code BW The Multicast Modulation Level will be set to the minimum modulation level defined by the country code E The Burst Mode will be set to enable if the country code supports burst mode and the burst duration will be set to default After country code learning adaptation the unit is automatically reset Before this automatic reset if the unit is running from the shadow version the versions must be swapped and the running version must be
203. isplayed as a string of asterisks The default for all 4 Keys is 000 0 a string of 32 zeros which means no key Operation and Administration 193 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 7 7 Promiscuous Authentication AU only The Promiscuous Authentication mode enables new SUs to join an active cell where Shared Key operation and or Data Encryption are used even if this SU does not have the correct security parameters In promiscuous mode all downlink transmissions from AU to SUs are not encrypted allowing remote configuration of security parameters regardless of the current settings in the SUs of the parameters related to data encryption After a new SU joins the cell it should be remotely configured with the proper parameters or upgraded When the SU is configured properly the Promiscuous Mode should be disabled The default is Disable x Do not leave the AU in the enabled Promiscuous Authentication mode for prolonged periods Use it only when absolutely necessary perform the required actions as quickly as possible and disable it The unit will return automatically to Promiscuous Authentication disabled mode after reset BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 194 endix A Software Version Loading TFTP Appendix A Software Version Loading Using TFTP A gt 196 Firmware upgrades to the unit s FLASH memory can be performed by a simple loading procedure using a TFTP application Befor
204. ithm is enabled and the Burst Mode Option is disabled Otherwise it is disabled Applicable to all units Read only for units with version 2 0 Not applicable for units with SW version 3 0 and higher The maximum number of times to use the Software Retry mechanism when it is enabled Applicable to all units The minimum interval between two consecutive adaptive modulation algorithm messages carrying information on the SNR of received signals Applicable to all units Defines the setting of thresholds for the rate decision algorithm high 2 should typically be used when the SNR is lower than 13 dB Burst Mode Parameters Applicable to all units Not applicable if Wireless Link Prioritization is enabled Applicable to all units Applicable only if Burst Mode Option is supported by the Sub Band Not applicable if Wireless Link Prioritization is enabled Enabling disabling burst mode operation In SU RB with HW Revision B or lower blocked 3 value is returned when Security Mode is Wep Data Encryption Option is Enabled and Burst option is Enabled In AU BU with HW Revision B or lower blocked 3 value is returned when Dfs Option is Enabled and Burst mode is enabled Applicable to all units Not applicable if Wireless Link Prioritization is enabled The burst interval in milliseconds Applicable to all units Enabling disabling the concatenation mechanism Read only for un
205. its with version 2 0 Not applicable for units with SW version 3 0 and higher The status of the Integer disable 1 enable 2 na 255 Integer 0 14 Integer 1 3600 seconds Integer normal 1 high 2 na 255 Integer disable 1 enable 2 blocked 3 na 255 Integer 1 the maximum value as defined in the Sub Band milliseconds na 255 Concatenation Parameters Applicable to all units Integer disable 1 enable 2 250 na 255 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual breezeAccessVLMib ConcatenationMaximumNumberOfFrames Applicable to all units Not Integer ConcatenationParameters 2 applicable to units with SW version 2 8 4 0 and higher Defines the maximum number of data frames that can be concatenated ConcatenationMaxFrameSize Applicable to all units with SW Integer ConcatenationParameters 3 version 4 0 and higher Defines the Range 256 to 2200 bytes maximum size of a concatenated for BU RB 14 BU RB 28 frame or for AU SU with HW revision A or B 256 to 4032 bytes for AU SU with HW Revision C or higher and BU RB 100 E 2 11 Site Survey Parameters ewen Je breezeAccessVLMib 11 AverageReceiveSNR Applicable to SU RB Read only The Integer SiteSurvey 1 average Signal to Noise Ratio of received frames mea Le SiteSurvey 2 parameters ResetTrafficCounters Applicable to all units Resets the traffic Integer TrafficStatistics 1 counters reset 1 can
206. itself BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 200 File Download and Upload Using TFTP Examples 1 To upload the configuration file using a DOS based TFTP Client to an SU whose IP address is 206 25 63 65 enter tftp 206 25 63 65 put Suconf private cfg 2 To download the Operator Defaults file from the same unit enter tftp 206 25 63 65 get private cmr Suconf 3 To upload the Feature Upgrade file to the same unit enter tftp 206 25 63 65 put Suconf private fln 4 To upload the Country Code file from to same unit enter tftp 206 25 63 65 put Suconf private ccf Ed The Configuration File mechanism is common to BreezeACCESS VL and BreezeNET B product lines The Configuration File includes also parameters that are applicable only to BreezeNET B products Do not attempt to change the default values of these parameters BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 201 endix C Using the Set Factory Its Utility Appendix C Using the Set Factory Defaults Utility 204 The Set Factory Defaults utility is intended to enable management access to a unit in cases where such access is not possible due to wrong or unknown configuration of certain parameters This includes cases such as unknown Management VLAN ID and wrong management access filtering The utility accesses the unit by sending a special packet Access to the unit is based on its MAC address which must be entered in the Unit MAC address field The set unit defaults feature is only
207. itted to the wireless medium excluding retransmissions TotalTransmittedConcatenatedFramesDouble Applicable to all units Read only The TxFramesToWireless 6 total number of double concatenated frames that were successfully transmitted to the wireless medium excluding retransmissions TotalTransmittedConcatenatedFramesSingle Applicable to all units Read only The TxFramesToWireless 7 total number of single concatenated frames that were successfully transmitted to the wireless medium excluding retransmissions TotalTransmittedConcatenatedFramesMore Applicable to all units Read only The TxFramesToWireless 8 total number of concatenated frames with more than two data frames that were successfully transmitted to the wireless medium excluding retransmissions TotalRxFramesFromWireless Applicable to all units Read only The WirelessLinkCounters 2 total number of frames received from the wireless medium The count includes data and control and wireless management frames including beacons received from the AU The count does not include frames discarded internally bad frames and duplicate frames TotalRetransmittedFrames Applicable to all units Read only The WirelessLinkCounters 3 total number of retransmissions of data frames counts all unsuccessful transmissions retransmissions FramesDropped Applicable to all units Read only The WirelessLinkCounters 4 number of dropped frames The frames retransmitted to the
208. l Window Detached Antenna Specifications Frequency Range 5 150 5 875 GHz Gain 15dBi net excluding cable loss Azimuth Beamwidth 45 55 Elevation Beamwidth 10 12 ee BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Specifications 1 7 6 Environmental Table 1 23 Environmental Specifications me fut tts Operating temperature Outdoor units 40 C to 55 C Indoor equipment 0 C to 40 C Operating humidity Outdoor units 5 95 non condensing weather protected Indoor equipment 5 95 non condensing System Description page 34 page 36 Installing the Universal IDU Indoor Unit page 46 Installing the SU I page 48 Chapter 2 Installation 2 1 Installation Requirements This section describes all the supplies required to install the BreezeACCESS VL system components and the items included in each installation package E Installation requirements for SU I are provided in section 2 5 on page 48 2 1 1 Packing List 2 1 1 1 SU A E Subscriber Unit The SU A E installation kit includes the following components E IDU indoor unit with a wall mounting kit E Mains power cord E Any of the following Outdoor Units Table 2 1 Subscriber Unit ODU Types SU A ODU Vertically polarized high gain flat antenna integrated on the front panel New SU A ODU Vertically horizontally polarized high gain flat antenna integrated on the front panel The smaller size new SU A ODU is available in the 5 4 GH
209. l defines the activation mode of the Adaptive Noise Immunity mechanism Automatic or Manual The following parameters of the Noise Immunity Control mechanism are applicable only for Manual mode The default is Automatic Operation and Administration 145 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 2 18 2 Noise Immunity Level The Noise Immunity Level parameter sets the threshold for immunity against broadband interfering signals A higher value may reduce the number of errors at the expense of reduced sensitivity The range is from O to 4 In the current version only 0 and 4 should be used The default is O 4 2 6 2 18 3 Spur Immunity Level The Spur Immunity Level parameter sets the threshold for immunity against narrow band interfering signals such as spurious from signals at other frequencies A higher value may reduce the number of errors at the expense of reduced sensitivity The range is from 0 to 7 The default is O 4 2 6 2 18 4 OFDM Weak Signal The OFDM Week Signal parameter sets the threshold for immunity against interfering OFDM signals The available options are O or 1 A value of 1 means that the unit will immediately reject OFDM packets with a relatively SNR The default is 0 4 2 6 2 18 5 Pulse Detection Sensitivity The Pulse Detection Sensitivity parameter affects the Phy error count If it is set to Low than all Phy errors will be reported as regular Phy errors regardless of the signal level If
210. lable in the following frequency bands BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Introducing BreezeACCESS VL Table 1 1 Frequency Bands The available frequencies as well as other parameters depend on applicable local regulations The actual operating frequencies used by the system can be configured according to applicable radio regulations and specific deployment considerations A BreezeACCESS VL system comprises the following E Customer Premise Equipment CPE BreezeACCESS VL Subscriber Units SUs E Base Station Equipment BS BreezeACCESS VL Access Units and supporting equipment E Networking Equipment Standard Switches Routers supporting connections to the backbone and or Internet E Management Systems SNMP based Management Billing and Customer Care and other Operation Support Systems System Description Chapter 1 System Description 1 2 1 2 1 Base Station Equipment The Access Units installed at the Base Station site provide all the functionality necessary to communicate with the Subscriber Units and to connect to the backbone of the Service Provider There are 2 lines of Access Units with different architectures E Modular Base Station Equipment E Standalone Micro Cell Access Unit Modular Base Station Equipment The Base Station Equipment is based on the BS SH 3U chassis which is suitable for installation in 19 inch racks The chassis contains one or two Power Supply modules
211. ld wait for this AU BU after enable 2 it stopped transmitting due to radar na 255 detection before they starts scanning for other AUs BUs DFSClearRadarChannels Applicable to AU BU Integer DFSParameters 6 Clear Radar Detected and Adjacent cancel 1 to Radar channels after unit reset clearRadarChannels 2 Returns the unit to operate in default na 255 frequency Applicable to AU BU Applicable only when DFS option is on Displays the current channels defined in the sub band and their radar detection status DFSRadarDetectionChannelsEntry Applicable to AU BU DFSRadarDetectionChannelsTable 1 An entry in the DFS Radar Detection Channels Table DFSChannelldx Applicable to AU BU Read only Integer DFSRadarDetectionChannelsEntry 1 The index of the entry in the DFS Radar Detection Channels Table DFSChannelFrequency Applicable to AU BU with HW Integer DFSRadarDetectionChannelsEntry 2 revision B and lower for units with HW revision C and higher replaced by DFSChannelFrequency New to support a resolution of 0 5 MHz Read only The frequency in MHz of a channel in the DFS Radar Detection Channels Table DFSChannelRadarStatus Applicable to AU BU Integer DFSRadarDetectionChannelsEntry 3 The radar detection status of a radarFree 1 channel in the DFS Radar Detection adjacentToRadar 2 Channels Table radarDetected 3 DFSChannelFrequencyNew Applicable to AU BU Read only DisplayString DFSRadar
212. le Applicable to AU only Not applicable to BreezeNET B units Defines the action to be used by the Mac Address Deny List EE MacAddressDenyListTable 1 MacAddressDenyListTableldx MacAddressDenyListEntry 1 MacAddressDenyListld MacAddressDenyListEntry 2 MacAddressDenyListAdd MacAddressDenyList 2 MacAddressDenyListRemove MacAddressDenyList 3 NumberOfMacAddressesInDenyList MacAddressDenyList 4 MacAddressDenyListAction MacAddressDenyList 5 PortsControl BridgeParameters 11 EthernetPortControl PortsControl 1 Applicable to SU RB only Enable disable the Ethernet port When disabled only data frames are blocked Management frames are accepted Integer Range 1 to 100 MAC Address MAC Address MAC Address Integer Range 0 to 100 Na 255 Integer denyList 1 allowedList 2 na 255 Ports Control parameters Applicable to SU RB only Integer disable 1 enable 2 na 255 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 224 breezeAccessVLMib E 2 6 breezeAccessVLMib 6 parameters Air Interface Parameters ESSID ESSIDParameters 1 OperatorESSIDOption ESSIDParameters 2 OperatorESSID ESSIDParameters 3 RunTimeESSID ESSIDParameters 1 MaximumCellDistance Airlnterface 2 AIFS Airlnterface 3 WirelessTrapThreshold Airlnterface 4 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Applicable to all units The Extended
213. le Integer to units with SW version 2 0 or higher The lowest frequency in the subset to be used for scanning For 5 8 GHz products the range is 5740 to 5830 MHz using a 10 MHz resolution For 4 9GHz products the range is 4920 to 5080 MHz using a 10 MHz resolution For HW Revision C and above this leaf is not relevant shall return 0 Applicable to SU RB Not applicable Integer to units with SW version 2 0 or higher The lowest frequency in the subset to be used for scanning For 5 8 GHz products the range is 5740 to 5830 MHz using a 10 MHz resolution For 4 9G Hz products the range is 4920 to 5080 MHz using a 10 MHz resolution For HW Revision C and above this leaf is not relevant shall return 0 Applicable to all units For flexible Sub Bands only For units with version 2 0 and above this is a read only parameter The scanning step to be used for generating the frequency subset Applicable to all units Not applicable to SU RB with SW version 4 0 and higher Not accessible The Frequency Subset table that includes all frequencies from the selected Sub band Integer mhz 5 1 mhz 10 2 2 mhz 20 3 na 255 Applicable to all units Not applicable to SU RB with SW version 4 0 and higher Not accessible An entry in the Frequency Subset table BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Applicable to all units Not applicable Integer to SU RB with SW version 4 0 and higher Read only The inde
214. le Band the lower of the Burst Mode Time Interval AU SU 1 to the value defined in the 5 milliseconds or the Sub Band for Maximum Burst Duration milliseconds two values value of Maximum Burst Duration Adaptive Modulation Option AU SU Disable Enable No m Enable Minimum Interval Between AU SU 1 3600 seconds 4 seconds Yes Adaptive Modulation Messages Adaptive Modulation AU SU Normal Normal No Decision Threshold m High Concatenation Option AU SU Disable Enable No m Enable i oO no defined for the Sub BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 271 Appendix F Parameters Summary Parameter 1 mm Dm Defaut L ns Maximum Concatenated AU SU 256 to 2200 bytes for units 2200 for units Yes Frame Size with HW revision A or B with rev A or B 256 to 4032 bytes for units 4032 for units with HW revision C or with rev C or higher higher Applicable only if Burst Mode is supported by the Sub Band F 1 7 Service Parameters User Filtering Option SU Disable Disable Yes IP Protocol Only User Defined Addresses Only PPPoE Protocol Only lt start address gt to lt end address gt or lt base address gt mask lt mask gt SU m Disable DHCP Unicast Disable DHCP Yes m Enable DHCP Unicast Unicast SU 3 128 3072 Kbps SU 3 3072 SU 6 128 6016 Kbps SU 6 6016 SU 54 128 53888 Kbps SU 54 32896 SU I 128 6016 Kbps SU I 6016 SU 3 128 2048 Kbps SU 3 2048 SU 6 128 4096 Kbps SU
215. leting discrete IP addresses The menu includes the following options 4 2 6 3 6 1 Set Change Network Management IP Address Ranges The Set Change Network Management IP Address Ranges option enables defining updating up to 10 IP address ranges from which the unit can be managed if the Network Management Filtering option is enabled The default Network Management IP Address Range is 0 0 0 0 TO 0 0 0 0 all 10 ranges A range can be defined using a string that includes either a start and end address in the format lt start address gt to lt end address gt example 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 255 or a base address and a mask in the format lt base address gt mask lt mask gt example 192 168 1 1 mask 255 255 255 0 4 2 6 3 6 2 Delete Network Management IP Address Range The Delete Network Management IP Address Range option enables deleting IP address range entries from the Network Management IP Address Ranges list 4 2 6 3 6 3 Delete All Network Management IP Address Ranges The Delete All Network Management IP Address Ranges option enables deleting all entries from the Network Management IP Address Ranges list Operation and Administration 149 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 3 7 4 2 6 3 7 1 4 2 6 3 7 2 4 2 6 3 7 3 4 2 6 3 7 4 4 2 6 3 7 5 4 2 6 3 8 150 SNMP Traps The SNMP submenu enables or disables the transmission of SNMP Traps If this option is enabled up to 10 IP
216. llation kit includes the following components E BS PS AC power supply module E Mains power cord BS PS DC Power Supply Up to two BS PS DC power supply modules can be included in each Base Station chassis The BS PS DC installation kit includes the following components E BS PS DC power supply module Installation Chapter 2 Installation DC power cable 2 1 1 3 AU D E SA Standalone Access Unit The AU D E SA installation kit includes the following components IDU indoor unit with a wall mounting kit Mains power cord AU D E SA ODU outdoor unit Pole mounting kit for the AU D E SA ODU In AU D SA kits Antenna including pole mounting hardware RF cable 2 1 1 4 Optional Items Available from Alvarion IDU to ODU Category 5 Ethernet cable with a shielded RJ 45 connector crimped on one end and two shielded RJ 45 connectors available in different lengths For more details refer to section 2 1 2 Tilt Pole Mounting kit for the new SU A ODU A Y cable for connecting directly to the IDU COM of the new SU A ODU for configuration performance monitoring using a portable PC 2 1 1 5 Additional Installation Requirements The following items are also required to install the BreezeACCESS VL system components 32 Ethernet cable straight for connecting to a hub switch etc crossed for connecting directly to a PC s NIC Crimping tool for RJ 45 connectors Antenna for E model units supplied without an ante
217. llowing the next reset SW Version Download The SW Version Download submenu enables the optional downloading of a SW Version file from a remote FTP server The SW Version Download submenu includes the following options Execute FTP GET SW Version The Execute FTP GET SW Version option executes the SW Version FTP download according to the parameters defined below FTP SW Source Dir The FTP SW Source Dir option enables defining the source directory of the SW version file Valid values A string of up to 80 printable ASCII characters To clear the field press The default is an empty string FTP SW Version File Name The FTP SW Version File Name option enables defining the name of the SW version file in the FTP server Valid values A string of up to 20 printable ASCII characters An empty string is not allowed The default is VxWorks bz FTP Server IP Address The FTP Server IP Address option enables defining the IP address of the FTP server that is hosting the SW Version file The default is 10 0 0 253 FTP Gateway IP Address The FTP Gateway IP Address option enables defining the FTP default gateway address The default is 0 0 0 0 FTP User Name The FTP User Name option enables defining the user name to be used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the SW Version file Operation and Administration 97 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 3 7 98 Valid values A string of up to 18
218. lso in the Forwarding List to enable the relaying operation The VLAN Relaying menu provides the following options Operation and Administration 159 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 4 1 5 1 VLAN Relaying Support The VLAN Relaying Support option enables or disables the VLAN Relaying feature Available selections are Disable and Enable The default selection is Disable 4 2 6 4 1 5 2Add Relaying VLAN ID The Add Relaying VLAN ID option enables adding a VLAN ID to the VLAN Relaying List One VLAN ID can be entered at a time The maximum number of VLAN IDs in the VLAN Relaying List is 20 Valid values are 1 to 4094 4 2 6 4 1 5 3 Remove Relaying VLAN ID The Remove Relaying VLAN ID option enables removing a VLAN ID from the VLAN ID Relaying List Valid values are VID values from 1 to 4094 that are included in the VLAN Relaying List 4 2 6 4 1 5 4Show VLAN ID Relaying List The Show VLAN Relaying option displays the values of the VLAN IDs included in the VLAN Relaying List x If the VLAN ID Relaying List is empty and the VLAN Relaying Support is Enabled then all data frames relayed from the wireless link are discarded If VLAN Relaying Support and VLAN Forwarding Support are both enabled then all VLAN IDs configured in the Relaying List must also be configured in the Forwarding List 4 2 6 4 1 6 Service Provider VLAN ID SU only The Service Provider VLAN ID is applicable only when the VLAN Link Typ
219. lt SNMP Read Community is public The Event Log may also be uploaded to a remote FTP server The Event Log Menu includes the following options E Event Log Policy E Display Event Log E Erase Event Log E Event Load Upload 4 2 3 11 1 Event Log Policy The Event Log Policy determines the minimal severity level All events whose severity is equal to or higher than the defined severity are logged Valid values are Message MSG Level Warning WRN Level Error ERR Level Fatal FTL Level Log None The default selection is Warning Level severity 4 2 3 11 2 Display Event Log The Display Event Log option enables viewing how many events are logged and selecting the number of events to be displayed up to 1000 The display of each event includes the event time elapsed time since last reset the severity level and a message string The events are displayed according to the time at which they were generated with the most recent event displayed last first in first out 4 2 3 11 3 Erase Event Log The Erase Event Log option enables clearing the event log Operation and Administration 101 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 3 11 4 Event Log Upload The Event Log Upload submenu enables the optional uploading of the event log file to a remote FTP server The Event Log Upload submenu includes the following options E FTP Event Log Upload Execute The FTP event Log Upload Execute executes the upload
220. ltering If management filtering is enabled the unit can only be managed by stations with IP addresses matching one of the entries in either the Network Management IP Addresses list or in the Network Management IP Address Ranges list described below and that are connected to the unit via the defined port s The following options are available E Disable No IP address based filtering is configured E Activate IP Filter on Ethernet Port Applicable only if the Access to Network Management parameter is configured to either From Ethernet Only or From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link The unit can be managed from the Ethernet port only by stations with IP addresses matching one of the entries in the Set Network Management IP Addresses parameter If the Access to Network Management parameter is configured to From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link then no IP address based filtering is configured for the wireless port E Activate IP Filter on Wireless Link Port Applicable only if the Access to Network Management parameter is configured to either From Wireless Link Only or From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link The unit can be managed from the wireless port only by stations with IP addresses matching one of the entries in the Set Network Management IP Addresses parameter If the Access to Network Management parameter is configured to From Both Ethernet and Wireless Link then no IP address based filtering is configured for the Ethernet port E Activate IP
221. lts configuration excluding several parameters that are listed in Table 4 2 4 2 3 2 1 4 Set Partial Operator Defaults Select this option to reset the unit to the Operator Defaults configuration excluding the parameters that are required to maintain connectivity and management access The parameters that do not change after Set Partial Operator Defaults are listed in Table 4 3 Operation and Administration 95 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 3 2 1 5 Cancel Current Pending Request 4 2 3 2 2 4 2 3 3 4 2 3 4 4 2 3 5 96 After selecting one of the Set defaults options it will be executed after the next reset This option enables to cancel the pending request before execution provided the unit has not been reset yet Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults The Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults enables defining the current configuration of the unit as the Operator Defaults configuration Change Unit Name The Change Unit Name option enables changing the name of the unit which is also the system s name in the MIB2 The name of the unit is also used as the prompt at the bottom of each Monitor window Valid values A string of up to 32 printable ASCII characters The default unit name is an empty string Change Password The Change Password submenu enables changing the access password s The Change Password submenu is available only to users with Administrator access rights
222. ly or remotely using Telnet or SNMP management All parameters in the Basic Configuration menu are also available in the relevant sub menus of the Advanced Configuration menu The Basic Configuration menu enables to access the following parameter sets IP Parameters E IP Address E Subnet Mask E Default Gateway Address E DHCP Client Operation and Administration 103 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 4 1 2 104 DHCP Option Access to DHCP Refer to section 4 2 6 1 for a description of these parameters Air Interface Parameters E ESSID E Operator ESSID Parameters AU Operator ESSID Option Operator ESSID E Frequency Definition Select Sub Band AU if more than one is available Frequency AU User Defined Frequency Subsets SU E Best AU Parameters SU Best AU Support Preferred AU MAC Address E Cell Distance Parameters AU Cell Distance Mode Maximum Cell Distance Fairness Factor Per SU Distance Learning E ATPC Parameters ATPC Option E Transmit Power BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 4 1 3 4 2 4 1 4 4 2 4 1 5 4 2 5 E Maximum Tx Power SU E Tx Control AU E Antenna Gain Refer to section 4 2 6 2 for a description of these parameters Performance Parameters E Maximum Modulation Level SU Refer to section 4 2 6 5 for a description of these parameters Bridge Param
223. m Table 4 4 Authentication and Association Process Message SU Status Scanning A Beacon with correct ESSID au au SU Status Synchronized Authentication Request SU gt AU Not authenticated Authentication Successful AU gt SU Authenticated SU Status Authenticated Association Request SU gt AU Authenticated Association Successful AU gt SU Associated SU Status Associated S The SNR measured at the SU The Unit Name of the SU The SW version of the SU The Unit Type of the SU Distance In addition a summary table displays information about the Forwarding Database Bridging Info The database includes the following information The current number of entries This is the number of currently associated SUs BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 114 Menus and Parameters There is no aging algorithm for associated SUs An SU is only removed from the list of associated SUs under the following conditions E A SNAP frame is received from another AU indicating that the SU is now associated with the other AU HR The SU failed to respond to 50 consecutive frames transmitted by the AU and is considered to have aged out The aging time specified for entries in these table There is no aging time for Association Info entries The maximum number of entries permitted for this table which is specified by the Maximum Number of Associations parameter The default value of the M
224. maximum allowed number of retransmissions without being acknowledged DataFramesSubmittedToBridge Submitted frames counters WirelessLinkCounters 5 DataFramesSubmittedViaHighQueue Applicable to all units Read only The Counter 32 DataFramesSubmittedToBridge 1 number of data frames submitted to the internal bridge via the high priority queue for transmission to the wireless Counter 32 Counter 32 Counter 32 Counter 32 Counter 32 Counter 32 Counter 32 medium DataFramesSubmittedViaMidQueue Applicable to all units Read only The Counter 32 DataFramesSubmittedToBridge 2 number of data frames submitted to the internal bridge via the mid priority queue for transmission to the wireless medium BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 252 breezeAccessVLMib DataFramesSubmittedViaLowQueue DataFramesSubmittedToBridge 3 TotalNoOfDataFramesSubmitted DataFramesSubmittedToBridge 4 TotalRecievedDataFrames WirelessLinkCounters 6 RecievedBadFrames WirelessLinkCounters 7 NoOfDuplicateFramesDiscarded WirelessLinkCounters 8 InternallyDiscardedMirCir WirelessLinkCounters 9 TotalRxConcatenatedFramesDouble WirelessLinkCounters 10 TotalRxConcatenatedFramesSingle WirelessLinkCounters 11 TotalRxConcatenatedFramesMore WirelessLinkCounters 12 TrafficStatistics 4 event counters WirelessLinkEvents 1 event counters DroppedFrameEvents TxEvents 1
225. maximum modulation level suitable for the current radio link quality at any given moment The decisions made by the Adaptive Modulation Algorithm for the modulation level to be used are based on multiple parameters including information on received signal quality SNR that is received periodically from the destination unit the time that has passed since last transmission to the relevant unit and the recent history of successful and unsuccessful transmissions retransmissions In the AU the decision algorithm is performed separately for each SU The transmission retransmission mechanism operates as follows 1 Each new frame first transmission attempt will be transmitted at a modulation level selected by the Adaptive Modulation algorithm 2 If first transmission trial has failed the frame will be retransmitted at the same modulation level up to the maximum number of retransmission attempts defined by the Number of HW Retries parameter The Adaptive Modulation Parameters menu includes the following parameters Adaptive Modulation Option The Adaptive Modulation Option enables or disables the Adaptive Modulation decision algorithm When enabled the algorithm supports decrease increase of transmission s modulation levels between the lowest possible level to the value configured for the Maximum Modulation Level parameter If the Maximum Modulation Level is set at the lowest possible level the Adaptive Modulation algorithm has no effect
226. me Jos fsa 56 se se foe fee fas Ce ua vine a ar ea rea rsa ar ass asa rasan ence Jo 7 oa re veo 220 ea oe The throughput results are for net TCP traffic excluding protocols overheads BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 278 Low Throughput Problems Recommended Maximum Modulation Level Maximum Modulation Level SNR gt 23 dB 21 dB lt SNR lt 23 dB 16 dB lt SNR lt 21 dB 10 dB lt SNR lt 13 dB 8 dB lt SNR lt 10 dB 13 dB lt SNR lt 1648 7 dB lt SNR lt 8 dB The maximum supported value depends on the unit s HW revision and on the Max Modulation Level according to the Sub Band BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 279
227. n 10 100 BaseT 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 with 2 embedded LEDs Cable connection to a PC crossed Cable connection to a hub straight RADIO 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 with 2 embedded LEDs AU D BS ODU INDOOR 10 100BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 protected by a waterproof sealing assembly N Type jack 50 ohm lightning protected BS PS AC AC IN 3 PIN AC power plug BS PS DC 48 VDC 3 pin DC D Type 3 power pins plug Amphenol 717TWA3W3PHP2V4RRM6 N Type jack ona 1 5m cable in the Gr 3 SS 1 7 5 3 3 Electrical Table 1 17 Electrical Specifications Modular Base Station Equipment 240W max for a fully equipped chassis 1 PS 6 AU BS PS AC AC power input 85 265 VAC 47 65 Hz DC power output 54 V 3 3 V 7 BS PS DC DC power input 48 VDC nominal 34 to 72 10 A max DC power output 54 V 3 3 V BS AU 3 3 VDC 54 VDC from the power supply module s via the back plane AU D BS ODU 54 VDC from the BS AU over the indoor outdoor Ethernet cable AU D BS IDU ODU Power consumption 30W System Description Chapter 1 System Description 1 7 5 4 Standalone Access Unit 1 7 5 4 1 Mechanical Table 1 18 Mechanical Specifications Stand Alone Access Unit wa O Dimensions em Weight ka General An IDU indoor unit and an AU D BS ODU outdoor unit connected to a detached antenna IDU PS1073 Plastic box black desktop or wall 14x6 6x3 5 mountable 2 3 5 pole mountable 43 6 x 25x 1 0 2 3 5 pole mountable 55 x 25x
228. n Ethernet activity connectivity indication Wireless Link traffic Indication Functionality Green Power is available and self test passed Blinking Amber Testing not ready for operation Red Self test failed Fatal error Green Ethernet link between the SU I and the data equipment is detected no activity Blinking Green Ethernet connectivity is OK with traffic on the port Blinking rate proportional to traffic rate Red No Ethernet connectivity between the SU I and the data equipment Green Unit is associated with an AU no wireless link activity Blinking Green Data received or transmitted on the wireless link Blinking rate is proportional to traffic rate Off Wireless link disabled 79 Chapter 3 Commissioning Table 3 9 SU I SNR Bar LED Functionality LEDs 2 to 3 green are On LEDs 2 to 4 green are On LEDs 2 to 5 green are On LEDs 2 to 6 green are On LEDs 2 to 7 green are On LEDs 2 to 8 green are On LEDs 2 to 9 green are On LEDs 2 to 9 green and 10 orange are On 3 5 4 Verifying the Ethernet Connection Modular Base station After connecting the unit to an Ethernet outlet verify that the Ethernet Integrity Indicator which is the yellow LED embedded in the 10 100 BaseT connector is on This indicates that the unit is connected to an Ethernet segment The Ethernet Activity Indicator which is the green embedded LED should blink whenever the unit receives
229. n 4 0 July 2006 Default value updated SW Version 4 0 July 2006 New feature SW Version 4 0 July 2006 New feature SW Version 4 0 July 2006 New display of existing gateways when DRAP is enabled SW Version 4 0 July 2006 New feature BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Document History Topic FTP Client IP Address Sections 4 2 3 6 4 2 3 7 FTP Server IP Address Sections 4 2 3 6 4 2 3 7 4 2 3 11 4 Number of HW Retries Section 4 2 6 5 7 Ethernet packet length Section 4 2 5 1 1 Basic Parameters Table Table 3 1 Parameters that are not reset to default value after Set Complete Factory Operator Defaults Table 4 2 Parameters that are not reset to default value after Set Partial Factory Operator Defaults Table 4 3 Basic Configuration Menu Section 4 2 4 MIB Appendix E Parameters Summary Appendix F Using the Feature License Web Application Description Changed functionality read only set to unit s IP Address Changed default to 10 0 0 253 Maximum value was changed from 15 to 14 Updated maximum length Updated according to applicable changes new removed parameters Updated according to applicable changes new removed parameters Updated according to applicable changes new removed parameters Updated according to applicable changes new removed parameters Updated according to applicable changes new removed paramete
230. n Both Ethernet and Wireless Ports Set Network Management IP AU SU IP address 0 0 0 0 Address all 10 entries Set Change Network lt start address gt to lt end 0 0 0 0 TO 0 0 0 0 Management IP Address address gt all 10 entries Ranges or lt base address gt mask lt mask gt Send SNMP Traps AU SU Disable Disable Yes m Enable BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 269 Appendix F Parameters Summary remm umt Range lge Run Time SNPM Traps IP Destination AU SU IP address 0 0 0 0 No all 10 entries SNMP Traps Community AU SU Up to 14 printable ASCII public No characters all 10 entries F 1 5 Bridge Parameters VLAN Link Type AU SU m Hybrid Link Hybrid Link No H Trunk Link H Access Link only in SU H Service Provider Link VLAN Forwarding ID AU SU 1 4094 VLAN Relaying ID AU 1 4094 Empty list up to 20 entries VLAN Priority Data Management VLAN QinQ Protocol 8100 hex Ethertype Service Provider VLAN ID 1 4094 Ethernet Broadcast Filtering SU H Disable Disable Options m On Ethernet Port Only H On Wireless Port Only m On Both Wireless and Ethernet Ports DHCP Broadcast Override SU m Disable Disable Seege HE PPPoE Broadcast Override SU H Disable Disable No e e OO lt br n lt oO D lt oO n ARP Broadcast Override m Disable Enable Filter H Enable Ethernet Broadcast Multicast AU SU H Disable Limiter Option m Limit
231. nabling disabling the Adaptive Modulation algorithm Integer 20 4032 bytes 20 1600 for units running SW version below 3 0 20 3400 for units with SW version 3 0 na 65535 Integer 0 7 15 31 63 127 255 511 1023 na 65535 BU RB 14 28 will return 65535 Integer 7 15 31 63 127 255 511 1023 na 65535 BU RB 14 28 will return 65535 Integer Range 1 to 8 Range depends on HW version and Min Max Modulation Levels as defined by Sub Band Integer Range 1 to 8 Range depends on HW version and Min Max Modulation Levels as defined by Sub Band DisplayString 1 Disregard History to 32 Integer 1 14 for units with SW version 4 0 and higher 1 15 for units with SW version below 4 0 Adaptive Modulation Parameters Po Integer disable 1 enable 2 249 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB SoftwareRetrySupport AdaptiveModulationParams 2 NumberOfSoftwareRetries AdaptiveModulationParams 3 MinimumIntervalBetweenAdaptiveModulation AlgorithmMessages AdaptiveModulationParams 4 AdaptiveModulationDecisionThresholds AdaptiveModulationParams 5 BurstMode PerformanceParams 10 BurstModeOption BurstMode 1 Burstinterval BurstMode 2 ConcatenationParameters PerformanceParams 11 ConcatenationOption ConcatenationParameters 1 Applicable to all units Software Retry mechanism Enabled when the Adaptive Modulation algor
232. ncluding duplicate frames Counter 32 Counter 32 Counter 32 Counter 32 Counter 32 Counter 32 Counter 32 Applicable to all units The number Counter 32 frames that were dropped because they were retransmitted to the maximum allowed number of retransmissions without being acknowledged Applicable to all units Not applicable for units running SW version 3 0 and higher The number of frames that were delayed because the SW retry algorithm was activated on a previous frame designated for the same recipient Applicable to all units The number of frames whose transmission was aborted because the rate of submitting frames for transmission exceeds the available transmission capability Counter 32 Counter 32 253 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB OtherTxEvents Applicable to all units The number of Tx TxEvents 4 events due to problems other than those Counter 32 represented by the other Tx Events counters TotalTxEvents Counter 32 TxEvents 5 of Tx events WirelessLinkEvents 2 errors counters PhyErrors Applicable to all units Read only The Counter 32 RxErrors 1 number of unidentified signals CRCEvents Applicable to all units Read only The Counter 32 RxEvents 2 number of frames received from the wireless medium containing CRC errors OverrunEvents Applicable to all units Read only The Counter 32 RxEvents 3 number of frames that were discarded because the receive rate ex
233. ncy Selection mechanism for identification and avoidance of channels with radar activity is supported E Minimum HW Revision Support The minimum HW revision required to support the Sub Band New Country Code files can be uploaded remotely using TFTP see Appendix B 4 2 2 5 Show All Parameters The Show All Parameters menu is a read only menu that displays the current values of all status and configuration parameters Es The values of some security related parameters including the encryption Keys ESSID and l Operator ESSID are available only with Administrator access rights 4 2 3 Unit Control Menu The Unit Control menu enables configuring control parameters for the unit The Unit Control menu includes the following options E Reset Unit E Default Settings E Change Unit Name E Change Password E Flash Memory Control E SW Version Download E Configuration File Upload Download E Log Out Timer BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 90 Menus and Parameters 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 2 4 2 3 2 1 E Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode E Change System Location E Event Log Menu E Feature Upgrade Reset Unit The Reset Unit option enables resetting the unit After reset any modifications made to the system parameters are applied Default Settings The Set defaults submenu enables resetting the system parameters to a predefined set of defaults or saving the current configuration as the set of Operator Defaults The Defaul
234. nd analyzing the information contained in the transmissions of the AU to estimate the activity of other SUs served by the AU The target is to minimize collisions in the wireless medium resulting from attempts of more than one unit to transmit at the same time The system uses an exponential Back off algorithm to resolve contention between several units that want to access the wireless medium The method requires each station to choose a random number N between 0 and a given number C each time it wants to access the medium The unit will attempt to access the medium only after a time equal to DIFS for more details refer to section 4 2 6 2 11 plus N time slots always checking if a different unit has accessed the medium before Each time the unit tries to transmit and a collision occurs the maximum number C used for the random number selection will be increased to the next available value The available values are 7 15 31 63 127 255 511 and 1023 The Minimum Contention Window parameter is the first maximum number C used in the back off algorithm The higher the number of SUs served by the same AU the higher the Minimum Contention Window for each SU should be In addition when the Wireless Link Prioritization Option is enabled the Minimum and Maximum Contention Window parameters can be configured to provide certain units with an advantage over other units The available values are 0 7 15 31 63 127 255 511 and 1023 A value of O mean
235. nd SU s Distance from the AU X An SU that is included in the Deny List Sp Special 7 addresses that are always present including gt The MAC address of the AU which appears twice as it is learned from both the Ethernet and wireless ports gt The MAC address of the internal Operating System stack which also appears twice gt Alvarion s Multicast address 01 20 D6 00 00 01 which also appears twice The system treats this address as a Broadcast address gt The Ethernet Broadcast address FF FF FF FF FF FF In addition a summary table displays information about the Forwarding Database Bridging Info and the Associated Subscriber Units Database Association Info Each database includes the following information 112 The current number of entries For Bridging Info this includes the Et Ethernet and the Vp Virtual ports entries For Association Info this is the number of the currently associated SUs BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters x There is no aging algorithm for associated SUs An SU is only removed from the list of associated SUs under the following conditions E A SNAP frame is received from another AU indicating that the SU is now associated with the other AU E The SU failed to respond to 50 consecutive frames transmitted by the AU and is considered to have aged out The aging time specified for entries in these tables The aging time for Bridging Info is as spec
236. nded minimum distance between any two antennas serving adjacent sectors is 2 meters The recommended minimum distance between two antennas serving opposite cells installed back to back is 5 meters E The antenna of the SU integrated or external should be installed to provide a direct or near line of sight with the Base Station antenna The antenna should be aligned to face the Base Station E In some cases it might be necessary to up down tilt the antenna An optional Tilt accessory for the ODU providing a tilt range of 15 is available from Alvarion The tilt option might be necessary to either improve the link conditions or if the SU is too close to the Base Station to reduce the receive signals strength As a rule of thumb if the SU is located at a distance of less than 300 meters from the Base Station it is recommended to up tilt the antenna by approximately 10 to 15 especially in line of sight conditions to avoid saturation of the receivers by too strong signals BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Equipment Positioning Guidelines E The indoor equipment should be installed as close as possible to the location where the indoor to outdoor cable enters the building The location of the indoor equipment should take into account its connection to a power outlet and the customer s equipment Installation Chapter 2 Installation 2 3 z 2 3 1 x 36 Installing the Outdoor Unit The following
237. nds is 20 Distance km 2 3 3 or 20 Distance miles 2 5 E To ensure fairness in the contention back off algorithm between SUs located at different distances from the AU the size of the time slot should also take into account the one way propagation delay The size of the time slot of all units in the cell should be proportional to the distance from the AU of the farthest SU served by it The Cell Distance Mode parameter in the AU defines the method of computing distances When set to Manual the Maximum Cell Distance parameter should be configured with the estimated distance of the farthest SU served by the AU When set to Automatic the AU uses a special algorithm to estimate its distance from each of the SUs it serves determine which SU is located the farthest and use the estimated distance of the farthest SU as the maximum cell distance The value of the maximum cell distance parameter either computed or configured manually is transmitted in the beacon messages to all SUs served by the AU and is used by all units to calculate the size of the time slot that must be the same for all units in the same sector When the Per SU Distance Learning option is enabled the AU uses the re association message to send to each SU its estimated distance from the AU The per SU distance is used to calculate the ACK timeout to be used by the SU When the Per SU Distance Learning option is disabled or if it cannot be used because the SU uses a previous SW v
238. net activity connectivity indication glo W Link Wireless Link traffic Indication Functionality Green Power is available and self test passed Blinking Amber Testing not ready for operation Red Self test failed Fatal error Green Ethernet link between the SU I and the data equipment is detected no activity Blinking Green Ethernet connectivity is OK with traffic on the port Blinking rate proportional to traffic rate Red No Ethernet connectivity between the SU I and the data equipment Green Unit is associated with an AU no wireless link activity Blinking Green Data received or transmitted on the wireless link Blinking rate is proportional to traffic rate Off Wireless link disabled Installation 49 Chapter 2 Installation SNR bar Description Received signal strength Indication Functionality Red LED Signal is too low SNR lt 4dB 8 green LEDs Quality of the received signal Orange LED Signal is too high SNR gt 50dB ETH RJ 45 Connector 48V DC DC Power Jack Connection to the user s LAN PC H Cable connection to a hub switch router Crossed WR Cable connection to a PC Straight Connection to detached antenna Connection to Power Adapter After power up the SIGNAL LEDs illuminates for a few seconds until self test is finished 2 5 3 Installation Guidelines The unit can be placed on a desk
239. nge is 5740 to 5830 MHz using a 10 MHz resolution For units with SW version 2 0 and up the range is as defined in the selected Sub Band SubBandSelect Sub Band Selection parameters WE FrequencyDefinition 10 SelectSubBandIindex SubBandSelect 1 Applicable to all units Read only for SU RB with SW version 4 0 and higher The ID of the sub band used by the unit Integer DFSParameters DFS Parameters Applicable to ss FrequencyDefinition 11 AU BU DFSOption DFSParameters 1 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Applicable to AU BU Enabling disabling the DFS Algorithm Not applicable if DFS Option is not supported by the current Sub Band Integer disable 1 enable 2 na 255 231 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB DFSChannelCheckTime Applicable to AU BU Integer DFSParameters 3 Defines the time the unit checks the Range 1 to 3600 seconds channel for presence of radar signals and does not transmit after power up or association or after moving to a new channel due to detecting radar in the previously used channel DFSChannelAvoidancePeriod Applicable to AU BU Integer DFSParameters 4 Defines the time after detecting Range 1 to 60 minutes radar signals in a channel of avoiding using the channel or adjacent channels in accordance with the bandwidth DFSSuWaitingOption Applicable to AU BU Integer DFSParameters 5 Defines whether the associated SUs disable 1 may shou
240. nit Control Parameters egene edeergeboeugeeee Eeer eng 266 F2 MIP LAN ES case ah ae se cae cee ee ek 267 F 1 3 Air Interface Parameters AAA 267 F 1 4 Network Management Parameters 2 cccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeetenes 269 F 1 5 Bridge Parameters E 270 F 1 6 Performance Etage geiert EE eege egeteg 271 F 1 7 Service Parameters degen 272 XX BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Contents e EE 273 Appendix G TROUDISSNOOCING DEE 275 G 1 Ethernet Port Connection ProblemS sssssnnssnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnne 276 G 2 SU Association Problems s ssnnsssunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 277 G 3 Low Throughput Problem sueseeeegereuee Geesen 278 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual xxi Figures Figure 2 1 Threaded Holes Grooves ccccccceeeececeeeeecceeeeaeeeeeeeeceaeeesaaeeeeaaeseeaeeesaaeseeaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseaeeeeaes 37 Figure 2 2 3 Pole Installation Using Special Campe 37 Figure 2 3 Back View of the new SU A ODU oe cecccccceeeeeeeeceee eee eeeeeaaeeeeeeecaeeecaaeeeeaaeseeeeeesaeeeeaaeseeeeeeeas 38 Figure 2 4 New SU A ODU Pole Installation Using the Special Clamp Vertical Polarization 39 Figure 2 5 New SU A ODU Pole Installation Using the Special Clamp Horizontal Polarization 40 Figure 2 6 New SU A ODU Pole Installation Using the Tilt Accessory Vertical Polarization 4 41 Figu
241. nk Capability feature enables to adapt the configuration of the unit according to the capabilities of other relevant unit s to ensure optimal operation The Link Capability submenu includes the following options Show Link Capability General Select this option to view information on general parameters of relevant units For each relevant unit identified by its MAC address the following details are displayed Operation and Administration 117 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration HwVer the hardware version of the unit CpldVer The version of the Complex Programmable Logic Device CPLD used in the unit This parameter is available only in AUs displaying the CPLD version in the relevant SU Country The 3 or 4 digits country code supported by the unit SwVer The SW version used by the unit This parameter is available only in SUs displaying the SW version in the relevant AU BootVer The Boot Version of the unit This parameter is available only in AUs displaying the Boot version in the relevant SU 4 2 5 6 2 Show Link Capability Wireless Link Configuration Select this option to view information on current wireless link parameters of relevant units For each relevant unit identified by its MAC address the following details are displayed ATPC Option Enable or Disable Adaptive Modulation Option Enable or Disable Burst Mode Option Enable or Disable DFS Option Enable or Disable This parameter i
242. nna Ground cables with an appropriate termination Mains plug adapter or termination plug if the power plug on the supplied AC power cord does not fit local power outlets BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Installation Requirements 2 1 2 E E Portable PC with Ethernet card and Telnet software or BreezeCONFIG for BreezeACCESS VL application and a crossed Ethernet cable E Installation tools and materials including appropriate means e g a pole for installing the outdoor unit Indoor to Outdoor Cables The length of the indoor to outdoor Ethernet cable should not exceed 90 meters The length of the Ethernet cable connecting the indoor unit to the user s equipment together with the length of the Indoor to Outdoor cable should not exceed 100 meters Use only Category 5E Ethernet cables from approved manufacturers listed in Table 2 2 Consult with Alvarion specialists on the suitability of other cables Table 2 2 Approved Category 5E Ethernet Cables Manutacturer art umber 612098 H5E 00481 8393204101 Superior Cables Ltd www superior cables com HES Cabling Systems www hescs com Teldor www teldor com Southbay Holdings Limited 11th FI 15 Lane 347 Jong Jeng Rd Shin Juang City Taipei County Taiwan R O C Attn Eva Lin Tel 886 2 2832 3339 Fax 886 2 2206 0081 E mail eva south bay com tw TSM2404A0D In case of missing information product specifications ordering information et
243. ns are E Force 10 Mbps and Half Duplex E Force 10 Mbps and Full Duplex E Force 100 Mbps and Half Duplex E Force 100 Mbps and Full Duplex E Auto Negotiation 10 100 Mbps and Half Full Duplex The default is Auto Negotiation 10 100 Mbps and Half Full Duplex 4 2 3 10 Change System Location The Change System Location option enables changing the system location of the unit which is also the sys location in MIB2 The System Location is also displayed as a part of the Monitor menu s header Valid values A string of up to 35 printable ASCII characters The default system location is an empty string BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 100 Menus and Parameters 4 2 3 11 Event Log Menu The Event Log Menu enables controlling the event log feature The event log is an important debugging tool and a flash memory sector is dedicated for storing it Events are classified according to their severity level Message lowest severity Warning Error or Fatal highest severity The severity level of events that should be saved in the Event Log is configurable Events from the configured severity and higher are saved and may be displayed upon request Log history can be displayed up to the full number of current active events In the log an event is defined as active as long as it has not been erased a maximum of 1000 events may be stored The Event Log may be read using TFTP with remote file name lt SNMP Read Community gt log the defau
244. ns from the specific SU The average calculation takes into account the previous calculated average thus reducing the effect of short temporary changes in link conditions The weight of history the previous value in the formula used for calculating the average SNR is determined BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 2 8 1 by a configurable parameter In addition the higher the time that has passed since the last calculation the lower the impact of history on the calculated average If the average SNR is not in the configured target range the AU transmits to the SU a power up or a power down message The target is that each SU will be received at an optimal level or as high or low as possible if the optimal range cannot be reached because of specific link conditions Each time that the SU tries to associate with the AU following either a reset or loss of synchronization it will initiate transmissions using its Transmit Power parameters If after a certain time the SU does not succeed to synchronize with the AU it will start increasing the transmit power level In an AU the maximum supported transmit power is typically used to provide maximum coverage However there may be a need to decrease the transmitted power level in order to support relatively small cells and to minimize the interference with the operation of neighboring cells or for compliance with local regulatory requirements In some cases the max
245. nt frame tagging 1 4094 65535 no VLAN tagging CHL ANGupport 4 VlanForwardingSupport Applicable to all units Enables or disables Integer VLANForwarding 1 the VLAN forwarding feature Applicable disable 1 to Trunk and Service Provider links only enable 2 na 255 VianForwardingTable Applicable to all units A table of up to 20 VLANForwarding 2 VLAN IDs of devices to which data frames are forwarded when the VLAN Forwarding feature is Enabled Applicable to Trunk and Service Provider links only Not accessible VianForwardingEntry Applicable to all units A VLAN Forwarding VlanForwardingTable 1 Table entry Applicable to Trunk and Service Provider links only Not accessible VianForwardingTableldx Applicable to all units A read only table Integer VlanForwardingEntry 1 index for a VLAN entry in the VLAN 1 20 Forwarding Table BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 221 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB VianidForwarding Applicable to all units The list of VLAN Integer VlanForwardingEntry 2 ID s in the VLAN ID Forwarding Table To 1 4094 remove a VLAN ID SET the 0 remove entry corresponding entry to 0 To add a new VLAN ID SET an entry which is now 0 VLANRelaying VLAN Relaying feature parameters Not CHL ANGupport 5 applicable to BreezeNET B products VlanRelayingSupport Applicable to AU only Not applicable to Integer VLANRelaying 1 BreezeNET B products Enables or
246. nteger AUAdbEntry 28 value configured in the relevant SU for the MIR Downlink parameter AdbCirMaxDelay Applicable to AU Not applicable to Integer AUAdbEntry 29 BreezeNET B products Read only The value configured in the relevant SU for the Maximum Delay parameter AdbDistance Applicable to AU BU Read only The Integer AUAdbEntry 30 measured distance between the 1 means any distance relevant SU RB and the AU BU In below 2 km Kilometers AdbHwRevision Applicable to AU BU Read only The Integer AUAdbEntry 31 HW Revision of the relevant SU RB hwRevisionA 1 hwRevisionB 2 hwRevisionC 3 4 5 hwRevisionD hwRevisionE na 255 AUAdbEntry 32 CPLD Version of the relevant SU RB AUAdbEntry 33 Country Code of the relevant SU RB AUAdbEntry 34 Boot Version of the relevant SU RB AdbAtpcOption Applicable to AU BU Read only The AUAdbEntry 35 current ATPC Option of the relevant Integer disable 1 SU RB enable 2 na 255 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 257 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB AdbAdapModOption AUAdbEntry 36 AdbBurstModeOption AUAdbEntry 37 AdbConcatenationOption AUAdbEntry 39 AdbSecurityMode AUAdbEntry 41 AdbAuthOption AUAdbEntry 42 AdbDataEncryptOption AUAdbEntry 43 AdbAge AUAdbEntry 44 Applicable to AU BU Read only The current Adaptive Modulation Option of the relevant SU RB Integer
247. ntention Window E Maximum Contention Window HM Multicast Modulation Level AU only E Maximum Modulation Level E Average SNR Memory Factor E Number of HW Retries E Burst Mode E Adaptive Modulation Algorithm HM Concatenation Parameters RTS Threshold The RTS Threshold parameter defines the minimum frame size that requires an RTS CTS Request To Send Clear To Send handshake Frames whose size is smaller than the RTS Threshold value are transmitted directly to the wireless link without being preceded with RTS frames Setting this parameter to a value larger than the maximum frame size eliminates the RTS CTS handshake for frames transmitted by this unit The available values range from 20 to 4032 bytes for units with HW revision C and 20 to 2200 for units with HW revision A or B The default value is 60 bytes for SUs For AUs with HW revision C the default is 4032 and for AUs with HW revision A or B the default is 2200 It is recommended that these values be used to ensure that RTS CTS is never used in the AU BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 5 2 A 4 2 6 5 3 Minimum Contention Window The Minimum Contention Window parameter determines the time that a unit waits from the time it has concluded that there are no detectable transmissions by other units until it attempts to transmit The BreezeACCESS VL system uses a special mechanism based on detecting the presence of a carrier signal a
248. nu provides access to all parameters including the parameters available through the Basic Configuration menu The Advanced Configuration menu enables accessing the following menus E IP Parameters E Air Interface Parameters E Network Management Parameters E Bridge Parameters E Performance Parameters E Service Parameters E Security Parameters IP Parameters The IP Parameters menu enables defining IP parameters for the selected unit and determining its method of IP parameter acquisition The IP Parameters menu includes the following options E IP Address E Subnet Mask E Default Gateway Address E DHCP Client IP Address The IP Address parameter defines the IP address of the unit The default IP address is 10 0 0 1 Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask parameter defines the subnet mask for the IP address of the unit The default mask is 255 0 0 0 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 1 3 4 2 6 1 4 4 2 6 1 4 1 Default Gateway Address The Default Gateway Address parameter defines the IP address of the unit s default gateway The default value for the default gateway address is 0 0 0 0 DHCP Client The DHCP Client submenu includes parameters that define the method of IP parameters acquisition The DHCP Client submenu includes the following options E DHCP Option M Access to DHCP DHCP Option The DHCP Option displays the current status of the DHCP support and allows selecting
249. o SU RB Read only The Country Code of the AU BU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU BU Table Applicable to SU RB Read only The SW Version of the AU BU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU BU Table Applicable to SU RB Read only The current ATPC Option of the AU BU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU BU Table Applicable to SU RB Read only The current Adaptive Modulation Option of the AU BU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU BU Table Applicable to SU RB Read only The current Burst Mode Option of the AU BU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU BU Table Applicable to SU RB Read only The current DFS Option of the AU BU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU BU Table Applicable to SU RB Read only The current Concatenation Option of the AU BU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU BU Table Applicable to SU Not applicable for BreezeNET B and BreezeACCESS products Read only The current Country Code Learning by SU option of the AU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU Table Applicable to SU RB Read only The current Security Mode of the AU BU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU BU Table Integer full 1 notFull 2 na 255 Integer Integer HwRevisionA 1 HwRevisionB 2 HwRevisionC 3 na 255 Integer DisplayString Integer disable 1 enable 2 na 255 Integer disable 1 enable 2
250. ocked upon trying to enable it when using WEP for data encryption This limitation does not apply to units with HW Revision C The Burst Mode parameters are not applicable when the Wireless Link Prioritization Option is enabled Burst Mode Option The Burst Mode Option enables or disables the Burst Mode operation The default is Enable Operation and Administration 173 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 5 8 2 Burst Mode Time Interval 4 2 6 5 9 4 2 6 5 9 1 174 The Burst Mode Time Interval defines the burst size which is the time in which data frames are sent immediately without contending for the wireless medium The range is 1 to the value of the Maximum Burst Duration defined for the Sub Band The default is 5 milliseconds or the value of Maximum Burst Duration defined for the Sub Band the lower of the two values Adaptive Modulation Algorithm Multi Rate The Adaptive Modulation Algorithm enables adapting the modulation level of transmitted data to the prevailing conditions of the applicable radio link The algorithm provides Access Units with simultaneous adaptive support for multiple Subscriber Units at different modulation levels as transmission s modulation level decisions are made separately for each associated SU Link quality fluctuates due to various environmental conditions Dynamically switching between the possible modulation levels increases the probability of using the
251. of broadcast multicast packets will be less than the maximum The trap will inform the user how many packets were discarded in the last period The Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter menu allows viewing and setting the following parameters Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter Option The Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter Option defines the limiter s functionality The available options are E Disable No limiter E Limit only Broadcast Packets E Limit Multicast Packets that are not Broadcasts E Limit All Multicast Packets including broadcast The default selection is Disable Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter Threshold The Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter Threshold defines the maximum number of packets per second that will pass the limiter when it is enabled The range is from O to 204800 packets second The default is 50 packets Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter Send Trap Interval The Ethernet Broadcast Multicast Limiter Send Trap Interval defines the minimum time in minutes between two consecutive transmissions of the trap indicating the number of packets that were dropped by the limiter since the previous trap or since the time that the limit has been exceeded BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters The range is from 1 to 60 minutes The default is 5 minutes 4 2 6 4 4 Bridge Aging Time The Bridge Aging Time parameter enables selecting the bridge aging time for learned addresses o
252. of the antenna Use only the torque key supplied with the antenna Do not over tighten Do not use a wrench or a similar tightening tool Wegen EEN em gg Figure 2 17 Window Mounting the Antenna m BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Installing the SU I 2 5 5 4 Window Mount with Rotation Capability The installation kit includes the following 4 PHK40 16PT screws 1 2 M4 washers 2 2 rotation bars 3 and 2 suction cups 4 1 Attach the rotation bars to the antenna and the suction cups to the rotation bars Refer to Figure 2 18 for directions 2 Determine the location of the antenna on the glass Attach it to the window by pressing the suction cups onto the glass 3 Connect the antenna cable to the connector located on the bottom side of the antenna Use only the torque key supplied with the antenna Do not over tighten Do not use a wrench or a similar tightening tool 4 Rotate the antenna left or right so the domed surface of the antenna is facing the direction of the Base Station Check the received Signal LEDs to ensure the antenna is aimed correctly Installation Chapter 2 Installation Figure 2 18 Window Mounting with Rotation Capability e BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment 2 6 2 6 1 Installing the Modular Base Station Equipment The following sections describe the slot assignment for the Base Station chassis provide illustrated descriptions
253. of the power supply modules and Access Unit network interface modules and describe how to install the Base Station equipment BS SH Slot Assignment The Base Station chassis comprises ten slots as shown in Figure 2 19 8 Middle slots BS AU modules Extreme slots Power supply modules Figure 2 19 BS SH Chassis Slot Assignment To enable power supply redundancy two BS PS power supply modules can be installed in the wider side slots If a single power supply module is used it can be inserted into either one of the two available slots The remaining eight slots can hold up to six BS AU modules Unused slots should remain covered until required The design of the BS SH supports collocation of BreezeACCESS VL Access Units with Access Units belonging to other BreezeACCESS families using GFSK modulation It supports any mixture of BS AU modules with BreezeACCESS GFSK BS AU modules including an optional BS GU GPS module If Access Units belonging to other BreezeACCESS families are used then it is necessary to use two power supply modules one BS PS AC or DC power supply for the BreezeACCESS VL Access Units and one BS PS GFSK AC or DC for the BreezeACCESS GFSK Access Units Installation Chapter 2 Installation 2 6 2 60 BS PS AC Power Supply Module The BS PS AC is an AC to DC converter that provides power to all the BS AU modules installed in the BS SH chassis Figure 2 20 shows the BS PS AC front panel
254. oisture Ground screw e EAPN aaa p N Figure 2 7 Bottom Panel of the ODU all ODUs except to new SU A ODU shown without the sealing assembly BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Installing the Outdoor Unit Cc 9Ha 0000000000 Figure 2 8 Bottom Panel of the New SU A ODU without IDU COM Sealing Cap z The MAC Address of the unit is marked on both the ODU and the indoor unit on the print side of the BS AU module or on the bottom side of the Universal IDU If for any reason the ODU is not used with the IDU with which it was shipped the MAC Address of the system is in accordance with the marking on the ODU 2 3 4 Connecting the Indoor to Outdoor Cable 2 3 4 1 Units with an Installed Waterproof Seal not applicable to new SU A ODU gt To connect the indoor to outdoor cable 1 Remove the two screws holding the waterproof seal to the outdoor unit and remove the waterproof seal 2 Unscrew the top nut from the waterproof seal Figure 2 9 The Waterproof Seal Installation 43 Chapter 2 Installation 3 Route a straight Category 5E Ethernet cable 8 wire 24 AWG through both the top nut and the waterproof seal x Use only Category 5E 4x2x24 FTP outdoor cables from an approved manufacturer See list of approved cables and length limitations in section 2 1 2 4 Insert and crimp the RJ 45 connector Refer to Appendix D for instructions on preparing the
255. old of Precedence sub field of IP ToS field from IP Header RFC791 to be used when the ToS Prioritization Option is set to IP Precedence If the Precedence sub field of a frame is less than or equal to this threshold the frame will have Low priority otherwise it will get High priority Applicable to all units The threshold of DSCP sub field of IP ToS field from IP Header RFC2474 to be used when ToS Prioritization Option is set to DSCP If the DSCP sub field of a frame is less than or equal to this threshold the frame will have Low priority otherwise it will get High priority UDP TCP Port Ranges Prioritization parameters Applicable to all units Applicable to all units Disable Enable Prioritization using UDP and or TCP Port Ranges udpOnly 2 prioritization will be done only for UDP packets tcpOnly 3 prioritization will be done only for TCP packets udpANDtcp 4 prioritization will be done for UDP and TCP packets UDP Port Range parameters Applicable to all units Applicable to all units RTP RTCP ports prioritization option for UDP packet rtpANDrtcp 1 the possible RTP and RTCP packet with destination port in the defined port ranges will get High priority rtpOnly 2 only possible RTP packet packet with even destination port with destination port in the defined port ranges will get High priority Integer 0 7 Integer 0 63 Integer disable 1 one tcpOnly 3 udpAND
256. olding information on DRAP enabled gateways connected to SUs that are served by the AU DrapGatewaysTable 1 Gateways Table DrapGatewaysEntry 1 DrapGatewaysEntry 2 DrapGatewayType Read only The Gateway s type Integer DrapGatewaysEntry 3 vgDataVoice 4 vgData1Voice1 5 vgData4Voice2 6 vgDataVoice2 7 ngData4Wireless 11 unknown 255 DrapGatewayNoOfActiveVoiceCalls Read only The current number of active Integer DrapGatewaysEntry 4 voice calls handled by the Gateway Applicable only to Voice Gateways BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 259 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB E 3 Supported Traps wm Es An is used instead of the brzaccVL prefix E 3 1 Trap Variables Trape breezeAccessVLMib 14 TrapSUMacAddr Applicable to AU BU An SU RB MAC MAC address Traps 1 address TrapText Applicable to all units Textual string for DisplayString Traps 3 future use TrapToggle Applicable to all units An On Off toggle Integer Traps 4 status on 1 off 2 TrapParameterChanged Applicable to all units A modification to one Integer Traps 5 of the parameters related to IP Filtering cirOrMir 1 MIR CIR or VLAN ipFilter 2 3 TrapAccessRights Applicable to all units The access rights Integer Traps 6 used for login notLoggedin 1 readOnly 2 installer 3 administrator 4 factor TrapLog Applicable to all units Login or logout to the Integer Traps
257. om the Main or from the Shadow Version Main Version File Name The name of the compressed file with a bz extension of the version currently defined as the main version Main Version Number The software version currently defined as the main version Shadow Version File Name The name of the compressed file with a bz extension of the version currently defined as the shadow backup version Shadow Version Number The software version currently defined as the shadow backup version E Radio Band The radio band of the unit E Log Out Timer The value of the Log Out Timer as defined in the Unit Control menu E Ethernet Port Negotiation Mode The Ethernet port negotiation mode as defined in the Unit Control menu E Ethernet Port State The actual state of the Ethernet port Operation and Administration 87 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 2 2 88 FTP Parameters General FTP parameters common to SW Version Download Configuration File Upload Download and Event File Upload using FTP FTP Server IP Address FTP Gateway IP Address FTP User Name FTP Password FTP Software Download Parameters The parameters for SW download using FTP as defined in Unit Control menu FTP Source Directory FTP SW Version File Name Configuration File Download Upload Parameters The parameters for Configuration file upload download using FTP as defined in the Unit Con
258. on in the original channel during the Radar Activity Assessment Period that is required for reaching a decision to try again the original channel Applicable to AU only Starting with 4 0 it is nor applicable for BreezeACCESS and BreezeNET B Defines whether the SU should learn the country code of the AU Applicable to AU BU Read only The operating frequency in MHz Replaces CurrentAUOperatingFrequency to support a resolution of 0 5 MHz for units with HW revision C and higher Applicable to AU BU Read only For 5 8 GHz products with SW version below 2 0 this is the frequency in MHz of the AU BU after the next reset For units with SW version 2 0 and up this is the frequency in MHz to use when the DFS Option is disabled Replaces AUDefinedFrequency to support a resolution of 0 5 MHz for units with HW revision C and higher Auto Sub Band Select parameters Applicable to SU RB with SW version 4 0 and higher Applicable to SU RB with SW version 4 0 and higher Apply the selected subset After the next reset the new subset will be used for scanning Applicable to SU RB with SW version 4 0 and higher Not accessible The Frequency Subset Table that includes all available sub bands and all the frequencies in these sub bands Applicable to SU RB with SW version 4 0 and higher Not accessible An entry in the Auto SubBand Frequency Subset Table Integer disable 1 enable 2 na 255 Integer 1 12 hours
259. operating at 5270 MHz with a 20 MHz bandwidth and the Maximum Tx Power parameter in the SUs connected to this AU should not be set to a value above 17 Antenna Gain The maximum allowed EIRP for 5270 MHz is 17 dBm b In units using Country Code 392 4 9 GHz Japan regular not B amp B point to point with a 10 MHz bandwidth the following rules must be met for full compliance with regulations m When operating at 4945 MHz the Transmit Power parameter in the AU should not be set to a value above 11 dBm The Maximum Transmit Power of the SU should not be set to a value above 10 dBm m When operating at 5055 MHz the Transmit Power parameter in the AU should not be set to a value above 13 dBm The Maximum Transmit power of the SU should not be set to a value above 10 dBm This requirement although not indicated in the certification document is needed following the tests performed in the certification lab 4 2 6 2 4 3 DFS Parameters The DFS Parameters submenu is available only if DFS is supported by the current Sub Band The DFS Parameters submenu includes the following parameters 4 2 6 2 4 3 1 DFS Option The DFS Option enables or disables the radar detection and dynamic frequency selection mechanism The default is Enable 4 2 6 2 4 3 2 Frequency Subset Definition The Frequency Subset Definition parameter defines the frequencies that will be used in the DFS mechanism The available frequencies according to the Sub Band
260. or Unit ALARM Indoor Unit Alarm Indication Commissioning Green At least one SU is associated Blinking Red No SU is associated Off Wireless link is disabled Red over current Blinking Red open circuit or below anticipated current consumption Green within tolerance Green Self test passed and ODU ready for operation Blinking Amber Testing not ready for operation Red fatal failure Green IDU power is OK Off no power is supplied to the IDU Red a fatal failure indication Off IDU is functioning properly 77 Chapter 3 Commissioning Table 3 7 PS1073 SU IDU AU SA IDU LEDs Power Indication Green IDU power is OK Off No power or power failure Self test and end to Off No Ethernet connectivity has end Ethernet been detected between the outdoor unit and the device connected to the connectivity indoor unit Green Self test passed and Ethernet connection confirmed by the outdoor unit Ethernet integrity check passed 3 5 3 SU I Unit Verification To verify the correct operation of the SU I unit examine the LED indicators located on the front panel of the SU I unit The following tables list the provided LEDs and their associated indications m BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Operation Verification Commissioning Table 3 8 SU I LEDs Name Status Ethernet W Link Description Self test and power indicatio
261. oritization menu The VLAN Traffic Priority menu includes the following parameters E VLAN Priority Data SU only E VLAN Priority Management 4 2 6 4 1 7 1 VLAN Priority Data SU only The VLAN Priority Data is applicable for Access Links only It enables configuring the value of the VLAN Priority field for data frames transmitted to the wireless link All data frames are routed to the Low queue This parameter only impacts the way other VLAN aware devices handle the packet Valid values range from 0 to 7 The default value is O 4 2 6 4 1 7 2 VLAN Priority Management 4 2 6 4 1 8 The VLAN Priority Management enables defining the value of the VLAN Priority field for management frames in units with VLAN ID Management that is other than 65535 All management frames are routed to the High queue This parameter only impacts the way other VLAN aware devices handle the packet Valid values range from 0 to 7 The default value is 4 for SUs and O for AUs VLAN QinQ Protocol Ethertype The VLAN QinQ Proptocol Ethertype parameter sets the Ethertype of the Service Provider tag and is applicable only for Service Provider Links The valid values are from 8100 to 9000 9100 and 9200 Hex Operation and Administration 161 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 4 1 9 4 2 6 4 2 4 2 6 4 2 1 162 The default value is 8100 Hex Show VLAN Parameters The Show VLAN Parameters option displays the
262. orizontal x 6 vertical sector antenna vertical polarization compliant with EN 302 085 V1 1 2 CS3 AU Ant 4 9G 15 120 15 dBi typical 4 900 5 100 GHz 124 horizontal x 6 5 vertical sector antenna vertical polarization compliant with EN 302 085 V1 1 2 CS3 AU Ant 4 9G 9 Omni 9 dB typical i 4 900 5 100 GHz 360 horizontal x 8 vertical vertical polarization AU Ant 5 4G 8 Omni 8 dBi typical 5 150 5 725 GHz 360 horizontal x 4 5 vertical vertical polarization AU Ant 5 8G 8 Omni 8 dBi typical 5 725 5 875 GHz 360 horizontal x 9 vertical vertical polarization AU Ant 5 8G 14 120 UK 14dBi typical 5 725 5 850 GHz 120 horizontal x 6 5 vertical sector antenna vertical polarization The antenna pattern complies with Ofcom s IR 2007 EIRP profiles Sensitivity Minimum dBm at Modulation Sensitivity Sensitivity Minimum SNR antenna port PER lt 10 Level HW Rev A HW Rev B 20 MHz bandwidth and higher 83dBm 84 dBm 11 dB 5 80 dBm 81 dBm 14 dB 76 dBm 77 dBm 18 dB 71 dBm 73 dBm 22 dB 69 dBm 71 dBm 23 dB Modulation OFDM modulation 64 FFT points BPSK QPSK QAM16 QAM64 System Description 15 Chapter 1 System Description The actual available frequency channels and bandwidth are defined by the selected Sub Band which reflects the applicable regulatory constraints For more details refer to section 4 2 2 4 The actual maximum available output power for
263. ormanceParams 5 MulticastModulationLevel PerformanceParams 6 AvgSNRMemoryFactor PerformanceParams 7 HardwareRetries PerformanceParams 8 AdaptiveModulationParams PerformanceParams 9 AdaptiveModulationAlgorithmOption AdaptiveModulationParams 1 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Applicable to SU and AU Not applicable to BreezeNET B products The minimum frame size that requires an RTS CTS handshake Applicable to SU AU BU 100 and RB 100 The initial value to be used by the contention window calculation algorithm A value of 0 disables the back off algorithm Applicable to SU AU BU 100 and RB 100 The maximum value to be used by the contention window calculation algorithm Applicable to all units If the Adaptive Modulation algorithm is enabled it sets the maximum modulation level to be used If The Adaptive Modulation algorithm is disabled it set the fixed modulation level to be used Applicable to AU BU The modulation level for multicast and broadcast data frames Applicable to all units The weight of history in average RSSI calculation for the ATPC AU only and Adaptive Modulation algorithm The higher is the value the higher is the weight of history Applicable to all units Not applicable if Wireless Link Prioritization is enabled The maximum number of trials to transmit an unacknowledged frame in each Hardware Retrials phase Applicable to all units E
264. p B 4 9 GHz only BreezeACCESS VL B amp B is available in the 4 9 GHz band to support point to point applications A B amp B point to point link includes E AU D SA 4 9 6 VL A standalone AU with a 25 dBi 6 high gain directional antenna E SU D 4 9 54 BD VL SU 54 BD with a 25 dBi 6 high gain directional antenna BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Networking Equipment 1 5 Networking Equipment The Base Station equipment is connected to the backbone through standard data communication and telecommunication equipment The 10 100BaseT ports of the AU modules can be connected directly to a multi port router or to an Ethernet switch connected to a router The point to point link from the Base Station to the backbone can be either wired or wireless Data to the Internet is routed to the backbone through standard routers System Description Chapter 1 System Description 1 6 1 6 1 1 6 2 Management Systems The end to end IP based architecture of the system enables full management of all components from any point in the system BreezeACCESS VL components can be managed using standard management tools through SNMP agents that implement standard and proprietary MIBs for remote setting of operational modes and parameters The same SNMP management tools can also be used to manage other system components including switches routers and transmission equipment Security features incorporated in BreezeACCESS VL unit
265. plicable to all units Read only The minimum supported modulation level Applicable to all units Read only The maximum supported modulation level Applicable to all units Read only The supported Burst Mode Option DisplayString Integer A Regulation Max EIRP of 100 means no limit Integer level1 1 level2 2 level3 3 level4 4 level5 5 level6 6 level7 7 level8 8 Integer Integer supported 1 notSupported 2 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Value Range MaximumBurstDuration Applicable to all units Integer CountryDependentParameterEntry 9 Read only Applicable only if Burst Mode Option is supported The maximum supported burst duration Applicable to AU BU only Read only The supported DfsSupport CountryDependentParameterEntry 10 Integer supported 1 MinimumHwRevision CountryDependentParameterEntry 11 AuthenticationEncryptionSupport CountryDependentParameters 3 DFS Option Applicable to all units Read only The Minimum HW Revision needed to support the Sub Band Applicable to all units Read only The supported Authentication Encryption Option Read only The supported DataEncryptionSupport Applicable to all units CountryDependentParameters 4 Data Encryption Option AESEncryptionSupport CountryDependentParameters 5 AntennaGainChange SysInfo 19 E242 Applicable to all units R
266. pment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at the user s own expense FCC Radiation Hazard Warning To comply with FCC RF exposure requirement the antenna used for this transmitter must be fixed mounted on outdoor permanent structures with a separation distance of at least 2 meter from al persons for antennas with a gain up to 28 dBi and 2 6 meter for a 31 2 dBi dish antenna and must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter R amp TTE Compliance Statement This equipment complies with the appropriate essential requirements of Article 3 of the R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC Safety Considerations For the following safety considerations Instrument means the BreezeACCESS VL units components and their cables Caution To avoid electrical shock do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so Line Voltage Before connecting this instrument to the power line make sure that the voltage of the power source matches the requirements of the instrument Radio The instrument transmits radio energy during normal operation To avoid possible harmful exposure to this energy do not stand or work for extended periods of time in front of its antenna The long term characteristics or the possible physiological effects of Radio Frequency Electromagnetic fields have not been yet fully investig
267. pplicable to SU only The MAC address of the preferred AU BU overriding the Best AU BU selection process Applicable to SU RB Not accessible Neighboring AUs BUs table Applicable to SU only Not accessible An entry in the Neighboring AUs table Applicable to SU RB Read only An Index of an entry in the Neighboring AU BU Table Applicable to SU RB Read only The MAC Address of the AU BU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU BU Table Applicable to SU RB Read only The ESSID of the AU BU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU BU Table Accessible only with the SNMP Write community string Administrator Password Applicable to SU RB Read only The average SNR at which the SU RB receives the AU BU associated with the entry in the Neighboring AU BU Table PreferredAuMacAddress BestAu 3 NeighborAuTable BestAu 4 NeighborAuEntry NeighborAuTable 1 she NeighborAuEntry 1 NeighborAuMacAdd NeighborAuEntry 2 NeighborAuESSID NeighborAuEntry 3 NeighborAuSNR NeighborAuEntry 4 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual DisplayString Range 10 to the maximum defined by the DefinedMaximumT xPowerR ange for the applicable modulation level Integer AU BS AU SA 0 512 0 124 if Data Encryption Option is enabled AUS BS AUS SA with SW version 4 0 and higher 0 8 AUS BS AUS SA with SW version below 4 0 0 5 na 65535 Best AU BU parameters Applic
268. preserve the original frequency planning and to avoid moving to a new channel unless they are sure that there is a continuous radar activity in the original channel It should be noted that detection of radar activity does not necessarily indicate a continuous radar activity in the channel A channel reuse algorithm enables returning to the original channel under certain conditions that indicates low radar activity on the channel Frequency Definition Submenu in AU The Frequency Definition submenu in AU includes the following parameters Sub Band Select This parameter is available only if the country code supports two or more Sub Bands For information on how to view the Sub Bands supported by the unit and the supported parameters values and options refer to section 4 2 2 4 The range depends on the number of Sub Bands supported by the country code The default selection is Sub Band 1 Frequency The Frequency parameter defines the transmit receive frequency when the DFS Option is not enabled If the DFS Option is enabled it sets the initial operational frequency upon starting the DFS mechanism for the first time The range depends on the selected Sub Band The default is the lowest frequency in the Sub Band Operation and Administration 125 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration A a In units using Country Code 1023 FCC 5 3 GHz for full compliance with FCC regulations the Transmit Power parameter in the AU when
269. printable ASCII characters The default is vx E FTP Password The FTP Password option enables defining the password to be used for accessing the FTP server that is hosting the SW Version file Valid values A string of up to 18 printable ASCII characters The default is vx E Show SW Version Download Parameters and Status Displays the current values of the SW Version Download parameters the current SW version and the SW versions stored in the Flash memory There is one set of general FTP parameters FTP Server IP Address FTP Gateway IP Address FTP User Name and FTP Password This set or relevant parts of the set serves the SW Download Procedure the Configuration File Upload Download procedure and the Event Log File Upload procedure Changing any of these parameters in the menu for any procedure will automatically change its value in the menu for the other procedures Configuration File Upload Download The Configuration File Upload Download submenu enables the optional uploading or downloading of a configuration or an Operator Defaults file from a remote FTP server The Configuration File Upload Download submenu includes the following options E Execute FTP GET PUT Configuration File The Execute FTP GET PUT Configuration File executes the upload download of a Configuration file or an Operator Defaults file according to the parameters defined below The following options are available Execute FTP Get Configuration File cf
270. r fromwirelessOnly 1 fromEthernetOnly 2 fromBothWirelessnAndEthernet 3 na 255 Integer disable 1 activateOnEthernetPort 2 activateOnWirelessPort 3 activateOnBothWirelessAndEthernet 4 IP address Integer 1 10 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 218 breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Value Range DeleteOneNwlpAddr Applicable to all units Deletes a Integer NwMngParameters 4 single selected entry from the cancelOperation 0 Management IP Addresses deleteEntry 1 10 Table na 255 DeleteAlINwlpAddrs Applicable to all units Deletes all Integer NwMngParameters 5 entries from the Management IP deleteAll 1 Addresses Table cancelOperation 2 na 255 nen Applicable to all units Enables or Integer NwMngParameters 6 disables the sending of SNMP disable 1 traps enable 2 ee Applicable to all units A table of NwMngParameters 7 up to 10 IP addresses of stations to which to send SNMP traps Not accessible mngTrapEntry Applicable to all units A mngTrapTable 1 Management Trap Table entry Not accessible NwMngTrapCommunhity Applicable to all units The trap DisplayString SIZE 14 mngTrapEntry 1 community associated with the Up to 14 printable SECH characters applicable entry in the Management Trap Table NwMngTrapAddress Applicable to all units An IP IP address mngTrapEntry 2 address in the Management Trap Table NwMngTrapTableldx Applicable to
271. rSendTrapl nterval EthBroadcastingParameters 5 ToSPriorityParameters BridgeParameters 8 ToSPrecedenceThreshold ToSPriorityParameters 1 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Applicable to AU only Not applicable to BreezeNET B products Enables or disables the relaying of broadcast messages to the wireless link Applicable to AU only Not applicable to BreezeNET B products Enables or disables the relaying of unicast messages to the wireless link Applicable to SU RB only Enables or disables the filtering of Ethernet layer2 broadcasts disable No filtering onEthrnetOnly Filters broadcasts received on the Ethernet port only onWirelessOnly Filters broadcasts received on the wireless port only onBothWirelessAndEthernet Filters broadcasts received on both ports Applicable to SU RB only Enables or disables the broadcasting of DHCP messages overriding the general EthBroadcastFiltering Ethernet broadcast filtering option Applicable to SU RB only Enables or disables the broadcasting of PPPoE messages overriding the general EthBroadcastFiltering Ethernet broadcast filtering option Applicable to SU RB only Enables or disables the broadcasting of ARP messages overriding the general EthBroadcastFiltering Ethernet broadcast filtering option Applicable to all units Enable disable the limiter for multicast and broadcast packets Applicable to all units The limit for the allowed number of multicast and
272. radation Limit Beyond this point the simple brute force algorithm is used The Graceful Degradation Limit should be raised in proportion to the demand in the cell The higher the expected demand in a cell the higher the value of the Graceful Degradation Limit Higher demand can be expected in cases of significant over_subscription and or in deployments where a high number of subscribers are in locations without proper communication with the AU at the highest data rate Operation and Administration 181 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 6 2 8 4 2 6 6 2 9 4 2 6 6 3 182 The available values range from 0 to 70 The default value is 70 MIR Only Option AU only When the MIR Only Option is enabled it forces the MIR CIR algorithm to use MIR values only The MIR CIR algorithm determines the actual information rate for each of the supported SUs under changing conditions of demand based on the configured CIR and MIR values When the MIR Only Option is enabled the MIR CIR algorithm is overridden and forced to operate with MIR values only For example the AU attempts to enable all SUs to transmit receive information at the specified MIR value When enabled the graceful degradation algorithm which is a part of the CIR MIR algorithm is also disabled The default is Enable Show MIR CIR Parameters Displays the current values of the MIR and CIR parameters Traffic Prioritization Each packet that is
273. ransmit power defined for the applicable modulation level SU RB If ATPC is disabled this is The transmit power defined for the applicable modulation level If ATPC is enabled it serves as the initial transmit power for the ATPC algorithm TransmitPowerldx TransmitPowerEntry 1 ApplicableModulationLevel TransmitPowerEntry 2 MaximumTxPowerRange TransmitPowerEntry 3 TxPower TransmitPowerEntry 4 CurrentTxPower TransmitPowerEntry 5 Applicable to SU RB Read only The actual transmit power in dBm at the applicable modulation level MaximumTransmitPowerT able Airlnterface 6 MaximumTransmitPowerEntry TransmitPowerTable 1 MaximumTransmitPowerldx MaximumTransmitPowerEntry 1 MaxTxApplicableModulationLevel MaximumTransmitPowerEntry 2 Applicable to SU RB Not accessible Maximum Transmit Power parameters table Applicable to SU RB Not accessible An entry in the Maximum Transmit Power parameters table Applicable to SU RB Read only An index of an entry in the Maximum Transmit Power parameters table Applicable to SU RB Read only The applicable modulation level for an entry in the Maximum Transmit Power parameters table Level 8 is not applicable to units with HW revision A Applicable to SU RB Read only The allowed range for the MaxTxPower parameter at the applicable modulation level DefinedMaximumT xPowerRange MaximumTransmitPowerEntry 3 Levelito5
274. ration files using TFTP This procedure is also applicable for uploading country code and feature license files Appendix C Using the Set Factory Defaults Utility Describes how to use the Set Factory Defaults utility to enable management access to units where wrong or unknown configuration disables regular access to the unit for management purposes Appendix D Preparing the indoor to outdoor SU cable Provides details on preparation of the indoor to outdoor Ethernet cable Appendix E Supported MIBs and Traps Provides a brief description of the parameters contained in the private MIB agent incorporated into the About This Manual BreezeACCESS VL devices In addition a description of all traps relevant to the BreezeACCESS VL devices is provided E Appendix F Parameters Summary Provides an at a glance summary of the configuration parameters value ranges and default values E Appendix G Troubleshooting BreezeACCESS VL System Manual xvi Contents Chapter 1 System DES CH DUON Eesen 1 1 1 Introducing BreezeACCESS E 2 1 2 Base Station Equipment 22 cccsssccccsenceecessneenceeessecceeeesnceeessnnneeeeeennneeeeseaneneerensnnees 4 1 2 1 Modular Base Station Equipment Auen 4 1 2 2 Standalone Micro cell Access Unn EE 6 le 1 JUN 7 1 3 1 SU A E Subscriber Units c cc ccceececccceeeseeeceeseeeeceeeessseeeeeesssseeeesessaneeseneenees 7 1 3 2 SU I Subscriber Units 2 ccccseccceesecnce
275. re 2 7 Bottom Panel of the ODU all ODUs except to new SU A ODU shown without the sealing ESSEMS 2124055301201210 EE 42 Figure 2 8 Bottom Panel of the New SU A ODU without IDU COM Sealing Cap 43 Fetra 2 9 Te Voss ere 43 Figure 2 10 Inserting the IDU COM Cable into the Sealing Cap 45 Figure 2 11 Connecting the IDU COM connector and inserting the Sealing Cap 45 Hoce A OU E 90 Front TT 46 Feur 2 18 UL Denn 49 Figure 2 14 SU I Wall Mount osaosisesisesseseresssesesesesesssesssessanarasurenassaassaesraarsadrsassasinanrastraadrdadisassaeticosnacenaee 52 Figure 2 15 Wall Mounting the Antenna cccccecceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeceaeeecaaaeseeeeecaeeecaaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseaeeeeees 54 Figure 2 16 Wall Mount with Rotation Capability ccccceecseeceeeeeeceeeeeeeseceeeeaaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeeseaeeseeeesaas 55 Figure 2 17 Window Mounting the Antenna cccccecccceeeeeeeeeeececaeeeeaae scenes saeeeeaaeeeeaaesecaeeesaeseeaeeeeeeeeaas 56 Figure 2 18 Window Mounting with Rotation Capability 0 ccceccccceeeeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeseeeeeseeeesaeeseaeeeeaes 58 Figure 2 19 BS SH Chassis Slot Aeslonment cee eeeeaeeeeaeeesaeeeseaeseeaeeeeneeeseeeesaeeseeeeeaes 59 Figure 2 20 BS PS AC Front Panel 60 Figure 2 21 BS PS DC Front Panel 61 Figure 2 22 BS AU Front Panel 62 Figure 3 1 Connecting the Y Cable ccccccsceeesceceeeceeeeceeeaeeeeeeeeseaeseeaaesdeeecaeessaaesegaaeeseeeeesaeeseaaessaeeeaes 69 Figures
276. recedence RFC791 Prioritization If the value of the 3 IP Precedence bits in the IP header is higher than this threshold the packet is routed to the High queue If the value is lower than or equal to this threshold the packet will be transferred to the Low queue unless it is assigned a High priority by another classifier Valid values range from 0 to 7 The default value is 4 Operation and Administration 183 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 6 3 2 3DSCP Threshold The DSCP Threshold parameter is applicable when the ToS Prioritization Option is set to Enable DSCP RFC2474 Prioritization If the value of the 6 DSCP bits in the IP header is higher than this threshold the packet is routed to the High queue If the value is lower than or equal to this threshold the packet will be routed to the Low queue unless it is assigned a High priority by another classifier Valid values range from O0 to 63 The default value is 32 4 2 6 6 3 3 UDP TCP Port Ranges Traffic Prioritization The UDP TCP Port Ranges Traffic Prioritization parameters enable defining prioritization in accordance with the UDP and or TCP destination port ranges The UDP TCP Port Ranges Traffic Prioritization menu includes the following parameters 4 2 6 6 3 3 1 UDP TCP Port Ranges Prioritization Option The UDP TCP Port Ranges Prioritization Option defines whether port ranges based prioritization is enabled or disabled The following options
277. red to Open System In this case the authentication encryption algorithm is not used E Shared Key The authentication messages are encrypted An SU configured to use a Shared Key can only be authenticated by an AU configured to use a Shared Key provided the applicable Key which means both the key number and its content in the AU is identical to the key selected as the Default Key in the SU The default is Open System The Shared Key option cannot be selected before at least one Key is defined In the SU a Default Key that refers to a valid Key must be selected The AU and all the SUs it serves should be configured to the same Authentication Algorithm option Mixed operation is not supported Data Encryption Option The Data Encryption Option allows enabling or disabling data encryption When enabled all data frames including frames using management protocols such as Telnet FTP TFTP SNMP DHCP and ICMP are encrypted The default is Disable BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 7 3 4 2 6 7 4 4 2 6 7 5 4 2 6 7 6 m The AU and all the SUs it serves should be configured to the same Data Encryption Option Mixed operation is not supported H An SU with Data Encryption Option enabled can accept non encrypted data frames m When the Data Encryption Option is enabled the maximum number of SUs that can associate with the AU is limited to 124 The Maximum Number of Associations Limit is indic
278. riority from different units VLAN Priority Threshold The VLAN Priority Threshold is applicable for Trunk and Hybrid Links only It enables defining the value of the VLAN Priority Threshold If the VLAN Priority field in a tagged frame is higher than the value of the VLAN Priority Threshold parameter the packet will be routed to the High queue If the VLAN Priority field is lower than or equal to this value the packet will be transferred to the Low queue unless it is assigned a High priority by another classifier Valid values range from 0 to 7 The default value is 7 which means that all packets get a low priority equivalent to disabling the VLAN based classifier ToS Prioritization The ToS Prioritization parameters enable defining prioritization in accordance with either the 3 IP Precedence bits in the IP header in accordance with RFC 791 or the 6 DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point bits in accordance with RFC 2474 The ToS Prioritization menu includes the following parameters 4 2 6 6 3 2 1 ToS Prioritization Option The ToS Prioritization Option defines whether ToS based prioritization is enabled or disabled The following options are available HM Disable E Enable IP Precedence RFC791 Prioritization E Enable DSCP RFC2474 Prioritization The default is Disable 4 2 6 6 3 2 2IP Precedence Threshold The IP Precedence Threshold parameter is applicable when the ToS Prioritization Option is set to Enable IP P
279. rithm is not enabled in both AU and SU the test should be done with the Initial Power Level at the SU configured to its maximum value If the SNR is lower than the values required for the maximum modulation level according to Table 3 2 it is recommended that you decrease the value of the Maximum Modulation Level The SNR measurement at the AU is accurate only when receiving transmissions from the applicable SU If necessary use the Ping Test utility in the Site Survey menu to verify data transmission 3 Configure the Maximum Modulation Level according to Table 3 2 using the typical SNR values It is recommended that a 2 dB margin be added to compensate for possible measurement inaccuracy or variance in the quality of the link o BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Configuring the Subscriber Units Maximum Modulation Level Table 3 2 Recommended Maximum Modulation Level Maximum Modulation Level SNR gt 23 dB 21 dB lt SNR lt 23 dB 16 dB lt SNR lt 21 dB 13 dB lt SNR lt 16 dB 8 dB lt SNR lt 10 dB 7 dB lt SNR lt 8 dB eo eo 10 dB lt SNR lt 1948 6 dB lt SNR lt 7 dB The maximum supported value depends on the unit s HW revision and on the Max Modulation Level according to the Sub Band Commissioning 73 Chapter 3 Commissioning 39 Operation Verification The following sections describe how to verify the correct functioning of the Outdoor Unit Indoor Unit Ethernet connection and dat
280. ritization Option is enabled Defines the Maximum duration of burst that can be done by AU BU with High Priority packets The time is given in 250 microseconds units Applicable only to AU witha Integer license for the Wireless Link 0 40 Prioritization feature and to BU 100 Applicable only if the Wireless Link Prioritization Option is enabled Defines the Maximum duration of burst that can be done by AU BU with Low Priority packets The time is given in 250 microseconds units Applicable only to AU witha Integer license for the Wireless Link 0 40 Prioritization feature and to BU 100 Applicable only if the Wireless Link Prioritization Option is enabled Defines the Maximum duration of burst that can be done by SU RB with High Priority packets The time is given in 250 microseconds units Applicable only to AU witha Integer license for the Wireless Link 0 40 Prioritization feature and to BU 100 Applicable only if the Wireless Link Prioritization Option is enabled Defines the Maximum duration of burst that can be done by SU RB with Low Priority packets The time is given in 250 microseconds units DRAP Parameters Applicable only to AU with SW version 4 0 and higher Not applicable to BreezeNET B products Disable Enable the DRAP Integer feature disable 1 enable 2 na 255 The UDP port used for the Integer DRAP server 8000 8200 245 Appendix E BreezeACCES
281. rnetStatusControl the unit will off 2 ethernetStatusControl 3 TxControl Airlnterface 21 LostBeaconsWatchdogThreshold Airlnterface 22 TransmitPower Airlnterface 23 MaximumTxPower Airlnterface 24 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual not transmit if the Ethernet link is down This parameter can be configured only via the ethernet port In units with SW version below 4 0 the unit is reset automatically upon configuration For unit with SW version 4 0 and higher this parameter is applied in run time Applicable to AU BU only The Integer number of unsuccessful consecutive 0 100 1000 transmissions of beacons before Internal refresh is performed 0 means that the lost beacons watchdog is not used and internal refresh is not performed Applicable to all units with SW Integer version 4 0 and higher The uniform transmit power for all modulation levels For a specific modulation level the effective transmit power brzaccVLTxPower is the minimum between the uniform transmit power and the maximum transmit power for that modulation level Applicable to only SU RB with SW Integer version 4 0 and higher The Maximum Transmit Power for all modulation levels The Maximum Transmit Power for a specific modulation level is the minimum between this parameter and the hardware limitation for that modulation level 237 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB E 2 7 Service Parameters MIB Parameter
282. rs Updated according to applicable changes new removed parameters Removed previously Appendix G Available as a separate document SW Version 4 0 Version Date Issued SW Version 4 0 July 2006 July 2006 SW Version 4 0 July 2006 SW Version 4 0 July 2006 SW Version 4 0 July 2006 SW Version 4 0 July 2006 SW Version 4 0 July 2006 SW Version 4 0 July 2006 SW Version 4 0 July 2006 SW Version 4 0 July 2006 SW Version 4 0 July 2006 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Document History Topic Description Version Date Issued New Subscriber Unit Added New SU A ODU and SW Version 4 0 SU A ODU accessories Rev B August 2006 New Subscriber Unit SU I Added new unit SU I and SW Version 4 0 accessories Rev C August 2006 SU A H removed SU A H SU with horizonally SW Version 4 0 27 Sections 1 3 1 1 7 1 polarized integrated October 2006 1 7 5 1 1 2 1 1 1 antenna was removed from products list IDU PS1036 removed from Replaced by PS1073 SW Version 4 0 27 Manual October 2006 Sections 1 7 5 1 1 7 5 4 2 4 3 5 2 Q in Q Service Provider Improved handling of SW Version 4 0 27 Link improvements management frames October 2006 Sections 4 2 6 4 1 2 Support of Ethertypes 9100 4 2 6 4 1 3 4 4 2 6 4 1 8 9200 hex MIB Appendix E Parameters Summary Appendix F DRAP UDP Port Default changed to 8171 SW Version 4 0 27 Section 4 2 6 6 4 2 Octo
283. runk Link only 255 na VlanPriority Threshold Applicable to all units Not applicable to Integer VLANTrafficPriority 4 units with SW version 3 1 and higher 0 7 where this parameter is replaced by 255 na Priority threshold for tagged frames received from Ethernet port Applicable to Hybrid Link and Trunk Link only VLANSupport 7 Not applicable to BreezeNET B units QinQEthertype Applicable to AU and SU The Ethernet Integer VLANQinQ 1 type of the Service Provider tag 33024 0x8100 36864 0x9000 37120 0x9100 37376 0x9200 QinQProviderVlanID Applicable to SU only VLAN ID of the Integer VLANQinQ 2 Service Provider tag 1 4094 BridgeAgingTime Applicable to all units Bridge aging time Integer BridgeParameters 2 for devices learned from both the Ethernet 20 2000 seconds and wireless link ports BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 222 breezeAccessVLMib BroadcastRelaying BridgeParameters 4 UnicastRelaying BridgeParameters 5 EthBroadcastFiltering BridgeParameters 6 EthBroadcastingParameters BridgeParameters 7 DHCPBroadcastOverrideFilter EthBroadcastingParameters 1 PPPoEBroadcastOverrideFilter EthBroadcastingParameters 2 ARPBroadcastOverrideFilter EthBroadcastingParameters 3 EthBroadcastMulticastLimiterOption EthBroadcastingParameters 4 EthBroadcastMulticastLimiterThreshold EthBroadcastingParameters 5 EthBroadcastMulticastLimite
284. s Default value 5 seconds 4 2 6 2 15 2 Spectrum Analysis Scan Cycles The Spectrum Analysis Scan Cycle is the number of scanning cycles when performing Spectrum Analysis Range 1 100 cycles Default value 2 cycles 4 2 6 2 15 3 Automatic Channel Selection AU only The Automatic Channel selection option defines weather the AU will choose the best noise free channel upon startup after completion of the spectrum analysis process The selection is per analysis when the analysis is completed it will be disabled automatically The default is Disable 4 2 6 2 15 4 Spectrum Analysis Activation The Spectrum analysis Activation option enables activation of the spectrum analysis process Upon activation the unit will reset automatically and start up in spectrum analysis mode 4 2 6 2 15 5 Reset Spectrum Analysis Information The Reset Spectrum Analysis Information option enables resetting the spectrum analysis counters 4 2 6 2 15 6 Spectrum Analysis Information Display The Spectrum Analysis Information Display option enables viewing the results of the last analysis process The displayed information includes the following details for each channel E Frequency in MHz E Signal Count The number of signals excluding OFDM frames with the correct bandwidth in the channel E Signal SNR The approximate SNR of signals excluding OFDM frames with the correct bandwidth in the channel Operation and Administration 143
285. s enable 2 overriding the IP Filtering na 255 option E 2 9 Security Parameters MIB Parameter Value Range SecurityParams breezeAccessVLMib 9 AuthenticationAlgorithm Applicable to all units Integer SecurityParameters 1 Enables disables the openSystem 1 authentication encryption sharedKey 2 option openSystem Authentication messages are not encrypted sharedKey Authentication messages are encrypted DefaultKey Applicable to SU RB The ID Integer SecurityParameters 2 of the key to be used for Range 1 to 4 encrypting decrypting the authentication messages BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 247 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB DataEncryptionOption SecurityParameters 3 DefaultMulticastKey SecurityParameters 4 SecurityMode SecurityParameters 5 PromiscuousAuthenticationMode SecurityParameters 6 Key1 SecurityParameters 7 Key2 SecurityParameters 8 Key3 SecurityParameters 9 Key4 SecurityParameters 10 SecurityModeSupport SecurityParameters 12 248 Applicable to all units Enables disables the data encryption option Applicable to AU RB The ID of the key to be used for encrypting decrypting multicasts Applicable to all units The encryption algorithm to be used for authentication messages and or data encryption The fips197 option is applicable only to units with HW revision C or higher provided they have a license to use FIPS 197 al
286. s which are included in the Forwarding List Accept from Wireless Single tagged frames only frames with a Service Provider tag whose parameters match the Service Provider parameters defined in the unit Service Provider VLAN ID and VLAN QinQ Ethertype Double tagged frames only frames with a Service Provider tag whose parameters match the Service Provider parameters defined in the unit Service Provider VLAN ID and VLAN QinQ Ethertype If Forwarding is enabled only frames with Customer VLAN ID values that are included in the Forwarding List Tag Insert Service Provider SP tag to wireless Tag Remove Yes to Ethernet Operation and Administration 157 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 10 VLAN Data Port Functionality for AU Service Provider Link Accept from Ethernet Single tagged frames E f Forwarding is disabled E f Forwarding is enabled only frames with VLAN ID values which are included in the Forwarding List Double tagged frames E f Forwarding is disabled E f Forwarding is enabled only frames with Service Provider VLAN ID values which are included in the Forwarding List Accept from Wireless Single tagged frames E f Forwarding is disabled E f Forwarding is enabled only frames with VLAN ID values which are included in the Forwarding List Double tagged frames E f Forwarding is disabled m f Forwarding is enabled only frames with Service Provider VLAN ID values w
287. s available only in SUs displaying the current option in the relevant AU Concatenation Option Enable or Disable Country Code Learning by SU Enable or Disable This parameter is available only in SUs displaying the current option in the relevant AU Per SU Distance Learning Enable or Disable This parameter is available only in SUs displaying the current option in the relevant AU 4 2 5 6 3 Show Link Capability Security Configuration Select this option to view information on current security related parameters of relevant units For each relevant unit identified by its MAC address the following details are displayed 118 Security Mode WEP AES OCB or FIPS 197 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters E Authentication Algorithm Shared Key or Open System E Data Encryption Option Enable or Disable 4 2 5 6 4 Show Link Capability by AU SU only Select this option to view all capabilities information General wireless Link Configuration Security Configuration of a selected AU by its MAC address 4 2 5 6 5 Show Link Capability by SU AU only Select this option to view all capabilities information General Wireless Link Configuration Security Configuration of a selected SU by its MAC address Operation and Administration 119 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 4 2 6 1 4 2 6 1 1 4 2 6 1 2 120 Advanced Configuration Menu The Advanced Configuration me
288. s restrict access for management purposes to specific IP addresses and or directions that is from the Ethernet and or wireless link In addition the Ethernet WAN can be used to connect to other Operation Support Systems including servers Customer Care systems and AAA Authentication Authorization and Admission tools BreezeCONFIG The BreezeCONFIG for BreezeACCESS VL utility is an SNMP based application designed to manage BreezeACCESS VL system components and upgrade unit software versions The system administrator can use the BreezeCONFIG utility to control a large number of units from a single location In addition BreezeCONFIG enables you to load an updated configuration file to multiple units simultaneously thus radically reducing the time spent on unit configuration maintenance AlvariSTAR AlvariSTAR is a comprehensive Carrier Class network management system for Alvarion s Broadband Wireless Access products based Networks AlvariSTAR is designed for today s most advanced Service Provider network Operation Centers NOCs providing the network Operation Administration and Maintenance OA amp M staff and managers with all the network surveillance monitoring and configuration capabilities that they require in order to effectively manage the BWA network while keeping the resources and expenses at a minimum AlvariSTAR is designed to offer the network s OA amp M staff with a unified scalable and distributable network m
289. s that the contention window algorithm is not used and that the unit will attempt to access the medium immediately after a time equal to DIFS The default value is 15 A value of 0 disables the contention window back off algorithm It should only be used in point to point applications For more details on configuring units in a point to point link refer to section 4 2 6 2 11 Maximum Contention Window The Maximum Contention Window parameter defines the upper limit for the maximum number C used in the back off algorithm as described in Minimum Contention Window above The available values are 7 15 31 63 127 255 511 and 1023 The default value is 1023 Operation and Administration 169 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 5 4 4 2 6 5 5 170 Multicast Modulation Level AU only The Multicast Modulation Level parameter defines the modulation level used for transmitting multicast and broadcast data frames Multicast and broadcast transmissions are not acknowledged therefore if a multicast or broadcast transmission is not properly received there is no possibility of retransmitting It is recommended that you set a lower modulation level for broadcast and multicast frame transmissions to increase the probability that they are received without errors The Multicast Modulation Level parameter is applicable only to data frames Beacons and other wireless management and control frames are always transmitte
290. seaeeeeeaeseeeeesaas 76 Table 3 62 BS AU LEDS vsisi tacia anasinin anaia ai aaa aaa aaa aaa addaa aaaea 77 Table 3 7 PS1073 SU IDU AU SA IDU LED 78 Table 3 8 SUA LEDS iiinis i a a ia ia a i ae ia aa iaaa a A 79 Table 3 9 SU I SNR Bar LED Functtonaltv 80 Table 4 1 Default PDasewore Au 82 Table 4 2 Parameters not reset after Set Complete Factory Operator Deiauhts 92 Table 4 3 Parameters that are not reset after Set Partial Factory Operator Deiauhts 93 Table 4 4 Authentication and Association Process 114 Table 4 5 VLAN Management Port Functional 154 Table 4 6 VLAN Data Port Functionality Access Umk scene tetas eeeeeeseneeeeeaeeetaeeneneeess 155 Table 4 7 VLAN Data Port Functionality Trunk Link 0 cceeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseneeeseaeeetaeeneneeees 156 Table 4 8 VLAN Data Port Functionality Hybrid Link 0 0eeeceeececeeeeeeee cence ee eeaeeeeeeeseneeeseaeeeeaeeneneees 156 Table 4 9 VLAN Data Port Functionality for SU Service Provider Umk 157 Table 4 10 VLAN Data Port Functionality for AU Service Provider Link 158 Table 4 11 Recommended Maximum Modulation Level cccccccccececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeenaeeneneeee 172 Table 4 12 MIR Ranges and Defaults eccccccseeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeeeaaeeeeaeeseeeeesaaeeseaaeseeeeeseaeeeeaeeseeeeee 180 Table 4 13 CIR Ranges and Detaults AAA 181 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual xxvi Chapter 1 System Description In This Chapter
291. sections describe how to install the outdoor units including pole mounting the ODU and connecting the indoor to outdoor grounding and RF cables Ensure that outdoor units antennas and supporting structures are properly installed to eliminate any physical hazard to either people or property Make sure that the installation of the outdoor unit antenna and cables is performed in accordance with all relevant national and local building and safety codes Even where grounding is not mandatory according to applicable regulation and national codes it is highly recommended to ensure that the outdoor unit and the antenna pole when using external antenna are grounded and suitable lightning protection devices are used so as to provide protection against voltage surges and static charges In any event Alvarion is not liable for any injury damage or regulation violations associated with or caused by installation grounding or lightning protection Pole Mounting the Outdoor Unit This section is not applicable for the new SU A ODU For details on pole mounting the new SU A ODU refer to section 2 3 2 The Outdoor Unit can be mounted on a pole using one of the following options E Special clamps and threaded rods are supplied with each unit There are two pairs of threaded holes on the back of the unit enabling to use the special clamps for mountingthe unit on diverse pole diameters E Special grooves on the sides of the unit enable the use of metal
292. ses to activate any configuration changes you must reset the unit Certain settings are automatically activated without having to reset the unit Refer to Appendix F for information on which parameters are run time configurable which means that the unit need not be reset for the parameter to take effect and which parameters do require that the unit be reset BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 84 Menus and Parameters 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 Menus and Parameters The following sections describe the menus and parameters provided by the Monitor program Main Menu The Main Menu enables to access the following menus depending on your access level as described in section 4 1 E Info Screens Provides a read only display of current parameter values Available at all access levels E Unit Control Enables to access general operations such as resetting the unit reverting to factory default parameters changing passwords and switching between software versions Available at the Installer and Administrator access levels E Basic Configuration Enables to access the set of parameters that are configured during the installation process These parameters are also available in the Advanced Configuration menu Available at the Installer and Administrator access levels E Site Survey Enables to activate certain tests and view various system counters Available at the Installer and Administrator access levels E Advanced Configuration
293. sible to manage devices connected behind the unit that are also configured with NO VLAN If the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled a data frame received with a VLAN ID that is not a member of the unit s VLAN Forwarding List is discarded x If the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled be sure to include the VLAN ID Management value of all units that should be managed via the wireless port of the unit in the Forwarding List If the VLAN Relaying option is enabled in an AU a data frame relayed with a VLAN ID that is not a member of the unit s VLAN Relaying List is discarded Ed If the VLAN Relaying option is enabled and you manage your devices from behind an SU unit be sure to include the VLAN ID Management value of all units to be managed when relaying via the wireless port of the AU unit in the Relaying List If the VLAN Forwarding option is also enabled in the AU these VLAN IDs should also be included in the Forwarding List Table 4 7 summarizes the functionality of the data port for a Trunk link Operation and Administration 155 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration Table 4 7 VLAN Data Port Functionality Trunk Link Accept from Ethernet Tagged frames If Forwarding is enabled only frames with VLAN ID values which are included in the Forwarding list Accept from Wireless Tagged frames If Forwarding is enabled only frames with VLAN ID values which are included in the Forwarding list Tag Insert Tag Remov
294. sity can accumulate to create substantial changes in SU performance The quest for load sharing together with the desire to create best throughput conditions for the SU created the need for the Best AU feature to enable an SU to connect to the best AU in its neighborhood When the Best AU feature is used each of the AUs is given a quality mark based on the level at which it is received by the SU The SU scans for a configured number of cycles gathering information from all the AUs with which it can communicate At the end of the scanning period the SU reaches a Best AU decision according to the information gathered The AU with the highest quality mark is selected as the Best AU and the SU will immediately try to associate with it The quality mark given to each AU depends on the level at which it is received by the SU The Best AU selection mechanism can be overridden by defining a specific AU as the preferred AU Although the SU selects the Best AU based on long term conditions prior to the decision time it may not always be connected to the instantaneous Best AU at any given time Note also that the decision is made only once during the scanning interval The decision may not remain the optimal one for ever If there are significant changes in deployment of neighboring AUs and the SUs served by them overall performance may be improved if the applicable SUs are reset intentionally so as to re initiate the Best AU decision process The Best
295. sociations is the value configured for this parameter which might be higher than the actual limit The Maximum Number of Associations Limit 512 when Data Encryption is disabled 124 when Data Encryption is enabled is indicated in the Show Air Interface Parameters display Ed There is no aging time for SUs An SU is only removed from the list of associated SUs under the following conditions E A SNAP frame is received from another AU indicating that the SU is now associated with the other AU HR The SU failed to respond to a certain number of consecutive frames transmitted by the AU and is considered to have aged out Therefore the database of associated SUs may include units no longer associated with the AU If the number of associated SUs has reached the value of the Maximum Number of Associations parameter the selected AU cannot serve additional SUs To view the current number of associated SUs use the Display Association Info option in the MAC Address Database menu To delete inactive SUs from the database you must reset the AU 4 2 6 2 13 Wireless Link Trap Threshold AU only The Wireless Link Trap Threshold parameter defines the threshold for the wireless quality trap indicating that the quality of the wireless link has dropped below on trap or has increased above off trap the specified threshold The Wireless Link Trap Threshold is in percentage of retransmissions and the allowed range is from 1 to 100 The default
296. ssseesseesseessresssrerrnsersereees 22 Table 1 16 Connectors Modular Base Station Eouipment 23 Table 1 17 Electrical Specifications Modular Base Station Eoumpment 23 Table 1 18 Mechanical Specifications Stand Alone Access Unit c cccccecceceeseeeeeesseeeeeessteeeeesssteeeenees 24 Table 1 19 Connectors Stand Alone ACCESS Un 25 Table 1 20 Electrical Specifications Stand Alone Access Un 25 Table 1 21 25dBi Antenna Specifications ccccccececceeeeeeceeececeeeeeceaeeeeaaeeseaeeecaaeeseaaeseeneesseessaaeseeneeeseees 26 Table 1 22 SU I D Wall Window Detached Antenna Specifications ccccceccceesseeceeneeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 26 Table 1 23 Environmental Gpechflcatlons sie triettiettietttntttisttinttnnttnuttnnttnnntnn ttnn nten nenn nnt 27 Table 2 1 Subscriber Unit ODU Types 0 0 ccecceeeeceeeee eee aeeeeaeeceeeeeeceaeeeeaeeseaeeeceaeessaaesdeneessaeeesaeseeneesenees 30 Tables Table 2 2 Approved Category 5E Ethernet Cables ccccccccccsscccccseseeceeseeeeeseseaeeeeesaeeesssesaeeesseseeseseaaes 33 Table 2 3 SU I Panel Components AE 49 Table 2 4 BS PS LED Functionality sisirin aaa aada aiaa 60 BEIER ee Lu 66 Table 3 2 Recommended Maximum Modulation Level 73 Table 3 3 EEGEN GREEN 74 Table 3 4 SU ODU EE neet aiie kedeeug Zedgeteg staat eistende gents aan eae dantaeeeves Seed e 75 Table 3 5 SU ODU SNR Bar LED Funcettonaltty 2 cecccccececeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeee scenes ceaeeeeaaeseeeee
297. sword WR Configuration of remote access direction from Ethernet only from wireless link only or from both HN Configuration of IP addresses of authorized stations Security Authentication messages encryption option Data encryption option WEP and AES OCB 128 bit encryption algorithms FIPS 197 certified encryption optional for Access Units with HW revision C or higher excluding AUS units under license m ESSID SNMP Agents SNMP ver 1 client MIB II Bridge MIB Private BreezeACCESS VL MIB Allocation of IP parameters Configurable or automatic DHCP client m TFTP m TFTP System Description Chapter 1 System Description 1 7 4 Standards Compliance General Table 1 9 Standards Compliance General EMC m FCC Part 15 class B m ETSI EN 300 489 1 m UL 1950 m EN 60950 Environmental Operation m ETS 300 019 part 2 3 class 3 2E for indoor H ETS 300 019 part 2 4 class 4 1E for outdoor Storage ETS 300 019 2 1 class 1 2E Transportation ETS 300 019 2 2 class 2 3 Lightning protection EN 61000 4 5 Class 3 2kV AU ODU Antenna connection Radio E FCC Part 15 247 m ETSI EN 300 328 m ETSI EN 301 893 2003 04 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Specifications 1 7 5 Physical and Electrical 1 7 5 1 SU A E Subscriber Unit In the 5 4 and 5 8 GHz band the equipment may be shipped with a new smaller size SU A ODU that supports both horizontal and vertical polarization 1 7 5 1 1 Mechanical T
298. t E The Maximum Allowed Tx Power as defined for the applicable Sub Band BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters E The Maximum EIRP as defined for the applicable Sub Band together with the value of the Antenna Gain In certain countries the Maximum EIRP of some equipment types cannot exceed a certain value In these cases the Transmit Power cannot exceed the value of Maximum EIRP Antenna Gain For information on how to view the Sub Bands supported by the unit and the supported parameters values and options refer to section 4 2 2 4 The unit calculates the maximum allowed Maximum Tx Power according to the unit properties and parameters listed above and displays the allowed range when the Maximum Tx Power parameter is selected For each modulation level the unit will use as maximum transmit power the minimum between this parameter and the maximum Tx power allowed by the HW and the Country Code for the specific modulation level The default Maximum Tx Power is the highest allowed value 4 2 6 2 8 2 2Show Maximum Tx Power Parameters This option displays the Maximum Tx Power parameter and the current maximum Tx power for the different modulation levels 4 2 6 2 8 3 ATPC Parameters in AU 4 2 6 2 8 3 1 ATPC Option The ATPC Option enables or disables the Automatic Transmit Power Control ATPC algorithm The default is Enable 4 2 6 2 8 3 2ATPC Minimum SNR Level The Minimum SNR Level defines the lowest
299. t Setting options are available only to users with Administrator access rights The available options are E Set Defaults E Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults Set Defaults The Set Defaults submenu enables reverting the system parameters toa predefined set of defaults There are two sets of default configurations A Factory Defaults This is the standard default configuration B Operator Defaults Operator Defaults configuration can be defined by the Administrator using the Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults option in this menu It may also be defined at the factory according to specific operator s definition The default Operator Defaults configuration is the Factory Defaults configuration The current configuration file and the Operator Defaults configuration file can be uploaded downloaded by the unit using FTP For more information see section 4 2 3 7 option These files can also be uploaded downloaded remotely using TFTP see Appendix B The available options in the Set Defaults submenu are E Set Complete Factory Defaults Operation and Administration 91 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration E Set Partial Factory Defaults E Set Complete Operator Defaults E Set Partial Operator Defaults E Cancel Current Pending Request 4 2 3 2 1 1 Set Complete Factory Defaults Select this option to reset the unit to the standard Factory Defaults configuration excluding several parameters t
300. t indicate the true quality as not all modulation levels from 1 to 8 are available The limitation may be due to the HW of the unit HW Revision A or the applicable parameters in the country code or the configurable Maximum Modulation Level parameter Click the Esc key to abort the test MAC Address Database MAC Address Database in AU The MAC Address Database option in the AU displays information regarding the Subscriber Units associated with the AU as well as bridging forwarding information When DRAP is supported it enables viewing details on the active Gateways in the sector The following options are available Operation and Administration 111 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration E Display Bridging and Association Info The Display Bridging and Association Info option displays a list of all the Subscriber Units and stations in the AU s Forwarding Database For stations behind an SU the SU s MAC address is also displayed SU Address Each MAC address entry is followed by a description which may include the following Et Ethernet An address learned from the Ethernet port Vp Virtual port An address of a node behind an associated SU For these addresses learned from the wireless port the address of the applicable SU is also displayed in parenthesis St Static An associated SU For these entries the following details are also displayed SU Unit Name SU SW version SU Unit Type a
301. t value are shown in Table 4 12 The actual value will be the entered value rounded to the nearest multiple of 128 N 128 Operation and Administration 179 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration 4 2 6 6 2 2 MIR Uplink SU only Sets the Maximum Information Rate of the up link from the SU to the AU The MIR value cannot be lower than the corresponding CIR value Available values range and default value are shown in Table 4 12 The actual value will be the entered value rounded to the nearest multiple of 128 N 128 4 2 6 6 2 3 CIR Downlink SU only Sets the Committed Information Rate of the downlink from the AU to the SU The CIR value cannot be higher than the corresponding MIR value Available values range and default value are shown in Table 4 13 The actual value will be the entered value rounded to the nearest multiple of 128 N 128 4 2 6 6 2 4 CIR Uplink SU only Sets the Committed Information Rate of the uplink from the SU to the AU The CIR value cannot be higher than the corresponding MIR value Available values range and default value are shown in Table 4 13 The actual value will be the entered value rounded to the nearest multiple of 128 N 128 Table 4 12 MIR Ranges and Defaults Unit Range Kbps Default Kbps Range Kbps Default Kbps Type BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 180 Menus and Parameters Table 4 13 CIR Ranges and Defaults CIR Uplink CIR Downlink Unit R
302. tName Applicable to all units The unit DisplayString SIZE 32 UnitControl 3 name A string of up to 32 See ASCII characters FlashMemoryControl Applicable to all units Integer UnitControl 4 Reset And Boot From Shadow resetAndBootFrom Version Activates the shadow ShadowVersion 1 version useRunningVersion Use Running Version After Reset AfterReset 2 The currently active version will cancel 3 become the main version and will be activated after next reset TelnetLogoutTimer Applicable to all units Time out of UnitControl 5 management via Telnet Automatic exit if the program is inactive for the defined time Integer 1 999 minutes SaveCurrentConfigurationAs Applicable to all units Saves the Integer OperatorDefaults current configuration as Operator ee 1 UnitControl 6 Defaults cancel 2 E Applicable to all units Exit the SCC UnitControl 7 Telnet Monitor session ao 1 exit 2 UnitPasswords Applicable to all units Unit UnitControl 8 passwords HeadOnlyPasoword Applicable to all units The User DisplayString SIZE 8 UnitPasswords 1 read only password Up to 8 printable ASCII characters InstallerPassword Applicable to all units The DisplayString SIZE 8 UnitPasswords 2 Installer password Up to 8 printable ASCII characters DisplayString SIZE 8 Up to 8 printable ASCII characters AdminPassword Applicable to all units The UnitPasswords 3 Adm
303. tcp 4 Integer rtpANDrtcp 1 rtpOnly 2 241 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB MIB Parameter Value Range Integer UdpPortRangeNum Applicable to all units Read UdpPortRangeConfig 2 only The number of entries in the UDP Port Range Table UdpPortRangeTable Applicable to all units Not UdpPortRangeConfig 3 accessible A table of UDP port ranges used for prioritization The user can define up to 64 ranges An entry is empty if start is 65535 and end is 0 UdpPortRangeEntry Applicable to all units Not UdpPortRangeTable 1 accessible A UDP Port Ranges Table entry UdpPortRangeStart Applicable to all units Read Integer UdpPortRangeEntry 1 only Start port of an UDP 0 65535 Port Range UdpPortRangeEnd Applicable to all units Read Integer UdpPortRangeEntry 2 only End port of an UDP 0 65535 Port Range UdpPortRangeldx Applicable to all units Read Integer UdpPortRangeEntry 3 only Index of an UDP Port 1 64 Range entry UdpPortRangeAdd Applicable to all units Add DisplayString UdpPortRangeConfig 4 port range s to UDP Port A range is defined by Ranges Table lt start gt lt end gt or lt start gt Get operation will return an where lt start gt is the Start empty string Port of the range and lt end gt is the End Port If only lt start gt is specified the range is lt start gt lt start gt The value of lt start gt and lt end gt are between 0 and 65535 The user can ad
304. ter threshold is exceeded and it contains the number of packets that were dropped since the last trap UnsupportedSubscriberTypeTRAP 110 Applicable to AUS only This trap is generated when a subscriber unit that is not supported tries to associate with the AUS The AUS supports only up to 8 SU 3 and or SU 6 and or SU I units UnitTypeChangedTRAP 111 Applicable to BU RB only This trap is generated when the user changes the type of the unit The RB can be converted to BU or vice versa Revision C and higher UnitMacAddress UnitMacAddress EthBroadcastThresholdExceeded TrapSUMacAddr TrapSubscriberType TrapMACAddress NewUnitType BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 262 Supported Traps Trap Number PrioritizationNotSupportedBySUTRAP 112 Applicable to AU only This TrapSUMACAddress trap is generated when an GU TrapSWVersion with a SW version below 4 0 that does not support Wireless Link Prioritization is associated with an AU with the Wireless Link Prioritization Option enabled BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 263 endix F Parameters Summary The tables provide an at a glance summary of the configurable parameters alue ranges and default values In addition each parameter entry also cludes an indication as to whether the parameter is updated in run time or hether the unit must be reset before the modification takes effect Appendix F Parameters Summary F 1 Parameters
305. th will be determined by the Best AU mechanism including the optional use of the Preferred AU feature Otherwise the SU will try to associate with the first AU it finds If no AU is found the SU will start another scanning cycle Avoiding Frequencies with Radar Activity In some regions it is important to ensure that wireless access equipment does not interfere with certain radar systems in the 5 GHz band If radar is being detected the wireless access network should move automatically to a frequency that does not interfere with the radar system The country dependent set of parameters includes also an indication whether DFS Dynamic Frequency Selection should be used The DFS algorithm is designed to detect and avoid operation in channels with radar activity If the current sub band does not support DFS then the DFS parameters configuration submenu is not available When the DFS Option is enabled the AU monitors the spectrum continuously searching for signals with a specific pattern indication radar activity Upon detecting radar activity the AU immediately stops transmitting on this frequency and starts looking for another radar free frequency The subset of viable frequencies is configurable The AU maintains a continuously updated database of all applicable frequencies where each frequency is marked as Radar Free Radar Detected or Adjacent to Radar The AU attempts to check a new frequency only if it is marked as Radar Free If
306. the cell and the prevailing conditions that influence the performance of the wireless link In some situations the minimum rate CIR cannot be provided This may result from high demand and poor wireless link conditions and or high demand in over subscribed cells When this occurs the actual information rate is lower than the CIR The simple solution for managing the information rate in such cases can result in an unfair allocation of resources as subscribers with a higher CIR actually receive an IR lower than the CIR designated for subscribers in a lower CIR bracket A special algorithm for graceful degradation is incorporated into the AU ensuring that the degradation of performance for each individual Subscriber Unit is proportional to its CIR The MIR CIR algorithm uses buffers to control the flow of data To balance the performance over time a special Burst Duration algorithm is employed to enable higher transmission rates after a period of inactivity If no data is received from the Ethernet port during the last N seconds the unit is allowed to transmit N times its CIR value without any delay For example after a period of inactivity of 0 5 seconds a unit with CIR 128 Kbps can transmit up to 128 Kbits x 0 5 64 Kbits without any delay MIR Downlink SU only Sets the Maximum Information Rate of the downlink from the AU to the SU The MIR value cannot be lower than the corresponding CIR value Available values range and defaul
307. the range value is used to define the address group BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Integer disable 1 ipOnly 2 userDefinedAddrOnly 3 pPPoEOnly 4 na 255 pFilterTable UserFilterParams 2 246 breezeAccessVLMib MIB Parameter Value Range pFilterRange Applicable to SU RB An Integer lpFilterEntry 3 address range for the IP 0 255 Filter entry The first address in the range is the IP address iPID O means that the range is not used Either a mask or a range but not both can be used to define an address group If the range is other than 0 than the mask is ignored and only the range value is used to define the address group IpFilterldx Applicable to SU RB Integer lpFilterEntry 4 Read only A table index for 1 8 the IP Filter entry DeleteOneUserFilter Applicable to SU RB Integer UserFilterParams 3 Deletes a single selected deletefirstEntry 1 entry from the IP Filter table deletesecondEntry 2 deletethirdEntry 3 deletefourthEntry 4 deletefifthEntry 5 deletesixthEntry 6 deleteseventhEntry 7 deleteeighthEntry 8 cancelOperation 9 na 255 DeleteAllUserFilters Applicable to SU RB Integer UserFilterParams 4 Deletes all entries from the deleteAll 1 IP Filter table cancelOperation 2 na 255 DHCPUnicastOverrideFilter Applicable to SU RB Integer UserFilterParams 5 Enables or disables the disable 1 unicast DHCP message
308. the system administrator can be alerted that the SU should be upgraded This is necessary because otherwise an SU that does not support the Wireless Link Prioritization feature will send all the traffic as high priority Verify that all SUs served by an AU with the Wireless Link Prioritization Option enabled use a SW version that supports this feature SW version 4 0 and higher Otherwise overall performance and quality of service in the cell may be reduced since all data from an SU with SW version below 4 0 will be sent with high priority The Wireless Link Prioritization Parameters menu includes the following 4 2 6 6 3 5 1 Wireless Link Prioritization Option The Wireless Link Prioritization Option enables or disables the Wireless Link Prioritization feature The default option is Disable BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 6 3 5 2Low Priority AIFS The Low Priority AIFS defines the AIFS number of time slots that will be used by the AU and the SUs served by it for low priority traffic The range is from 3 to 254 time slots The default is 3 4 2 6 6 3 5 3 Number of HW Retries for High Priority Traffic The Number of HW Retries for High Priority Traffic defines the maximum number of times that an unacknowledged high priority unicast packet can be retransmitted This is the value that will be used by the AU and by the SUs served with it The range is from 1 to 14 times The default is 10 times
309. the value of the Current Transmit Power and the desired range is smaller than the step size the power up power down message will include the specific step value required for this condition Valid range 1 20 dB Default value 5 dB ATPC Parameters in SU 4 2 6 2 8 4 1ATPC Option 4 2 6 2 8 5 136 The ATPC Option enables or disables the Automatic Transmit Power Control ATPC algorithm The parameter takes effect immediately However when changed from Enable to Disable the transmit power level will remain at the last Current Transmit Power determined by the ATPC algorithm before it was disabled It will change to the value configured for the Initial Transmit Power parameter only after the next reset or following loss of synchronization The default is Enable The accuracy of the Transmit Power level is typically 1 dB However at levels that are 15 dB or more below the maximum supported by the hardware the accuracy is 3 dB for information on hardware limitations refer to the Country Codes document At these levels the use of ATPC may cause significant fluctuations in the power level of the transmitted signal When operating at such low levels it is recommended to disable the ATPC Option and to set the Transmit Power parameter to the average Tx Power level before the ATPC was disabled Tx Control AU only The Tx Control option enables turning Off On the AU s transmitter or having the AU Tx status controlled by th
310. they can serve BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Base Station Equipment E The AU BS Access Unit can serve up to 512 Subscriber Units 124 when Data Encryption is used E The AUS BS Access Unit can serve up to 8 SU 3 and or SU 6 and or SU I Subscriber Units Ed For convenience all references to AU BS are applicable also for AUS BS unless explicitly stated otherwise f A The AU D E BS ODU outdoor unit contains the processing and an radio modules and connects to an external antenna using a short RF cable E model units are supplied without an antenna D model units are supplied with a detached antenna where the available antennas are listed in Table 1 2 Table 1 2 AU Detached Antennas men Band GHz Horizontal Beam Width Gain dBi wesen Lasel w wesen Lass Ir Auen Tomm ze Ire Auen Lass ze Io AU Ant 5 8G 14 120 UK 5 725 5 850 120 14 The antenna pattern complies with Ofcom s IR 2007 EIRP profiles The BS AU indoor module connects to the network through a standard IEEE 802 3 Ethernet 10 100BaseT RJ 45 interface The indoor module is connected to the outdoor unit via a Category 5E Ethernet cable This cable carries Ethernet traffic between the indoor module and the outdoor unit and also transfers power 54 VDC and control from the indoor module to the outdoor unit System Description Chapter 1 System Description deg x Standalone Micro cell Access Unit The standalone
311. tinuously updated information on the quality of the wireless link The Link quality submenu includes the following options Continuous Average SNR Display The Continuous Average SNR Display option displays continuously updated information regarding the average quality of the received signal using Signal to Noise Ratio SNR measurements Click the Esc key to abort the test Continuous UpLink Quality Indicator Display The Continuous UpLink Quality Indicator Display option displays continuously updated information regarding the average quality of the wireless link to the AU using the dynamically updated average modulation level measurements The Link Quality Indicator LOD calculation is performed using the formula LQI 0 9 x Previous LQI 0 1 x Last Successful Modulation Level Each successful transmit will be included in this average by using the modulation level in which the frame was successfully transmitted as the Last Successful Modulation Level In order to receive quick and reliable LQI measurements there should be sufficient traffic between the SU and the AU It is recommended to have traffic of at least 100 packets per second The traffic can be generated either by an external utility FTP session ping generator etc or by the Ping Test option in the Site Survey menu with the appropriate settings see section 4 2 5 2 If Limited Test is indicated next to the LQI results it means that the results may no
312. tionEntry 3 OFDM frames detected in the channel SpectrumAnalysisInformationSignalSNR Applicable to all units Read only Integer SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntry 4 The approximate SNR of the signals excluding OFDM frames detected in the relevant channel SpectrumAnalysisInformationSignalWidt Applicable to all units Read only Integer h The average width in microseconds SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntry 5 of the signals excluding OFDM frames detected in the relevant channel SpectrumAnalysisInformationOFDMFra Applicable to all units Read only Integer mes The number of OFDM frames SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntry 6 received in the relevant channel MaxNumOfAssociationsLimit Applicable to AU only Not Integer Airlnterface 19 applicable to BreezeNET B AU BS AU SA If Data products Shows the limit for the Encryption is enabled the number of SUs that can be upper limit is 124 Otherwise associated with the AU itis 512 AUS BS AUS SA with SW version below 4 0 5 AUS BS AUS SA with SW version 4 0 and higher 8 BreezeNET B products return 65535 ae RE Airlnterface 20 DisassociateAllSUs Applicable to AU Disassociate ass Integer Disassociate 1 SUs cancelOperation 1 disassociateAllSUs 2 Disassociate 2 specified SU BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 236 breezeAccessVLMib Applicable to AU BU Enables to turn Integer the transmitter Off and On If set to on 1 ethe
313. to O to disable the contention window back off algorithm The AIFS parameter is not applicable when the Wireless Link Prioritization Option is enabled The available options are 1 or 2 time slots The default is 2 time slots An AIFS value of 1 should only be used in point to point applications when the Wireless Link Prioritization Option is enabled Otherwise the default value of 2 must always be used In a point to point link only one unit should be configured to an AIFS value of 1 When both units need to transmit the unit with an AIFS value of 1 will have an advantage over the unit with AIFS of 2 In this case the Minimum Contention Window parameter in both units must be configured to 0 to disable the contention window back off algorithm BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 2 12 Maximum Number of Associations AU only The Maximum Number of Associations parameter defines the maximum number of Subscriber Units that can be associated with the selected AU while still guaranteeing the required quality of service to customers Available values for AU BS and AU SA range from O to 512 For AUS BS and AUS SA the range is from 0 to 8 Default value for AU BS and AU SA is 512 For AUS BS and AUS SA the default is 8 x When the Data Encryption Option is enabled the actual maximum number of SUs that can associate with the AU BS or AU SA is limited to 124 The number displayed for the Maximum Number of As
314. top or a shelf It can also be wall mounted using the optional bracket available from Alvarion It uses a detached antenna Instructions for the available installation options of the detached antenna included in the SU I D package are provided in the antenna package and in Section 2 5 5 It is recommended to install the antenna on a window or on a wall according to specific conditions of the location The antenna should be facing the direction of the Base Station Use only the RF cable supplied with the antenna if needed use a longer Ethernet cable Avoid metal obstacles such as metal window frames or metal film anti glare windows in the transmission path Position the antenna away from electrical equipment including the data equipment monitor etc metal furniture and moving metal objects such as metal fans or doors 2 5 4 Installing the SU I 2 5 4 1 Connecting the GU gt To install the SU I 1 Connect the Power Adapter DC cable to the POWER jack Connect the Power Adapter to the AC mains SS BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Installing the SU I Verify that the green Status LED located on the unit s front panel illuminates indicating that the power supply to the unit is OK and self test passed successfully Connect the RF cable supplied with the antenna to the SMA jack located on the unit s front panel Install the antenna using the instructions provided in Section 2 5 5 on page 52 and connect to it the other end
315. trol menu Configuration File Name Configuration File Source Directory Operator Defaults File Name FTP Log File Upload Parameters The parameters for Event Log file upload using FTP as defined in the Unit Control menu FTP Log File Name FTP Log File Destination Directory Event Log Policy Show Basic Configuration The Show Basic Configuration menu is a read only menu that displays the current values of the parameters included in the Basic Configuration menu BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 2 3 4 2 2 4 Show Advanced Configuration The Show Advanced Configuration menu enables to access the read only sub menus that display the current values of the parameters included in the applicable sub menus of the Advanced Configuration menu Show Country Dependent Parameters Each country has its radio regulation regarding transmissions in the applicable bands that affect parameters such as available frequencies bandwidth transmit power etc Some other parameters and options may also vary among countries For each country one or more sets of parameters are pre configured in the factory If more than one set is available the set to be used can be selected The Show Country Dependent Parameters displays the available set s of these parameters and includes the following E Country Code The up to 3 digits country code according to ISO 3166 and the country name Some regulatory requir
316. trum analysis Applicable to all units Activates the spectrum analysis The unit is automatically reset upon activation Applicable to all units Read only Indicates whether the unit is currently performing a spectrum analysis process Integer Range 1 100 seconds Integer disable 1 enable 2 na 255 Integer cancelOperation 1 activateNow 2 Integer inactive 1 currentlyActive 2 235 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB ResetSpectrumCounters Applicable to all units Resets the Integer SpectrumAnalysisParameters 6 spectrum analysis counters cancelOperation 1 resetCounters 2 SpectrumAnalysisParameters 7 accessible The spectrum analysis information table SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntry Applicable to all units Not SpectrumAnalysisInformationTable 1 accessible An entry in the spectrum analysis information table SpectrumAnalysisInformationT ableldx Applicable to all units Read only A SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntry 1 table index for a Spectrum Analysis Information Entry in the Spectrum Analysis Information Table SpectrumAnalysisInformationChannel Applicable to all units Read only DisplayString SpectrumAnalysisInformationEntry 2 The channel s frequency of the relevant entry in the Spectrum Analysis Information Table SpectrumAnalysisInformationSignalCou Applicable to all units Read only Integer nt The number of signals excluding SpectrumAnalysisInforma
317. ts Not applicable to SU RB with SW version 4 0 and higher Read only The frequency in MHz of an entry in the Current Frequency Subset table Replaces CurrentFrequencySubsetFrequency to support a resolution of 0 5 MHz for units with HW revision C and higher Applicable to AU BU with HW revision B and lower for units with HW revision C and higher replaced by CurrentUOperatingFrequencyNew to support a resolution of 0 5 MHz Read only The operating frequency in MHz Applicable to AU BU with HW revision B and lower for units with HW revision C and higher replaced by DefinedAUOperatingFrequencyNew to support a resolution of 0 5 MHz Read only For 5 8 GHz products with SW version below 2 0 this is the frequency in MHz of the AU BU after the next reset For units with SW version 2 0 and up this is the frequency in MHz to use when the DFS Option is disabled Applicable to SU RB Read only The current operating frequency in MHz DisplayString Integer For 5 8 GHz products with SW version below 2 0 the range is 5740 to 5830 MHz using a 10 MHz resolution For units with SW version 2 0 and up the range is as defined in the selected Sub Band Integer For 5 8 GHz products with SW version below 2 0 the range is 5740 to 5830 MHz using a 10M Hz resolution For units with SW version 2 0 and up the range is as defined in the selected Sub Band DisplayString For 5 8 GHz products with SW version below 2 0 the ra
318. udes the following options Destination IP Address The destination IP address of the device being pinged The default IP address is 192 0 0 1 Number of Pings to Send The number of ping attempts per session The available range is from O to 9999 The default value is 1 Select O for continuous pinging Ping Frame Length The ping packet size The available range is from 60 to 1472 bytes The default value is 64 bytes Ping Frame Timeout The ping frame timeout which is the amount of time in ms between ping attempts The available range is from 100 to 60 000 ms The default value is 200 ms Start Sending Starts the transmission of ping frames Stop Sending Stops the transmission of ping frames The test is automatically ended when the number of pings has reached the value specified in the No of Pings parameter described above The Stop Sending option can be used to end the test before completing the specified number of pings or if continuous pinging is selected Show Ping Test Values Displays the current values of the ping test parameters the transmission status which means whether it is currently sending or not sending pings the number of pings sent and the number of pings received which means the number of acknowledged frames BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Menus and Parameters 4 2 5 3 4 2 5 3 1 4 2 5 3 2 4 2 5 4 4 2 5 4 1 Link Quality SU only The Link Quality submenu enables viewing con
319. vity Indicator the green embedded LED does not blink when there should be traffic on the Ethernet port The unit does not respond to ping If connected directly to PC use a crossed cable Otherwise use a straight cable Wrong type of Ethernet cable ee cable Saaremaa Ethernet cable Reese IP configuration Make sure that the Wee is on the same subnet as the unt Wrong Ethernet port Make sure that the speed and duplex operation mode settings in the PC match the configuration in the unit the default is Auto Negotiation If the IP parameters of the unit are unknown use the Set Factory Defaults utility to restore the default factory configuration of all parameters except to Passwords general FTP parameters and AU s Frequency The IP address of the unit after setting to factory defaults is 10 0 0 1 276 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual SU Association Problems G 2 SU Association Problems Problem and Indication Possible Cause Corrective Action SU does not associate with AU Wrong configuration Check proper configuration of basic parameters ESSID Sub band and frequencies subset Best AU parameters ATPC Option Transmit Power Maximum Transmit Power Antenna Gain Security parameters Authentication Algorithm and Default Key If necessary use Promiscuous Mode in AU Access is denied by AU Verify that the SU is not included in MAC Address Deny List of the AU Link quality is too low Verify t
320. w queue will be sent Data packets are routed to either the High or Low queue according to the queue selected for them before the MIR CIR mechanism for more information see section 4 2 6 6 3 Broadcasts multicasts are routed to the Medium queue applicable only for AU Control and wireless management frames generated in the unit are routed to the High queue Any frame coming from the Ethernet port which is meant to reach another BreezeACCESS VL unit via the wireless port as opposed to messages intended for stations behind other BreezeACCESS VL units is sent to the High queue regardless of the priority configuration Operation and Administration 107 Chapter 4 Operation and Administration The Wireless Link Counters include the following statistics 108 Total transmitted frames to wireless The number of frames transmitted to the wireless medium The total includes one count for each successfully transmitted unicast frame excluding retransmissions and the number of transmitted multicast and broadcast frames including control and wireless management frames In the AU there are also separate counters for the following Beacons AU only Management and Other Data frames including successfully transmitted unicast frames and multicast broadcast data frames excluding retransmissions excluding Beacons in AU Total Transmitted Unicasts AU only The number of unicast frames successfully transmitted to
321. ween entries For example 8900 9000 9005 9010 9016 9017 E Delete TCP Port Ranges This option enables deleting TCP port ranges from the list of priority port numbers It is possible to delete discrete port numbers and or ranges In ranges a hyphen is used to separate between start and end port numbers A comma is used to separate between entries For example 8900 9000 9005 9010 9016 9017 E Delete All TCP Port Ranges This option enables deleting all TCP port ranges from the list of priority port numbers BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 186 Menus and Parameters 4 2 6 6 3 4 4 2 6 6 3 5 E Show TCP Port Ranges Select this option to view the current TCP RTP RTCP Prioritization option and the list of TCP Port Ranges Low Priority Traffic Minimum Percent This feature ensures that a certain amount of low priority packets specified by the Low Priority Traffic Minimum Percent LPTMP parameter is transmitted even at the expense of high priority traffic The mechanism guarantees a low priority traffic with a rate of LPTMP RT 100 where RT symbolizes the allowed traffic rate The high priority traffic will thus not be able to exceed 100 LPTMP RT 100 If the system receives high priority traffic at a rate higher than this figure some high priority packets will be discarded The range is between O and 100 The default value is O D l Wireless Link Prioritization Parameters AU To better support delay sensitive
322. whether the quality has gone below or above the specified threshold DisplayString SIZE 31 Up to 31 printable case sensitive ASCII characters Integer disable 1 enable 2 DisplayString SIZE 31 Up to 31 printable case sensitive ASCII characters DisplayString SIZE 31 Up to 31 printable case sensitive ASCII characters Integer Range For units with SW version bellow version 2 0 the range is 0 50000 Meters For units with SW version 2 0 and up the range is 0 to 54 Kilometers 0 means no compensation minimum slot size maximal delay timeout Integer oneSlot 1 twoSlots 2 na 255 Integer 1 100 225 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB TransmitPowerTable Airlnterface 5 Integer 1 4 Applicable to all units Not accessible Transmit Power parameters table TransmitPowerEntry TransmitPowerTable 1 Applicable to all units Not accessible An entry in the Transmit Power parameters table Applicable to all units Read only An index of an entry in the Transmit Power parameters table Applicable to all units Read only The applicable modulation level for an entry in the Transmit Power parameters table Level 8 is not applicable to units with HW revision A Applicable to all units Read only The allowed range for the TxPower parameter at the applicable modulation level Applicable to all units Read only for units with SW version 4 0 and higher AU BU The t
323. words x Following three unsuccessful login attempts using incorrect passwords the monitor program is blocked for several minutes To enable access to the monitor program during that time the unit must be reset via SNMP or by disconnecting reconnecting power If you forgot the password type h at the Access Level selection prompt Type Recover at the prompt to get a challenge string consisting of 8 characters Contact Alvarion s Customer Service and give them the challenge string after user identification to receive a one time password Aftering entering this password at the prompt the unit will reboot with the default Administrator password private Three consecutive errors in entering the one time password will invalidate it and block the monitor program A new challenge string should be used to receive a new one time password 5 Enter your password and press Enter The Main Menu is displayed as shown in Figure 4 1 The unit type SW version number and SW release date displayed in the Main Menu vary according to the selected unit and SW version BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 82 Working with the Monitor Program 4 1 2 BreezeACCESS VL AU Official Release Version 4 0 27 Release Date Feb 13 2007 12 59 23 Main Menu Info Screens Det COME 1 2 3 Basic Configuration 4 Site Survey 5 Advanced Configuration xe gt JEE Figure 4 1 Main Menu Administrator Level If
324. x of an entry in the Frequency Subset table 229 Appendix E BreezeACCES VL MIB FrequencySubsetFrequency FrequencySubsetEntry 2 FrequencySubsetActive FrequencySubsetEntry 3 FrequencySubsetFrequencyNew FrequencySubsetEntry 4 SetSelectedFreqsSubset FrequencyDefinition 5 CurrentFrequencySubsetTable FrequencyDefinition 6 CurrentFrequencySubsetEntry CurrentFrequencySubsetTable 1 CurrentFrequencySubsetTableldx CurrentFrequencySubsetEntry 1 CurrentFrequencySubset Frequency FrequencySubsetEntry 2 230 Applicable to all units with HW revision B and lower for units with HW revision C and higher replaced by FrequencySubsetFrequencyNew to support a resolution of 0 5 MHz Not applicable to SU RB with SW version 4 0 and higher Read only The frequency in MHz of an entry in the Frequency Subset table Applicable to all units Not applicable to SU RB with SW version 4 0 and higher The status of an entry in the Frequency subset Table Only frequencies of active entries will be included in the final list of frequencies to be used for scanning Applicable to all units Not applicable to SU RB with SW version 4 0 and higher Read only The frequency in MHz of an entry in the Frequency Subset table Replaces FrequencySubsetFrequency to support a resolution of 0 5 MHz for units with HW revision C and higher Applicable to all units Not applicable to SU RB with SW vers
325. xSuccess ModLevel4 Counter 32 AUAdbEntry 12 AdbTxSuccess ModLevel5 Counter 32 AUAdbEntry 13 AdbTxSuccess ModLevel6 Counter 32 AUAdbEntry 14 Counter 32 AdbTxSuccess ModLevel7 AUAdbEntry 15 AdbTxSuccess ModLevel8 AUAdbEntry 16 Counter 32 were successfully transmitted to the SU over the wireless link using modulation level 8 AdbTxFailed ModLevel1 AUAdbEntry 17 Applicable to AU BU Read only Counts Counter 32 the total number of failures to successfully transmit a unicast frame intended to the SU during a HW Retry cycle using modulation level 1 Applicable to AU BU Read only Counts the total number of failures to successfully transmit a unicast frame intended to the SU during a HW Retry cycle using modulation level 2 Applicable to AU BU Read only Counts the total number of failures to successfully transmit a unicast frame intended to the SU during a HW Retry cycle using modulation level 3 Applicable to AU BU Read only Counts the total number of failures to successfully transmit a unicast frame intended to the SU during a HW Retry cycle using modulation level 4 AdbTxFailed ModLevel2 AUAdbEntry 18 Counter 32 AdbTxFailed ModLevel3 AUAdbEntry 19 Counter 32 AdbTxFailed ModLevel4 AUAdbEntry 20 Counter 32 BreezeACCESS VL System Manual 256 breezeAccessVLMib AdbTxFailed ModLevel5 Applicable to AU BU Read only Counts
326. y access their enterprise network The system supports layer 2 traffic prioritization based on IEEE 802 1p and layer 3 traffic prioritization based on either IP ToS Precedence RFC791 or DSCP RFC2474 It also supports traffic prioritization based on UDP and or TCP port ranges In addition it may use the optional Wireless Link Prioritization WLP feature to fully support delay sensitive applications enabling Multimedia Application Prioritization MAP for high performance voice and video The implementation of MAP through the unique WLP protocol revolutionizes the business model by increasing for example the number of simultaneous VoIP calls per sector by as much as 500 BreezeACCESS VL products operate in unlicensed frequency bands in Time Division Duplex TDD mode using Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing OFDM modulation with Forward Error Correction FEC coding Using the enhanced multi path resistance capabilities of OFDM modem technology BreezeACCESS VL enables operation in near and non line of sight NLOS environments These qualities enable service providers to reach a previously inaccessible and broader segment of the subscriber population BreezeACCESS VL is designed to enable construction of mixed cells where it can be used together with other BreezeACCESS products using GFSK modulation including BreezeACCESS II BreezeACCESS MMDS BreezeACCESS XL and BreezeACCESS V BreezeACCESS VL products are currently avai
327. z and 5 8 GHz bands SU E ODU A connection to an external antenna not included x The SU A ODU and SU E ODU are supplied without the waterproof sealing assembly for the INDOOR connector The sealing assembly is supplied with the IDU to ODU cable kit E Pole mounting kit for the ODU the kit for the new smaller size ODU is different from the kit for all other ODUs ge BreezeACCESS VL System Manual Installation Requirements 2 1 1 2 2 etal s e Ze KN ES Be ZC 2 1 1 2 4 E An IDU to ODU cable kit including 20m Category 5E Ethernet cable with a shielded RJ 45 connector crimped on one end a waterproof sealing assembly and two shielded RJ 45 connectors not applicable for the new SU A ODU Modular Base Station Equipment This section describes the items included in the installation packages for each Modular Base Station system component BS SH Base Station Chassis The BS SH installation kit includes the following components E BS SH chassis with blank panels E Rubber legs for optional desktop installation AU D E BS Access Unit The AU D E BS and installation kit includes the following components E BS AU Network Interface module E AU D E BS ODU outdoor unit E Pole mounting kit for the AU D E BS ODU E In AU D BS kits Antenna including pole mounting hardware E RF cable BS PS AC Power Supply Up to two BS PS AC power supply modules can be included in each Base Station chassis The BS PS AC insta

Manual Alvarion BreezeACCESS VL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents